Contents

Nissan GT-R v17 Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 452
1 of 452

Summary of Content for Nissan GT-R v17 Owner's Manual PDF

20 21 N

ISSA N

G T-R

R 35-D

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicleR35-D

Printing : September 2021 Publication No.:

Printed in the U.S.A.

2021 OWNERS MANUAL

AND MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

OM21E0 0R35U2

. ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint sys- tems. Pre-teen children should be seated in the rear seat.

. ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.

. ALWAYS review this Owners Man- ual for important safety informa- tion.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its perfor- mance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. See the 2021 NISSAN GT-R Warranty Information Booklet for details includ- ing applicable exclusions.

WARNING Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance com- pany monitoring, remote vehicle di- agnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interfer-

ence or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, or- der, date of production, region or avail- ability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equip- ment that are not included or installed on your vehicle. All information, specifications and illustra- tions in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, perfor- mance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide owners with the most accurate information cur- rently available. Please carefully read and

retain with this manual all revision up- dates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and up-to- date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owners Man- uals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https://owners.nissanusa.com/now- ners/navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any informa- tion in your Owners Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. See the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owners Manual for contact information.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:

WARNING This is used to indicate a hazard that could cause death or serious perso- nal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, follow the information and instruc- tions exactly.

CAUTION This is used to indicate a hazard that could cause minor or moderate per- sonal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, follow the information and in- structions carefully.

NOTICE This is used to indicate a hazard that could cause damage to property or your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, follow the information and in- structions. If you see the symbol above, it means Do

not do this or Do not let this happen.

If you see a symbol similar to those above in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those above indicate movement or ac- tion.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to those above call attention to an item in the illustration.

This indicates the title and reference page.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVI- SORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate ma- terial. The following advisory is pro- vided: Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca. gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. 2021 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD. All rights reserved. No part of this Owners Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, me- chanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written per- mission of NISSAN Motor Co., Ltd.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM NISSAN CARES ... Both NISSAN and your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer cannot as- sist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or ques- tions, please contact the NISSAN Consu- mer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers 1-866-668-1GTR (1-866-668-1487)

For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information: . Your name, address, and telephone

number . Vehicle identification number (at-

tached to the top of the instrument panel on the drivers side)

. Date of purchase

. Current odometer reading

. Your NISSAN dealers name

. Your comments or questions OR

You can write to NISSAN with the infor- mation on the left at:

For U.S. customers NISSAN North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 or via e-mail at: nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa. com

For Canadian customers NISSAN Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: information.centre@nissancana- da.com

If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian custo- mers) We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

GT-R Overview GTR

Illustrated table of contents 0 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Table of Contents

Technical and consumer information 10

Index 11

GT-R Overview

GT-R specific information .............................................. GTR-3 Warranty information ................................................. GTR-3 Maintenance information ........................................ GTR-3

GT-R special specification parts ............................... GTR-4 Engine oil .............................................................................. GTR-4 Transmission oil .............................................................. GTR-4 Differential oil (front and rear) ............................. GTR-5 Brake fluid ............................................................................ GTR-5

GT-R special precautions ............................................... GTR-5 Tires and road wheels ............................................... GTR-5 Brake pad and disc rotor ........................................ GTR-6 NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) (if so equipped) ...................................................................... GTR-6 Exhaust muffler and trunk carpet .................... GTR-7 Titanium muffler and trunk carpet (if so equipped) ...................................................................... GTR-7 Dry carbon fiber parts (if so equipped) ........ GTR-8 Engine start and stop ................................................ GTR-8

GT-R performance optimization services ......... GTR-8 Wheel alignment inspection and adjustment (if necessary) (including tire pressure adjustment) ................................................. GTR-9 Transmission settings ................................................ GTR-9

Break-in schedule ............................................................. GTR-10 Wheel alignment .......................................................... GTR-10

Precautions before driving ........................................ GTR-11 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF mode ....................................................................... GTR-11 Summer tires ............................................................... GTR-11 All-season tires ........................................................... GTR-11 Avoiding body damage ....................................... GTR-12 Fuel ...................................................................................... GTR-12 Body repair .................................................................... GTR-12 Driving after replacing tires ............................. GTR-12

Additional maintenance items ............................... GTR-13 Precautions on performance driving ....... GTR-13 Inspection and adjustments before driving .............................................................. GTR-14 Inspection and adjustments after driving .................................................................. GTR-19

GT-R specific vehicle characteristics ................. GTR-24 Refueling precautions ........................................... GTR-24 Gasoline smell ............................................................. GTR-24 Outside temperature display indicates higher temperature ................................................ GTR-24 Idle speed is not steady ...................................... GTR-24 Engine speed is restricted ................................. GTR-25 Engine output ............................................................. GTR-25 Uneven wear of tires ............................................. GTR-25 Noises are heard while driving ...................... GTR-25

Brake system information ................................... GTR-27 Change of surface color of titanium muffler (if so equipped) .......................................... GTR-29 The color tone of the titanium muffler finisher might be different from others (if so equipped) ............................................................. GTR-29 Sound heard around titanium muffler (if so equipped) ............................................................. GTR-29

Exhaust gas is not emitted from left exhaust pipe during idling/when engine speed is low (if so equipped) .......................... GTR-29 Dry carbon fiber parts (if so equipped) .... GTR-29

Dual clutch transmission ............................................ GTR-29 Transmission operation characteristics ................................... GTR-31

The GT-R is NISSANs first supercar cate- gory vehicle. The GT-R is equipped with special systems. These systems are dif- ferent than those used on conventional vehicles to allow for the high perfor- mance driving characteristics of this ve- hicle. It is recommended that your vehicle be maintained by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Special skills, knowledge and equipment are necessary to properly maintain your GT-R.

WARRANTY INFORMATION Please read this Owners Manual carefully, together with your Warranty Information Booklet which describes a number of express limitations, exclusions and ways to void your warranty for failing to follow the instructions contained in this Owners Manual, including, but not limited to: . Failure to use proper parts, fuel and

fluids, . Driving with the VDC off, . Racing, . Any competitive driving of any sort

whatsoever, . Use on a track or driving on any

airstrip, . Modifications, including adding/repla-

cing, reprogramming, attempting to

reprogram, altering, disconnecting any computer, control unit or electro- nic modules,

. Deleting any or all stored information in any computer, control unit or elec- tronic module including VSDR,

. Failure to have required GT-R Perfor- mance Optimization Services per- formed.

In addition, see your tire warranty for specific limitations or exclusions for oper- ating summer tires below 4F (20C).

MAINTENANCE INFORMATION . Special skills, knowledge and equip-

ment are necessary to properly in- spect and adjust the GT-R engine, transmission, suspension and brakes to maintain performance. A GT-R cer- tified NISSAN dealer has the GT-R certified technical staff and the special equipment to properly maintain your GT-R.

. NISSAN recommends maintenance items that require the replacement of parts, engine oil, oil filters and air filters be performed by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Make sure the recom- mended fluids and parts are used when the maintenance is performed. NISSAN also recommends the replace-

ment of parts such as brakes should be performed by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

GT-R Overview GTR-3

GT-R SPECIFIC INFORMATION

GTR-4 GT-R Overview

NOTICE It is recommended that you only use the following specified fluids and parts in the GT-R to avoid possible vehicle damage.

ENGINE OIL Mobil 1 (0W-40) (100% synthetic oil) or equivalent Mobil 1 (0W-40) (100% synthetic) is the factory fill oil. The VR38 engine with its plasma-sprayed bores was developed using this oil. NISSAN cannot ensure proper engine operation and durability if other non-equivalent synthetic oil is used. If Mobil 1 (0W-40) or equivalent is not available, Mobil 1 (10W-40) (100% syn- thetic) or equivalent may be used; how- ever, some performance loss may be noticed. Furthermore, replacement of the engine oil with MOTUL NISMO COMPETITION OIL type 2193E(5W40) is recommended for the frequent high performance driving opportunities. NISSAN cannot ensure proper engine operation and durability if other non- equivalent synthetic oil is used.

The use of additives, chemical materials or abrasive compounds is prohibited. The use of additives, chemical materials, abrasive compounds or other high per- formance engine oils may cause internal engine damage.

Engine oil maintenance . When the vehicle is delivered, the

engine oil level is 0.39 in (10 mm) below the H mark on the engine oil dipstick for optimum high perfor- mance driving. The engine oil can be filled up to the H mark if not engaging in performance driving.

. Because of the high performance characteristics of the GT-R engine, more frequent oil level inspections are necessary. Check the oil level every 1,800 miles (3,000 km) and adjust as necessary. Also, change the engine oil based on the driving condi- tions. For the information regarding oil replacement intervals, refer to the 9. Maintenance and schedules sec- tion of this manual.

. Some amount of oil is consumed by your engine under normal operating conditions, and oil consumption by itself does not necessarily indicate any malfunction. If your rate of oil

consumption increases suddenly or without explanation, NISSAN recom- mends that you have your vehicle inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. For information about the oil replace- ment intervals for performance driv- ing, refer to the interval for replacing oil after high performance driving. ( Additional maintenance items page GTR-13)

Make sure to replace the oil filter when the engine oil is changed.

TRANSMISSION OIL Genuine NISSAN Transmission Oil R35 Special (100% synthetic oil) or equiva- lent The GT-R uses a multiple-disc dual wet clutch transmission. The specially devel- oped transmission oil maximizes the fric- tion characteristics of the clutch and the lubrication of the gear bearings. The use of additives is not recom- mended. The use of additives or other transmission oil may cause internal transmission or clutch damage.

GT-R SPECIAL SPECIFICATION PARTS

DIFFERENTIAL OIL (front and rear) Differential Oil R35 COMPETITION type 2189E or equivalent Use Differential Oil R35 COMPETITION type 2189E or equivalent that can keep the oil temperature low in order to protect all parts of the differential and maximize the performance of the Limited Slip Differential (LSD). The use of additives is not recom- mended. Using additives or any other than the specified differential oil may cause the oil temperature to increase and the final drive to be damaged. Also it may cause vibration and adversely the vehicle hand- ling characteristics.

BRAKE FLUID Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II or equivalent Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II is the factory fill brake fluid. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) unit and other related parts were specially designed for this brake fluid. NISSAN cannot ensure proper operation of the vehicle if other non-equivalent brake fluid is used.

TIRES AND ROAD WHEELS

Tires The GT-R uses specially designed run-flat tires and matching road wheels. Use of these specially developed tires and wheels provides the greatest potential for maximum performance. . Using non-genuine GT-R tires may

cause powertrain system damage if the vehicle is driven in a flat tire situation, even if run-flat tires are used. This may also prevent the vehi- cle from being stopped safely.

. Using non-genuine GT-R tires may also cause tire failure due to excessive heat buildup caused by tire distortion while driving.

. Using non-genuine GT-R tires may affect the operation of the VDC sys- tem.

Tire replacement: . When tire replacement is required,

replacing tires as a set of four with new tires is recommended. However, if a tire is punctured or damaged, it may be possible to replace only the da- maged tire. Determining whether one tire or a complete set of tires should

be replaced is based on a number of factors including tire wear and condi- tion. Your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer can recommend if an individual tire or a complete set should be replaced.

. The GT-R uses specially designed run- flat tires which have a rigid side wall. Special equipment and procedures are required when replacing these tires. NISSAN recommends that tire replacement be performed at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. Specific tire changing equipment must be used to remove the GT-R tires from the wheel and to install the GT-R tires onto the wheel. It is only possible to reuse the tires when they have no cracks and/or deformations on the bead portion of the tire. If the incorrect equipment is used to re- move the GT-R tires from the wheel and to install the GT-R tires onto the wheel, cracks and deformation may occur on the bead portion of the tires meaning that the tires cannot be reused. We recommend contacting a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer if the tires need to be removed from the wheels.

. When reusing tires, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN

GT-R Overview GTR-5

GT-R SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS

GTR-6 GT-R Overview

dealer.

Road wheels Using non-genuine GT-R wheels may cause the following: . vehicle vibration . the tire coming loose from the wheel

during a flat tire . reduced wheel lug nut tightness

BRAKE PAD AND DISC ROTOR This vehicle is equipped with cross-drilled floating rotors and radial-mounted six- piston monoblock calipers. This helps to achieve excellent stopping performance and fade-resistance. Using non-genuine GT-R brake pads or rotors can affect vehicle braking perfor- mance and the operation of the ABS and VDC system.

Replacement of brake pads and disc rotors For models without NCCB (NISSAN Car- bon Ceramic Brake) package: NISSAN generally recommends to replace all four sets of brake pads and disc rotors at the same time to maintain maximum brake performance.

However, replacing only the brake pads may be allowed in some cases (four wheels or only front wheels depending on the conditions). A GT-R certified tech- nician must inspect the vehicle and determine that only the brake pads need to be replaced. In this case, replacing all brake pads and disc rotors as a set is not necessary. Note that the replacement of brake pads and the disc rotors as a set on all four wheels should be performed when a GT-R certified technician determines that this is the correct repair. If the inside of the disc rotors are cold during the winter and the surface be- comes hot due to a heavy force being applied repeatedly to the brakes, cracks may occur near the coolant hole on the surface of the disc rotor. Cracks may also occur due to a heavy force being repeat- edly applied to the brakes during high performance driving. In these cases it may be necessary to replace the disc rotors or brake pads depending on the condition of the crack. We recommend contacting a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for replacement.

NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) (if so equipped) In order to enjoy the high performance braking sensation as well as the sporty driving and flexibility offered by the GT-R, NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) is available. NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) is specially designed brake system. Conventional carbon ceramic brakes have weaknesses in braking performance when driving in the rain, at a low tem- perature or at low speeds. However, NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) achieves both a stable brake force at high temperatures during high perfor- mance driving and braking performance under such driving conditions. NISSAN recommends that you have the NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) and the related parts maintained by a GT-R certi- fied NISSAN dealer. Otherwise, the braking performance may not be delivered across all situations and the brake system may be damaged, which could result in a serious accident.

Replacement of brake pads and disc rotors When replacing brake pads and brake disc rotors, NISSAN recommends repla- cing two sets of them at the same time.

However, the brake pads can be sepa- rately replaced only when a GT-R certified technician judges that the brake disc rotors are reusable, based on a measured weight and a check for scratches and cracks.

EXHAUST MUFFLER AND TRUNK CARPET The GT-R exhaust system is designed to provide the maximum vehicle perfor- mance and to protect the vehicle from high exhaust gas temperatures. If non-genuine GT-R exhaust system parts are used it is possible that the muffler or other exhaust system parts will deform and cause damage to the under- body. Non-genuine GT-R exhaust system parts can also affect vehicle performance and possibly lead to turbocharger, engine or power train related parts including transmission, damage. Also, do not remove the trunk carpet from the vehicle for any reason. The carpet insulates the vehicle interior from the heat of the muffler and from the noise of the transmission.

TITANIUM MUFFLER AND TRUNK CARPET (if so equipped) If a non-genuine titanium muffler is used, the muffler may become deformed and damage the underbody due to the high performance engine reaching high ex- haust gas temperatures (1 ,832F (1,000C) or more). The highest-class tita- nium alloy is used for genuine parts to ensure the resistance strength and creeping characteristics against high ex- haust gas temperature. In addition, further cooling effects are secured by taking in air through the duct on the undercover, to cool the area around the muffler, and by applying partial plate thickness reduction. Since genuine tita- nium mufflers are made of titanium alloy, the surface color will change depending on the driving conditions, which is not unusual. Prior to shipping from factory, all vehicles receive balance aligning for en- gine, transmission, and clutch, as well as quench driving of brake pads and rotors. As a result, the muffler surface color may differ depending on the vehicle. Never remove the trunk carpet from the vehicle for any reason. The carpet insu- lates the vehicle interior from the heat of the muffler and from the noise of the transmission.

Never Allow Oil or Grease to Adhere to the Titanium Muffler. If the muffler is heated when oil or grease adhere to the muffler surface, the color of this area will be different from that of the surrounding area. To remove the oil or grease, check that the surface tempera- ture of the muffler has cooled, wash the area with a neutral detergent, wipe it with a brake cleaner-sprayed clean shop cloth and gently tap it with a dry shop cloth to dry. Be careful not to allow the brake cleaner to splatter on rubber parts, bum- per, etc.

NOTICE Never allow polishes with com- pounds, because there is a possibi- lity that the titanium muffler finisher coloring will be changed.

GT-R Overview GTR-7

GTR-8 GT-R Overview

DRY CARBON FIBER PARTS (if so equipped) Because of the characteristics of the material, the dry carbon fiber parts may turn yellow due to exposure to ultraviolet rays. The surfaces of dry carbon fiber parts are coated with a special ultraviolet protection paint. To maintain the appear- ance of these parts, it is important to take proper care of them.

NOTICE . Do not use compound agents on

clear-coated dry carbon fiber parts (such as the NISMO models bumper, side sill protector, rear spoiler, roof, hood, hood duct, front fender duct, etc.).

. Do not use any chemical agents (wax, coating agent, compound agent, etc.) on matte-painted dry carbon fiber parts (such as the rear diffuser, a rear spoiler that is of specifications other than NISMO, etc.).

. When dry carbon fiber parts be- come dirty, prepare a dilute cleaning solution by mixing one capful of mild detergent in a

bucket of water, and use that mixture to clean the parts.

NOTE: The surfaces of the dry carbon fiber parts are lightly coated like a race car so that you can feel the proper texture of real carbon, which may feel rough. This is normal.

ENGINE START AND STOP This vehicle includes spark plugs that are designed for high performance. For this reason, if the engine is repeatedly started and stopped over a short time, the spark plugs may become fouled, making the engine difficult to start. To prevent dimin- ished starting performance, avoid start- ing and stopping the engine repeatedly during a short period of time.

In addition to the regular maintenance recommended by NISSAN, the GT-R re- quires the following special inspections: . Wheel alignment inspection and ad-

justment (if necessary) (including tire pressure adjustment)

. Transmission settings These inspections are required at the following intervals: . 1,000 miles . 12 months . 24 months . 36 months

NOTE: . These inspections will be performed

free of charge for labor at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer only. Inspec- tions thereafter are recommended every 12 months or 12,000 miles (whichever comes first) at the cus- tomers expense. See the 2021 NISSAN GT-R Warranty Information Booklet for details.

. Repairs and adjustments involving parts replacement, etc. determined to be necessary as a result of these inspections are performed at the customers expense.

GT-R PERFORMANCE OPTIMIZATION SERVICES

. See the 2021 NISSAN GT-R Warranty Information Booklet for significant limitations, exclusions and possible voiding of your warranty resulting from failure to have these necessary inspections, repairs and/or adjust- ments performed.

. See the 9. Maintenance and sche- dules section of this manual for a detailed explanation of the GT-R Performance Optimization Services.

WHEEL ALIGNMENT INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT (if necessary) (including tire pressure adjust- ment) This vehicle is equipped with a high performance suspension. The vehicles wheel alignment should be measured and adjusted (if necessary) as necessary as the vehicle is driven and the suspen- sion parts break-in. It is recommended that you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer to perform these services. The wheel alignment can be adjusted by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer in accor- dance with specifications for city driving to high performance driving. The tires on the GT-R may have different wear rates and wear patterns in compar-

ison to conventional passenger vehicles. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer to confirm that the alignment is within specifications. Preventing toe-out: Toe-out can cause uneven tire wear or damage to areas inside the tires due to high heat. Be sure to have the wheel alignment toe-in setting checked and adjusted. It is recommended you con- tact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer before any performance driving on closed circuit tracks. Obey all traffic laws when on public roads.

Toe-in specification

Front 0.059 in (1.5 mm)

Rear 0.079 in (2.0 mm)

TRANSMISSION SETTINGS The design of the clutch and transmission requires inspection and adjustment of the clutch and shift forks. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN deal- er at the recommended intervals. If the transmission setting is not complete, excessive loads may be applied to the transmission and power train system parts during starting and shifting, which may result in a malfunction or damage. Depending on the driving conditions,

more frequent adjustments may be ne- cessary to help maximize vehicle perfor- mance.

GT-R Overview GTR-9

GTR-10 GT-R Overview

NOTICE Follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine perfor- mance and ensure the future relia- bility and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these re- commendations may result in shor- tened engine life and reduced vehicle performance.

Please observe the following types of driving until the mileage shown below has been reached. Until 300 miles (500 km): . Do not depress the accelerator pedal

more than halfway and avoid rapid acceleration.

. Drive with the engine speed kept at less than 3,500 RPM.

. Avoid unnecessary quick steering, abrupt braking and driving on poor roads.

300 to 600 miles (500 to 1,000 km): . Avoid rapid acceleration in a low gear

(1st to 3rd gears) with the accelerator pedal fully depressed. Depress the pedal slowly.

. Avoid unnecessary quick steering and abrupt braking.

. Drive with the suspension setup switch in the COMF mode to allow more suspension stroke.

600 to 1,200 miles (1,000 to 2,000 km): . Drive with the engine speed kept

relatively high with the shift lever in the position. Shifting is recom- mended between 1st and 4th gears.

. Avoid unnecessary quick steering and abrupt braking.

. Drive with the suspension setup switch in the COMF mode to allow more suspension stroke.

Even though the mileage reaches over 1,200 miles (2,000 km), the clutch may take longer to properly engage if the vehicle is mainly driven in town at a low speed. NISSAN recommends breaking in the clutch at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Always perform the transmission setting after breaking in the clutch. If the transmission setting is not complete, excessive loads may be applied to the transmission and power train system parts during starting and shifting, which may result in a malfunction or damage.

WHEEL ALIGNMENT Do not adjust the wheel alignment until the mileage reaches 1,000 miles (1,600 km). Until then, the suspension may not engage enough and the height may be higher. However, make sure to adjust the align- ment after 1,000 miles (1,600 km). The wheel alignment can be adjusted by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer in accor- dance with specifications for city driving to high performance driving. The tires on the GT-R may have different wear rates and wear patterns in compar- ison to conventional passenger vehicles. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer to confirm that the alignment is within specifications.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF MODE Always make sure the VDC is ON before driving the vehicle by checking that the VDC OFF indicator lights on the meter and the VDC set-up switch are not illuminated. The GT-R is a high perfor- mance vehicle and the VDC must be on/ activated to provide proper powertrain operation and intended drivability.

WARNING . The VDC OFF mode should ONLY

be used briefly to help free the vehicle if stuck in snow or mud by temporarily stopping operation of the VDC to maintain wheel torque.

. Driving the GT-R with the VDC off may lead to handling issues re- lated to steering maneuvers, ac- celeration, or deceleration. Moreover, driving with the VDC off can result in an inoperative vehicle by causing serious da- mage to the powertrain, including damage to the Transaxle Assem- bly including Transfer, Clutch, Gears, Transaxle case and all of

its components and other drive- train component(s) by overheat- ing or excessive force.

. Damage to the powertrain or any drivetrain component(s) that oc- curs when there is a record in the Vehicle Status Data Recorder (VSDR) that the vehicle was driven with VDC off during the period when the damage was incurred is excluded from warranty cover- age.

See your 2021 Warranty Information Booklet for important related information and warranty coverage exclusions. See also section 2 ( Transmission warn- ing light page 2-33) and section 5 ( Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- tem page 5-54) of this Owners Manual, Transmission Clutch Temperature High and Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) Sys- tem for important additional related information.

SUMMER TIRES The GT-R summer tires are made from a specially formulated rubber to maximize the vehicles performance capabilities. Performance of summer tires is substan- tially reduced when temperatures are less than 32F (0C) so you must drive care- fully. NISSAN recommends the use of winter or all-season tires on all four wheels if you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions when tem- peratures are less than 32F (0C).

WARNING Never use summer tires when the temperature is below 4F (20C) to prevent permanent tread deforma- tion which may cause tire damage or tire failure. This may cause a loss of vehicle control which can result in serious personal injury or death.

ALL-SEASON TIRES Do not exceed the speed rating of the tire that is installed on the vehicle.

GT-R Overview GTR-11

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE DRIVING

GTR-12 GT-R Overview

AVOIDING BODY DAMAGE The GT-R bumper, fascia, side sills and undercarriage are close to the ground. Drive slowly on rough or uneven roads to avoid damaging these parts. Pay careful attention to wheel blocks and curbs. If the front bumper contacts a wheel block, curb, etc., the bumper and underlying parts may be damaged or cracked. Be careful not to damage the front spoiler that is installed below the engine room.

FUEL NISSAN recommends using fuels that contain no alcohol. However, fuels con- taining up to 10% alcohol may be used, if necessary. Do not use E-15 or E-85 in your vehicle. ( Fuel information page 10- 4)

NOTICE To avoid serious engine damage due to increased cylinder temperatures, do not use fuels that contain more a l c o h o l t h a n i n d i c a t e d i n

Gasoline containing oxyge- nates page 10-5. Also, do not use fuel additives, fuel stabilizers or fuel deicers that contain alcohol.

BODY REPAIR The body of the GT-R has been manu- factured on special fixtures utilizing a hybrid structure with aluminum die cast parts for the frame work. Special skills, information and equipment are required to correctly repair the body. It is recom- mended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer if the vehicle is damaged, such as in a collision, and they will recommend an appropriate body shop.

Only certified body shops using CELETTE advanced collision repair equipment are approved by NISSAN for repairing struc- tural body damage. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN deal- er or NISSAN Consumer Affairs for a referral or list of certified body shops.

DRIVING AFTER REPLACING TIRES Avoid the driving conditions listed under Additional maintenance items in this section for 48 hours after tires are in- stalled on the wheels ( Additional maintenance items page GTR-13). The tire may slip on the wheel if the vehicle is driven in these conditions before 48 hours have passed. If the tire slips on the wheel, the wheel/tire assembly will be out of balance and will require rebalancing.

The information and specifications in this section apply only when engaging in performance driving. The following information applies only if you engage in performance driving such as driving your GT-R for extended periods under the following conditions. . Higher-RPM (approaching redline) op-

eration . Frequent high pedal force braking

from moderate and higher speeds . Frequent throttle activation . Fast revving throughout the RPM

range In such cases, the following additional maintenance guidelines apply. However, you should also carefully read your 2021 NISSAN GT-R Warranty Infor- mation Booklet for important informa- tion concerning warranty coverage, limitations and exclusions. We recommend that all GT-R mainte- nance be performed at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. NISSAN will only pay for GT-R Performance Optimization Services performed at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

PRECAUTIONS ON PERFORMANCE DRIVING The information and specifications in this section apply only when engaging in performance driving.

Checking the temperature of the coolant and oils on the touch screen display When the temperatures of the engine coolant and oil, and the oil pressure exceed the normal range, the color of the multi function meter on the touch screen display changes to red to warn the driver. When engaging in high perfor- mance driving, switch the display to the multi function meter to display the tem- perature of the engine coolant and oil, and the oil pressure. When the color of the meter display changes to red, per- form cool down driving. When the values of the temperature and pressure return to the normal range, the color of the multi function meter will turn back to white. Warning temperature: . Engine coolant temperature is 230F

(110C) or higher: If the engine coolant temperature increases above 230F (110C), the

color of the multi function meter on the touch screen display changes to red to warn of a possible overheat condition and engine output is re- duced.

. Engine oil temperature is 275F (135C) or higher: If the engine oil temperature is higher than 275F (135C), the meter display changes to red, maximum engine speed is automatically limited to 4,000 rpm, and the transmission automatically changes from the position to the position.

. Transmission oil temperature is 284F (140C) or higher: If the transmission oil temperature increases to over 284F (140C), the color of the meter display changes to red. However, the vehicle can continue to be driven until the temperature reaches 295F (146C). If the oil tem- perature exceeds 284F (140C) while driving (the color of the meter dis- played in red), change both the trans- mission oil and the differential oil after driving because these fluids have deteriorated because of the heat.

GT-R Overview GTR-13

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

GTR-14 GT-R Overview

Cool down The information and specifications in this section apply only when engaging in performance driving. Cool down the vehicle to help extend the life of the vehicle if coolant temperatures are extremely high. Drive the vehicle at 37 to 50 MPH (60 to 80 km/h), in 5th or 6th gear for 2 to 3 miles (3 to 5 km) and then stop the engine.

Refueling precautions

WARNING Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. The fuel tank is full at the first automatic shutoff.

To maximize vehicle performance, the fuel tank is located as low as possible to lower the vehicle center of gravity. The tank is also divided into two parts. This fuel tank design causes higher pressures inside the tank than other vehicles so fuel spillage is possible by trying to top off the

fuel tank after automatic shutoff. The fuel tank pressure is higher when the vehicle is hot, especially if the tank is more than half full. If the cap is opened when the vehicle is hot, it may cause fuel spray and there may be a hissing noise. Open the cap slowly, releasing the pressure from the tank gradually. Also, if the vehicle is refueled when the vehicle is hot, the fuel pump may automatically shut off before the tank is full. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction. Refuel slowly or refuel after the vehicle has cooled.

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS BEFORE DRIVING The information and specifications in this section apply only when engaging in performance driving.

Fluids . Check the engine, transmission, differ-

ential and under vehicle surfaces for oil and coolant leaks.

. Check the fluid levels and adjust as necessary using the specified fluid as described under the conditions listed in this section.( Recommended fluids and maintenance interval page GTR-20) If you do not drive under the

conditions listed, refer to the 9. Main- tenance and schedules section of this manual.

. NISSAN recommends to adjust the engine oil level to be 0.39 in (10 mm) (1/8 gal (0.5 liters)) below the H mark on the engine oil dipstick. ( range is 1.18 in (30 mm).) Before checking the oil level, run the engine until it reaches operating temperature and wait at least 5 minutes after turning off the engine. Make sure the oil level always remains above the L mark. When the vehicle is delivered, the engine oil is set to H- 0.39 in (10 mm) for optimal high performance driving.

. Some amount of oil is consumed by

your engine under normal operating conditions, and oil consumption by itself does not necessarily indicate any malfunction. If your rate of oil consumption increases suddenly or without explanation, NISSAN recom- mends that you have your vehicle inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. Adjust the power steering fluid level to the R mark on the power steering dipstick when the fluid temperature is hot or when the fluid temperature is cold. Fluid temperature: Hot: 122 to 176F (50 to 80C): between

and Cold: 32 to 86F (0 to 30C): between and

Coolant level and mixture ratio The information and specifications in this section apply only when engaging in performance driving.

GT-R Overview GTR-15

GTR-16 GT-R Overview

Check the coolant level in the pressurized coolant reservoir. Adjust the level so that the fluid is between the MAX and MIN markings. For the coolant, use genuine NISSAN Long Life coolant or equivalent. (On delivery of new vehicle, the reservoir is filled to the MIN level. Be sure to replenish approximately 3/8 US quart (0.3 to 0.4 liter) of coolant.)

NOTICE Do not overfill the coolant. This may increase the pressure in the cooling system and cause coolant leaks.

To maximize vehicle performance, the coolant mixture ratio should be a combi- nation of 30% coolant antifreeze and 70% demineralized or distilled water for max- imum cooling system performance re- gardless of ambient temperatures. If ambient temperatures are anticipated below 5F (15C), make sure a proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water mix is used.

Engine and powertrain The information and specifications in this section apply only when engaging

in performance driving. . Check the engine, transmission, differ-

ential and under the vehicle for oil and coolant leaks.

. Inspect the areas surrounding of the catalytic converter for heat deteriora- tion.

. Always perform the transmission setting. After that, adjust the clutch clearance so that the clearance is less than the clearance used for daily driving. Your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer has the necessary information and equipment to set the clutch clearance to the correct specification. The clearance used for daily driving increases clutch heat generated dur- ing Performance Driving. This leads to an increase in temperature of the transmission oil. In addition, a more direct shifting feel can be obtained by reducing the clutch clearance for Performance Driving. The clutch clear- ance should be reset to the daily driving specification after Perfor- mance Driving. It is recommended you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for information.

NOTICE Failure to have the clutch properly adjusted before performance driving may cause the transmission oil tem- perature to increase which may cause transmission damage.

. Inspect and confirm the clearance between the exhaust finisher and rear bumper is more than 0.24 in (6 mm) (up/down) and more than 0.20 in (5 mm) (left/right).

. Inspect the dust boot of the drive shaft universal joint for cracks or damage.

Suspension and wheel alignment The information and specifications in this section apply only when engaging in performance driving. . Check the steering and suspension

system and other links for loose and/ or damaged parts.

. Measure and adjust the wheel align- ment. ( Wheel alignment page GTR-10) It is recommended you con- tact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer to adjust the wheel alignment to the recommended setting for high perfor-

mance driving. Preventing toe-out: Toe-out can cause uneven tire wear or damage to areas inside the tires due to high heat. Be sure to have the wheel alignment toe-in setting checked and adjusted. It is recommended you con- tact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer before any performance driving on closed circuit tracks. Obey all traffic laws when on public roads.

Toe-in specification

Front 0.059 in (1.5 mm)

Rear 0.079 in (2.0 mm)

Wheels and tires The information and specifications in this section apply only when engaging in performance driving. . Check tire wear and cracking. . Inspect the tire side wall for damage. . Check the tire pressure and adjust the

pressure as necessary when the tires are cold. ( Wheels and tires page 8-29)

The tire pressure changes depending on the outside temperature or altitude. Check the tire pressure regularly and when the climate conditions change.

* The following chart indicates how the tire pressure will decrease as outside air temperature decreases.

WARNING Keep your tires inflated to the cor- rect tire pressure. Driving with low tire pressure can damage some powertrain systems and affect the operation of the ABS and VDC sys- tems. Low Tire pressure may also cause tire failure and result in ser- ious personal injury or death.

. Make sure the tire valve stem cap is installed and that the valve stem is tight. When installing the cap, make sure to tighten the cap by hand. If a

GT-R Overview GTR-17

GTR-18 GT-R Overview

tool is used to tighten the cap, the cap may be damaged.

. Make sure the wheel nuts are tight. ( Wheels and tires page 8-29)

. Make sure the drive shaft nuts are tight.

. Make sure to replace the grommet seal, the valve core and the valve cap of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- tem (TPMS) sensor attached to the wheel every 3 years for performance driving use. Replace them every 5 years even when not engaging in performance driving. A dirty grommet seal will cause the air leak from the tire.

. Make sure that the nuts and valves that are attached to the TPMS sensor are tight and there is no nitrogen leak.

. Use only a NISSAN genuine valve cap or equivalent.

. Check wheel hub run out and that the wheel rotates smoothly without any friction. Check these with the tires removed whenever an inspection is performed with the vehicle jacked up.

. Secure road wheel balance weights with aluminum tape.

. Check that the wheel nuts are not

stripped.

. Make sure the tire has not slipped on the wheel causing the assembly to be out of balance. The reference marks on the tire and wheel should be aligned. If the reference marks are not aligned, the tire has slipped on the wheel. Have the wheels/tires re- balanced. Make sure the old reference marks are erased and new reference marks are applied to the wheel and tire. When installing new tires on the wheels, make sure new reference marks are applied to the wheels and tires.

. Avoid the driving conditions listed under Additional maintenance items

in this section for 48 hours after tires are installed on the wheels. The tire may slip on the wheel if the vehicle is driven in these conditions before 48 hours have passed. If the tire slips on the wheel, the wheel/tire assembly will be out of balance and will require rebalancing.

Brakes The information and specifications in this section apply only when engaging in performance driving. . Check for the heat deterioration of the

brakes and parts around the brakes. . It is recommended that you remove

air from the brake system after any of the following: When engaging in high perfor-

mance driving for the first time after purchasing a new vehicle.

After replacing the brake fluid. When engaging in high perfor-

mance driving for a sustained per- iod of time. It is recommended that bleeding the brake be performed when the brake calipers are hot (about 212F (100C)).

Brake pad break-in procedure: NISSAN recommends that a special brake pad break-in procedure be performed before engaging in performance driving. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for details.

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTS AFTER DRIVING The information and specifications in this section apply only when engaging in performance driving.

NOTICE At the completion of performance driving, all fluid and other adjust- ments should be returned to the normal fluid specifications as shown in the 8. Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

Fluids The information and specifications in this section apply only when engaging in performance driving. . Check the engine, transmission, differ-

ential and under the vehicle for oil and coolant leaks.

. Check the fluid levels and adjust as necessary using the specified fluid as described under the conditions listed in this section. ( Recommended fluids and maintenance interval page GTR-20) If you do not drive under the conditions listed, refer to the 9. Main- tenance and schedules section of this manual.

. When changing fluids, be sure to use the specified fluids as described in this Owners manual. ( Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants page 10-2)

GT-R Overview GTR-19

GTR-20 GT-R Overview

Recommended fluids and maintenance interval The information and specifications in this section apply only when engaging in performance driving.

ITEMS Engine Oil GT-R SPECIFIED FLUIDS Mobil 1 (0W-40)*1 or equivalent

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

. When the oil temperature stays below 230F (110C) while driving

Change engine oil and engine oil filter at the same interval as Schedule 1 and 2 in the 9. Maintenance and schedules section of this manual.

. When the oil temperature reaches between 230F (110C) and 266F (130C) while driving

Change engine oil and engine oil filter every 3,000miles (5,000 km).

. When the oil temperature exceeds 266F (130C) while driving

Change engine oil and engine oil filter immediately after stopping.

*1: Mobil 1 (0W-40) (100% synthetic) is the factory fill oil. The VR38 engine with its plasma-sprayed bores was developed using this oil. NISSAN cannot ensure proper engine operation and durability if other 0W-40 non-equivalent synthetic oil is used. If Mobil 1 (0W-40) or equivalent is not available, Mobil 1 (10W-40) (100% synthetic) or equivalent may be used; however, some performance loss may be noticed.

ITEMS Transmission Oil

GT-R SPECIFIED FLUIDS Genuine NISSAN Transmission Oil R35 Special or equivalent

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

. When the oil temperature stays below 248F (120C) while driving

Change transmission oil at the same interval as Schedule 1 and 2 in the 9. Maintenance and schedules section of this manual.

. When the oil temperature reaches between 248F (120C) and 284F (140C) while driving

Change transmission oil every 3,000 miles (5,000 km).

. When the oil temperature exceeds 284F (140C) while driving

Change both transmission oil and differential oil immediately after stopping. Differential oil temperature usually increases concur- rently.

ITEMS Differential Oil (front and rear)

GT-R SPECIFIED FLUIDS Differential Oil R35 COMPETITION type 2189E*2 or equivalent

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

. When the oil temperature stays below 248F (120C) while driving

Change differential oil at the same interval as Schedule 1 and 2 in the 9. Maintenance and schedules section of this manual.

. When the oil temperature reaches between 248F (120C) and 284F (140C) while driving

Change differential oil every 3,000 miles (5,000 km).

. When the oil temperature exceeds 284F (140C) while driving

Change both transmission oil and differential oil immediately after stopping. Differential oil temperature usually increases concur- rently as the transmission oil temperature.

*2: The differential oil temperature cannot be displayed on the multi function meter on the touch screen display. The differential oil temperature can be checked with the transmission oil temperature since both usually increases or decrease concurrently.

GT-R Overview GTR-21

GTR-22 GT-R Overview

ITEMS Brake Fluid GT-R SPECIFIED FLUIDS Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II*3 or equivalent MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Change brake fluid every 3,000 miles (5,000 km).

*3: Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II is the factory fill brake fluid. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) unit and other related parts were specially designed for this brake fluid and NISSAN cannot ensure the best performance and proper operation of the vehicle if other non- equivalent brake fluid is used.

Suspension and wheel alignment . Check the steering and suspension

system and other links for loose and/ or damaged parts.

. Measure and adjust the wheel align- ment. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer to adjust the wheel alignment to the recommended setting for normal driv- ing.

Wheels and tires . Check tire wear and cracking. . Inspect the tire side wall for damage. . Check the tire pressure and adjust the

pressure as necessary when the tires are cold. ( Wheels and tires page GTR-17) If you do not drive under the conditions listed in this section, see

Wheels and tires page 8-29. . Check that the wheel nuts are not

stripped. Check if there is no deforma-

tion on the contact surface of the wheel nuts.

. Make sure the wheel nuts are tight. ( Wheels and tires page 8-29)

. Make sure the drive shaft nuts are tight.

. Check wheel hub run out and that the wheel rotates smoothly without any friction. Check these with the tires removed whenever an inspection is performed with the vehicle jacked up.

. Make sure the tire has not slipped on the wheel causing the assembly to be out of balance. The reference marks on the tire and wheel should be aligned. If the reference marks are not aligned, the tire has slipped on the wheel. Have the wheels/tires re- balanced. Make sure the old reference marks are erased and new reference marks are applied to the wheel and tire. When installing new tires on the wheels, make sure new reference

marks are applied to the wheels and tires. ( Wheels and tires page GTR-17)

. Make sure that the TPMS sensor installation nuts and the sensor valve are tight and there is no nitrogen leak.

Brakes . Check for the heat deterioration of the

brakes and parts around the brakes. . Check the condition of the brake pads

and disc rotors and replace them as necessary.

. Apply MOLYKOTE 7439 or equivalent to the top and bottom of the front brake pads. (See next page for illustra- tion).

Front disc brake pad: BRAKE PAD: Exploded View (GT-R certified NISSAN dealer)

GT-R Overview GTR-23

GTR-24 GT-R Overview

Engine and powertrain . Check the engine, transmission, differ-

ential and under the vehicle for oil and coolant leaks.

. Inspect the area surrounding the catalytic converter for heat deteriora- tion.

. Inspect and confirm the clearance between the exhaust finisher and rear bumper is more than 0.24 in (6 mm) (up/down) and more than 0.20 in (5 mm) (left/right).

. The clutch clearance and shift fork position may need to be adjusted.

. Inspect the dust boot of the drive shaft universal joint for cracks or damage.

. Check that there is no abnormal noise, vibrations or warning lights illumi- nated when making tight turns at slow speed (for tight corner braking phenomenon).

REFUELING PRECAUTIONS

WARNING Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire. The fuel tank is full at the first automatic shutoff.

To maximize vehicle performance, the fuel tank is located as low as possible to lower the vehicle center of gravity. The tank is also divided into two parts. This fuel tank design causes higher pressures inside the tank than other vehicles so fuel spillage is possible by trying to top off the fuel tank after automatic shutoff. The fuel tank pressure is higher when the vehicle is hot, especially if the tank is more than half full. If the cap is opened when the vehicle is hot, it may cause fuel spray and there may be a hissing noise. Open the cap slowly, releasing the pressure from the tank gradually. Also, if the vehicle is refueled when the vehicle is hot, the fuel pump may automatically shut off before the tank is full. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction.

Refuel slowly or refuel after the vehicle has cooled.

GASOLINE SMELL The fuel temperature is higher when the vehicle is hot. This may cause a gasoline smell from the vehicle. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction. The smell will go away when the fuel tem- perature has cooled.

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY INDICATES HIGHER TEMPERATURE Heat from the engine compartment, ra- diator and intercoolers can affect the outside temperature display. The outside temperature display may indicate a high- er than actual temperature while driving or stopped. This is normal.

IDLE SPEED IS NOT STEADY The idle speed may not be steady when the engine compartment is extremely hot. This is normal. The engine speed will be steady when the engine cools down. In this case, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. After a few driving trips, the MIL should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, it is recommended you have the vehicle inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

GT-R SPECIFIC VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS

ENGINE SPEED IS RESTRICTED To help protect the engine, the maximum engine speed is automatically controlled in the following conditions: . Revving the engine with the shift lever

in the or position: The maximum engine speed is 4,300 RPM

. Revving the engine when the engine oil is at a low (below 32F (0C)) or extremely high (over 275F (135C)) temperature: The maximum engine speed is 4,000 RPM (The position will automatically change to the position.)

ENGINE OUTPUT

High altitude To protect the engine, engine output is controlled so that it does not increase at altitude of approximately 3,281 ft (1,000 m) or higher.

Engine output according to the coolant temperature The engine output is controlled at a low level when the engine coolant tempera- ture is lower than approximately 158F (70C) or higher than 230F (110C). This is not a malfunction.

If the temperature is lower than approxi- mately 158F (70C), drive the vehicle until it reaches normal operating temperature. If the temperature is higher than 230F (110C), perform cool-down driving proce- dure. ( Cool down page GTR-14) When the temperature of the engine coolant is between 158F (70C) and 230F (110C), the engine output returns to normal.

UNEVEN WEAR OF TIRES The GT-R is equipped with high perfor- mance, low profile, run-flat tires that are optimized for performance and handling. The life of these tires will be less than those of tires installed on a typical vehicle, and you are likely to experience uneven tire wear and tire noise regardless of the type of tire used.

NOISES ARE HEARD WHILE DRIV- ING . The GT-R brake pads use material that

provides a high amount of braking power even in high temperatures. This material can cause an intermittent screeching noise just before the vehi- cle comes to a stop when the brakes are gently applied. The noise de- creases as the brake pads wear. How- ever, the additional brake pad break-

in or replacing the cross spring may decrease the noise. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. A screeching noise may be heard when the brake pedal is depressed: When driving the vehicle for the first

time in the morning, After leaving the vehicle parked for

extended periods of time, or When the vehicle is damp following

rain showers or washing the vehi- cle.

These sounds are normal. The noise is caused when the brake pads absorb moisture, and the noise stops after the brake is applied several times.

. A screeching noise may also be heard when the brake pedal is depressed: When repeatedly applying gentle

braking, especially on a curve at a low speed, or

When the brake rotors have circular scores with the brake temperature high.

GT-R Overview GTR-25

GTR-26 GT-R Overview

For models without NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package:

WARNING Follow the instructions below when parking the vehicle to help prevent the brake rotor and brake pads from rusting together. Failure to follow the instructions could cause the rotor and pads to rust together. If the rotor and pads rust together, there may be a popping noise and some vibration when the vehicle is driven, a wheel may not roll correctly, or the brake pads could be damaged. If the pads are damaged, this may reduce the effectiveness of the brake system which could cause a collision, serious personal injury or death.

. The GT-R uses brake pad materials that have high metallic content. The brake pad material helps maintain braking performance in a wide range of weather and driving conditions. For the first 3,000-6,000 miles (5,000- 10,000 km) of the vehicles service life, and for the first 3,000-6,000 miles (5,000-10,000 km) after a brake repla- cement, the brake pad to brake rotor

clearance is very small. When parking, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the position. Idle the engine for more than 20 seconds without depressing the brake pedal. This allows the brake pads to move away from the rotor so the pad does not contact the rotor. Additionally, the brakes must be dry before parking the vehicle after driv- ing on wet roads or after washing the vehicle. If the roads are wet, lightly apply the brakes for a short distance before parking the vehicle to dry the brakes. After washing the vehicle, dry the brakes by driving on a dry road for a few miles and apply the brakes normally based on traffic and road conditions. The metallic brake pads and brake disc rotor may rust together when the brakes are not applied: If the vehicle is not idled for 20

seconds without the brakes ap- plied, or if the brakes are applied when the vehicle is shut off, the rotor and pads can rust together, even when the brake pads are dry.

If the brakes are wet when the vehicle is parked and the parking brake is applied for a long time.

The hill start assist system can apply the brakes even if the brake pedal is not depressed. The brake pads and rotors can rust together if the parking procedure previously described is not followed.

It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer if the brake pads and brake rotor have rusted together.

NOTICE To help reduce the possibility of the rotors and brake pads rusting: Have the brake pads and/or rotors quenched when the brake pads are replaced. For detailed information about quenching, contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. After quenching the brake pads and/ or rotors, apply a brake of 0.5G to stop the vehicle 6-7 times at least once a week in a safe location. G- force can be checked on the multi function meter on the touch screen display. Refer to the separate Multi Function Display Owners Manual.

. To maintain steady braking perfor-

mance in both extremely high and low temperatures, the gap between the brake pad and caliper is larger than normal and large-size brake pads are used. When driving over a bump, a light rattling sound may be heard from the brake pad. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction.

. When the brake disc rotor undergoes thermal expansion, a ticking noise may be heard from the engaging portion of the wheel and the brake disc rotor. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction. The noise will reduce when the temperature de- creases.

. In addition to noise resulting from uneven tire wear discussed in the previous section, the GT-R tires are more rigid than a typical passenger car tire and are made from a specially formulated rubber to maximize the vehicles performance capabilities. These characteristics cause the GT-R tires to have more road noise than a typical passenger car tire. This road noise is normal.

. Due to the performance capabilities and requirements of the GT-R, the sequential 6-speed dual clutch trans- mission is unlike a typical automatic

transmission. You will likely hear me- chanical sounds from the transmis- sion, particularly at slow speeds and at idle. This condition is normal.

BRAKE SYSTEM INFORMATION

Cracks on brake pad The friction material of the GT-R disc brake pad is bonded to the pad backing plate more strongly than conventional brake pads to withstand the high brake temperatures. The friction material and backing plate expand due to heat at different rates. Some cracks may be on the surface of the friction material due to the differences in expansion rates and the strong bond between the friction material and backing plate. The cracks do not indicate the brake pads need to be replaced. However, depending on the condition of the cracks, the pads may need to be replaced. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN deal- er.

Cracks on the disc rotors (models without NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package) When the brake is repeatedly applied at high loads during the cold season, small cracks of approximately 0.12 in (3 mm) long may appear around the cross drilled holes . This is due to the temperature differential that occurs because the sur- faces of the disc rotors become hot while the inside of the rotor is still cold. How- ever, this poses no problem in terms of brake performance, and does not indicate a malfunction. The brakes do not need to

GT-R Overview GTR-27

GTR-28 GT-R Overview

be replaced. However, if the cracks extend to 0.16 in (4 mm) or longer after repeated application of the brakes at high loads during high performance driving, or through the con- tinued use of the brakes, the disc rotors must be replaced.

Brake dust This vehicle is equipped with high perfor- mance brakes, and the characteristics of the brake pad material may cause more brake dust than other vehicles. NISSAN recommends a wheel coating that helps prevent the brake dust from sticking to the wheels. It is recommended you con- tact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for more details.

Sound heard from brake system (models with NCCB (NISSAN Car- bon Ceramic Brake) package) Rattles from brake pads and creaks during braking The high performance brake system of vehicles equipped with the NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) has more clear- ance between its brake pad and brake caliper than regular vehicles, and it uses a large brake pad to ensure stable braking

performance under a wide range of driv- ing conditions such as extremely high temperature areas or low temperature areas like snow-covered roads. Accord- ingly, you may hear light rattles from the brake pad area when driving over a step, which is not a malfunction. In addition, you will hear creaks because of the characteristics of the material for the disc rotor. These creaks reduce with time and wear. Never park your vehicle for a long time with the brake system wet. The materials used for the brake disc rotor and brake pads for specified NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) are dif- ferent from those used for the standard brake system in GT-R. The rotor and pads will be protected from adhesion caused by rusting. However, never park your vehicle for a long time with the brake systemwet. This helps maintain the brake disc rotor and brake pads for a long time and prevents an influence on the material composition of the carbon ceramic rotor and deterioration in the joint of brake disc rotors full floating structure. Especially during winter, be sure to park your vehicle with the brake disc rotor and pads dry to prevent them from being frozen and damaged in below freezing temperature conditions. The carbon ceramic brake for

GT-R includes air bubbles in the rotor and pads. Note that leaving them in the wet condition tends to cause adhesion due to freezing. . A screeching noise may be heard

when the brake pedal is depressed: When driving the vehicle for the first

time in the morning, After leaving the vehicle parked for

extended periods of time, or When the vehicle is damp following

rain showers or washing the vehi- cle.

These sounds are normal. The noise is caused when the brake pads absorb moisture, and the noise stops after the brake is applied several times.

. A screeching noise may also be heard when the brake pedal is depressed: When repeatedly applying gentle

braking, especially on a curve at a low speed, or

When the brake rotors have circular scores with the brake temperature high.

. The NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) causes more screeching noise in cold weather conditions than in normal weather conditions.

CHANGE OF SURFACE COLOR OF TITANIUM MUFFLER (if so equipped) Genuine titanium mufflers are made of titanium alloy. The surface color will change depending on the driving condi- tions, which is not unusual. Prior to shipping from factory, all vehicles receive balance aligning for engine, transmission, and clutch, as well as quench driving of brake pads and rotors. As a result, the muffler surface color may differ depend- ing on the vehicle.

THE COLOR TONE OF THE TITA- NIUM MUFFLER FINISHER MIGHT BE DIFFERENT FROM OTHERS (if so equipped) The titanium muffler finisher color tone is hand-made, so it may differ depending on the finisher.

SOUND HEARD AROUND TITANIUM MUFFLER (if so equipped) When stopping the engine (rapid cooling), you may hear a metal-rubbing sound or unusual ticking sound because of the differential thermal expansion between the inner and outer pipes of the muffler. This is not a malfunction. The sound will

decrease when the temperature lowers.

EXHAUST GAS IS NOT EMITTED FROM LEFT EXHAUST PIPE DURING IDLING/WHEN ENGINE SPEED IS LOW (if so equipped) The titanium muffler for vehicles with the exhaust sound control system is equipped with a control valve installed on the left-side exhaust pipe. When the exhaust sound control switch is ON or the engine speed is low, exhaust sound silen- cing is enhanced by closing the valve. Exhaust gas is not emitted from the left- side exhaust pipe when the control valve is closed. This is not a malfunction. ( Exhaust sound control system page 5-59)

DRY CARBON FIBER PARTS (if so equipped) Roughness or uneven surfaces of dry carbon fiber parts and fiber twists The surfaces of the dry carbon fiber parts are lightly coated like a race car so that you can feel the proper texture of real carbon, which may feel rough. This is normal.

The GT-R dual clutch transmission is a newly-developed system that uses an electronically controlled multiple-disc wet clutch attached to the highly efficient manual transmission. This transmission has two driving modes. . position (Automatic gearshift):

allows automatic shifting of the man- ual transmission.

. position (Manual gearshift): allows quick shifting of the manual transmission.

NOTE: When starting or driving on a steep uphill grade, shift to the position and operate the paddle shifter to shift down to 1st gear similar to a manual transmission vehicle. The GT-R dual clutch transmission was developed specifically to maximize vehi- cle performance and driving enjoyment. The GT-R transmission components were designed using different engineering standards than typical passenger car transmissions. Because of this, the GT-R has different operating characteristics, and various rattle noises may be heard during some driving conditions because of the following items:

GT-R Overview GTR-29

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION

GTR-30 GT-R Overview

. Gear clearances

. Ultralight flywheel

. Dry sump lubrication These noises do not indicate that there is a malfunction.

TRANSMISSION OPERATION CHARACTERISTICS

Mechanism Operation characteristics

Base Manual transmis- sion

. The GT-R transmission design is different from transmissions used in conventional passenger cars. The GT-R uses a transmission gear design, light flywheel and a dry sump lubrication system to provide maximum vehicle performance. Because the GT-R Transmission design is different, noises may be louder. When the transmission temperature is high, rattling, shaking and jarring noises may be heard.

. Clattering noises may be heard while shifting.

. Appropriate gaps are provided between gears to achieve smooth gear rotation and steady tooth surface lubrication under the high-load driving condition. However, this causes a rattling noise.

. If the shift lever is moved from to position, or to position before the vehicle stops, you may not be able to shift gear or it may take longer to shift gear. Make sure to depress the brake pedal and check that the vehicle has stopped before shifting.

Multiple-disc wet clutch

. When stopping the vehicle with the shift lever in the or position, be sure to firmly depress the brake pedal. The vehicle may slowly move if the brake pedal is not depressed.

. Avoid depressing the brake and accelerator pedals at the same time. Depressing the brake and accelerator pedals at the same time could cause the clutch to overheat and accelerate deterioration.

. When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, do not hold the vehicle in place by depressing the accelerator pedal. Doing so may cause the clutch to overheat and result in transmission damage. Use the brakes to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Electronic oil pressure control

The following conditions are caused due to changes in fluid viscosity as a result of temperature changes. . When the transmission oil is extremely cold or extremely hot, the transmission may feel like it is slipping during shifts or

there may be hard shifts. This is normal. Transmission shifting should return to normal when the transmission oil returns to normal operating temperatures.

. When the transmission oil temperature is extremely cold, the time required to run a system check may increase. During the system check, the shift lever must stay in the position. Move the shift lever after turning off the system check display. Also, it is normal to hear clicking noises during the transmission systems check.

Changing modes . The higher shift speeds in the position may result in shift shock and jerkiness when starting or shifting. . The quickest shifting in the R mode with the transmission in the position is available when the engine speed is high.

However, the transmission may shift more slowly when the engine speed is low.

Mechanical Limited Slip Differential (LSD)

If the vehicle accelerates from a stop with the steering wheel turned half a turn in cold temperatures, the inner wheel tire may slip and some noise or vibration may be heard. This phenomenon occurs because the viscosity of the differential oil becomes thicker and the Limited Slip Differential (LSD) operates with increasing load. When the steering wheel is returned to the straight ahead position or the differential oil warms up, the noise and vibration decrease.

GT-R Overview GTR-31

GTR-32 GT-R Overview

Mechanism Operation characteristics

Electronically-con- trolled All-Wheel Drive (AWD)

If the vehicle accelerates from a stop with the steering wheel turned half a turn in cold temperatures, it may be hard to move the vehicle when the accelerator pedal is depressed. This phenomenon is unique to AWD vehicles and is caused by the speed difference between the front and rear wheel. This is not a malfunction. Resolve the phenomenon by returning the steering wheel to the straight ahead position. This phenomenon can be reduced if certain conditions are met. ( Tight corner braking phenomenon page 5-44)

Ultralight flywheel

. An ultralight flywheel is provided to achieve rapid engine response to the accelerator pedal operation. The engine rotation fluctuations become larger than conventional vehicles. Rattling, shaking or jarring noises may be heard when idling or driving at a low speed.

. Rattling noises may be heard when the engine is started or stopped.

0 Illustrated table of contents

Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .................................................................................... 0-2

Front ................................................................................................ 0-2 Rear .................................................................................................. 0-3

Exterior front ................................................................................... 0-4 Exterior rear ..................................................................................... 0-6

Passenger compartment ...................................................... 0-7 Cockpit ................................................................................................ 0-8 Instrument panel ........................................................................ 0-9 Meters and gauges ................................................................ 0-10 Engine compartment ........................................................... 0-11 Warning and indicator lights .......................................... 0-12

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

FRONT 1. Seat belt (Page 1-6) 2. Rear seat walk-in lever (P.1-5) 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system (P.1-34)

4. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P.1-34)

5. Seat belt pretensioner (P.1-46) 6. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system (P.1-34) 7. Occupant classification sensor (pattern

sensor) (P.1-40)

8. Front seats (P.1-3)

SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

REAR 1. Rear seats

Child restraint installation (P.1-15) 2. Child restraint anchor points (for top

tether strap child restraint) (P.1-19) 3. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system (P.1-17, P.1-26, P.1-30)

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Hood (P.3-18) 2. Windshield wiper and washer (P.2-51,

P.8-18) 3. Doors (P.3-2, P.3-4, P.3-8) 4. Outside mirrors (P.3-28) 5. Power windows (P.2-67)

6. Corner sensors (P.5-48) 7. Center sensors (P.5-48) 8. Daytime running light (P.2-53) 9. Headlight and turn signal (P.2-53, P.8-27) 10. Tires and wheels (P.5-4, P.6-3, P.8-29,

P.10-10)

ITEMS GENUINE PARTS

Road wheel Genuine road wheel speci- fic to GT-R

Tire*1 Genuine tire specific to GT-R

Brake pad*2 Genuine brake pad specific to GT-R

Brake disc ro- tor*2

Genuine brake disc rotor specific to GT-R

*1: When tire replacement is required, repla- cing tires as a set of four with new tires is recommended. However, if a tire is punc- tured or damaged, it may be possible to replace only the damaged tire. Determin- ing whether one tire or a complete set of tires should be replaced is based on a number of factors including tire wear and condition. It is recommended you contact your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. They can recommend if an individual tire or a complete set should be replaced.

*2: For models without NCCB (NISSAN Car- bon Ceramic Brake) package: Brake pad and disc rotor page GTR-6 For models with NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package: NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) page GTR-6 Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II is the factory fill brake fluid. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) unit and other related parts were specially designed for this brake fluid. NISSAN cannot ensure

EXTERIOR FRONT

proper operation of the vehicle if other non-equivalent brake fluid is used.

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

1. High-mounted stop light (P.8-27) 2. Trunk (P.3-8, P.3-20) 3. Rear window defroster (P.2-52) 4. Satellite antenna (P.4-14) 5. Corner sensors (P.5-48) 6. Center sensors (P.5-48)

7. Rear view camera (P.4-2) 8. Rear combination light (P.8-27) 9. Fuel-filler door (P.3-24, P.10-4) : Except for NISMO models : NISMO models

ITEMS GT-R SPECIFIED FUEL

Fuel

Unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 93 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Re- search octane number 98)*1

*1: Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 93 AKI (Anti- Knock Index) number (Research octane number 98) to maximize vehicle perfor- mance. If 93 AKI number (Research octane number 98) premium gasoline is not available, you may use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96), but you may notice a decrease in performance.

EXTERIOR REAR

1. Coat hooks (P.2-66) 2. Inside lock knob (P.3-5) 3. Interior light control switch (P.2-69) 4. Map lights (P.2-69) 5. E-Call (SOS) button (P.2-61) 6. Sun visors (P.3-27)

7. Sunglasses holder (P.2-64) 8. Inside mirror (P.2-71, P.3-27) 9. Center console box (P.2-66)

Power outlet (P.2-60) USB memory operation* iPod player operation* Auxiliary input jack*

10. Cup holders (P.2-63) 11. Power window switches (P.2-67) 12. Window lock button (P.2-68) 13. Power door lock switch (P.3-5) *: Refer to the separate Multi Function Dis-

play Owners Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

1. Headlight and turn signal switch (P.2-53) 2. Paddle shifters (P.5-15) 3. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)* 4. Meters and gauges (P.2-6) 5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right

side)

MRK (Mark) switch* Cruise control (P.5-35)

6. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-51) 7. VDC, transmission and suspension set up

switches (P.5-25) 8. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-20)

9. Hood release handle (P.3-18) 10. Intelligent Key port (P.5-12) 11. Sonar system OFF switch (P.5-50) 12. Tilting/telescopic steering wheel lever

(P.3-26) 13. Horn (P.2-58) 14. Exhaust sound control switch (if so

equipped) (P.5-59) 15. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-10) 16. Shift lever (P.5-15) 17. Parking brake (P.5-34, P.5-46) *: Refer to the separate Multi Function Dis-

play Owners Manual.

COCKPIT

1. Outside mirror control switch (P.3-28) 2. Rear window defroster switch (P.2-52) 3. CD slot* 4. Heater and air conditioner (P.4-10) 5. Touch screen display* 6. Glove box (P.2-65)

7. Fuse box cover (P.8-22) 8. Power outlet (P.2-60) 9. Display Commander* 10. Front passenger air bag status light

(P.1-42) 11. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.6-2)

12. Trunk release power cancel switch (P.3-21) *: Refer to the separate Multi Function Dis-

play Owners Manual.

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1. Trip A/B reset switch (P.2-7) 2. Speedometer (P.2-7) 3. Tachometer (P.2-8)/Upshift indicator

(P.2-10) 4. Transmission position indicator (P.2-10) 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-8)

6. ENTER switch (P.2-16) 7. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-12) 8. Vehicle information display (P.2-13) 9. Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-7) 10. Fuel gauge (P.2-9) 11. NEXT switch (P.2-16)

NOTE: . Meters and gauges will illuminate

when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

. The needle indicators may move slightly after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction.

METERS AND GAUGES

1. Fuse/fusible link holder (P.8-22) 2. Battery (P.8-13) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P.8-9) 4. Engine oil dipstick (P.8-9) 5. Brake fluid reservoir (P.8-11) 6. Air cleaner (P.8-17)

7. Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-11) 8. Radiator filler cap (P.8-6) 9. Coolant reservoir cap (pressure type)

(P.8-6) 10. Coolant reservoir (P.8-6) 11. Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-12)

ITEMS GT-R SPECIFIED FLUIDS

Engine oil Mobil 1 (0W-40)*1 or equivalent

Transmission oil Genuine NISSAN Transmis- sion Oil R35 Special or equivalent

Differential oil (front and rear)

Differential Oil R35 COM- PETITION type 2189E or equivalent

Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II*2 or equivalent

*1: Mobil 1 (0W-40) (100% synthetic) is the factory fill oil. The VR38 engine with its plasma-sprayed bores was developed using this oil. NISSAN cannot ensure proper engine operation and durability if other 0W-40 non-equivalent synthetic oil is used. If Mobil 1 (0W-40) or equivalent is not available, Mobil 1 (10W-40) (100% synthetic) or equivalent may be used; however, some performance loss may be noticed.

*2: Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II is the factory fill brake fluid. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) unit and other related parts were specially designed for this brake fluid and NISSAN cannot ensure proper operation of the vehicle if other non-equivalent brake fluid is used.

Illustrated table of contents 0-11

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

0-12 Illustrated table of contents

Red light Name Page

Brake warning light 2-26

Charge warning light 2-27

Engine oil pressure warning light

2-28

Seat belt warning light 2-28

Supplemental air bag warning light

2-28

Yellow light Name Page

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light

2-29

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light

2-29

Intelligent Key warning light

2-30

Low tire pressure warning light

2-30

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

2-32

Master warning light 2-32

Transmission warning light 2-33

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light

2-33

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light

2-34

Other light Name Page

Cruise main switch indica- tor light

2-34

Cruise set switch indicator light

2-34

Exterior light indicator 2-34

Front passenger air bag status light

2-34

High beam indicator light 2-34

Turn signal/hazard indica- tor lights

2-34

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

1 Safety Seats, seat belts and sup- plemental restraint system

Seats ...................................................................................................... 1-2 Front seats ................................................................................. 1-3

Head restraints/headrests ................................................... 1-5 Seat belts ........................................................................................... 1-6

Precautions on seat belt usage ................................ 1-6 Pregnant women .................................................................. 1-9 Injured persons ....................................................................... 1-9 Three-point type seat belt with retractor ........ 1-9 Seat belt extenders .......................................................... 1-12 Seat belt maintenance .................................................. 1-12

Child safety .................................................................................... 1-13 Infants ......................................................................................... 1-13 Small children ....................................................................... 1-14 Larger children ..................................................................... 1-14

Child restraints ........................................................................... 1-15 Precautions on child restraints .............................. 1-16 Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) ................................................................... 1-17 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH ........................................................................... 1-20

Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts ...................................................................... 1-21 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH ........................................................................ 1-24 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts ....................................................... 1-27 Booster seats ...................................................................... 1-30

Supplemental restraint system .................................... 1-34 Precautions on supplemental restraint system ............................................................... 1-34 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats) .......................................................................... 1-40 Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems ............................. 1-45 Seat belts with pretensioners (front seats) .......................................................................... 1-46 Supplemental air bag warning labels ............. 1-48 Supplemental air bag warning light ................ 1-48 Repair and replacement procedure ................. 1-49

1-2 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING . Do not ride in a moving vehicle

when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and re- ceive neck or other serious inju- ries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit

well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and ad jus t the seat proper l y . ( Precautions on seat belt usage page 1-6)

. After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is se- curely locked.

. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended opera- tion of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assis- tance of others or pets unat- t e n d e d i n y o u r v e h i c l e . Additionally, the temperature in- side a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

. The seatback should not be re- clined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most ef- fective when the passenger sits with their back straight up and contacting the seat. If the seat- back is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries or damage.

SEATS

NOTICE Make sure the front seatback does not contact the rear seat when re- clining the seat. When the front seat is reclined to the rearmost position, it may contact the rear seat. This may cause an indentation in the seat- back.

FRONT SEATS

Front power seat adjustment Operating tips . The power seat motor has an auto-

reset overload protection circuit. If the motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds, then reactivate the switch.

. Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the engine is off. This will discharge the battery.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

1-4 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seat Adjustment Switch Operation Location Forward and back- ward

Move the switch forward or backward until the desired seat position is obtained.

Drivers and front passen- gers seatsReclining Turn the switch forward and backward until the desired seatback angle

is obtained. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. ( Precautions on seat belt usage page 1-6) Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the position with the parking brake fully applied.

Seat lifter (front) Push the switch up or down to raise or lower the front portion of the seat.

Drivers seat Seat lifter (rear) Move the switch up or down to raise or lower the rear portion of the

seat.

Rear seat walk-in This feature makes it easier to get in and out of the rear seat. Use the following procedure when getting in and out of the rear seat. 1. Pull up the lever , hold the knob ,

and tilt the seatback forward. 2. Use the seat adjustment switch to

slide the seat forward to a position where it will be easier to enter or exit the rear seats. Fold the shoulder belt guide for easier access to the rear seat.

To return the seatback to its original position, hold the knob , raise the seat-

back, and use the seat adjustment switch to adjust the seat position.

CAUTION . When returning the seat to its

original position, confirm that the seat and seatback are locked properly.

. Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot or bump your head when operating the walk-in seat.

NOTICE Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. They may be pinched and damaged.

WARNING Head restraints/headrests supple- ment the other vehicle safety sys- tems. They may provide additional protection against injury in certain rear end collisions. Head restraints/headrests must be adjusted properly, as specified in this section. Check the adjustment after someone else uses the seat. Failure to follow these instructions can re- duce the effectiveness of the head restraints/headrests. This may in- crease the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

1-6 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

The illustration shows the seating posi- tions equipped with head restraint/head- rest.

Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint. + Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or head- rest. Your vehicle is equipped with integrated head restraints/headrests. Proper adjustment: Properly position the head restraint by adjusting the front seat so that the top of the seat is as upright as possible.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted, and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position in- cludes a supplemental air bag. Most U.S. states and Canadian pro- vinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SEAT BELTS

WARNING . Every person who drives or rides

in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be properly restrained in the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child restraint.

. The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effective- ness of the entire restraint sys- tem and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn prop- erly.

. Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

. Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

1-8 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

accident. . Be sure the seat belt tongue is

securely fastened to the proper buckle.

. Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.

. Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.

. Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.

. If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a mal- function in the system. It is re- commended you have the system checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For exam- ple, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tam- pering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal

injury. . Once a seat belt pretensioner has

activated, it cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. Removal and installation of the pretensioner system components should be done by a GT-R certi- fied NISSAN dealer.

. All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hard- ware, should be inspected after any collision by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom- mends that all seat belt assem- blies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or im- proper operation is noted.

. All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturers in-

spection instructions and repla- cement recommendations. The child restraints should be re- placed if they are damaged.

PREGNANT WOMEN NISSAN recommends that pregnant wo- men use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug, and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING . Every person who drives or rides

in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.

. Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and re- ceive neck or other serious inju-

ries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.

. For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

. Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating posi- tions are equipped with Auto- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a childs neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be ser- iously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

1-10 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Fastening the seat belts 1. Adjust the seat. ( Seats page 1-2) 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the

retractor and insert the tongue into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. . The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on im- pact. A slow pulling motion per- mits the belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.

. If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug on the hips as shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.

The three-point type seat belts for the front passenger and rear seats have two modes of operation: . Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) . Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat.

The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during impacts. The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode or child restraint mode locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt is fully retracted. ( Child restraints page 1-15) The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During nor- mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag. ( Front passenger air bag and status light page 1-42)

WARNING When fastening the seat belts, be certain that seatbacks are comple- tely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.

Unfastening the seat belts To unfasten the seat belt, push the button on the buckle. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods: . When the belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor. . When the vehicle slows down rapidly. To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:

. Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for- ward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt move- ment.

If the retractor does not lock during this check or if you have any question about seat belt operation, see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

1-12 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Shoulder belt arm (for front seats) Before fastening the seat belt, adjust the shoulder belt arm to the lock position where the belt fits snugly on the shoulder. The arm can also be folded down to allow rear seat passengers easier access. Pulling the arm forward will allow an easy access to the belt.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap- shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available that can be purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seat- ing position. It is recommended you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for assis- tance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.

WARNING . It is recommended that only

NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, be used with the NISSAN seat belts.

. Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unneces- sary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.

. Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly,

the child could be seriously in- jured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE . To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpets. Then, wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.

. If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

. Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors work prop- erly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.

WARNING Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a childs neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cut- ting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly re- strained. In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, in- cluding doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community or- ganizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport

your child. There are three basic types of child restraint systems: . Rear-facing child restraint . Forward-facing child restraint . Booster seat The proper restraint depends on the childs size. Generally, infants (up to about 1 year and less than 20 lb (9 kg)) should be placed in rear- facing child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints are avail- able for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING Infants and children need special protection. The vehicles seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. ( Child restraints page 1-15) A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. ( Child restraints page 1-15) NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly re- strained in the rear seat than in the front seat. This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental re- straint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. ( Supplemental restraint system page 1-34)

INFANTS Infants up to at least one year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dards. You should choose a child restraint which fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturers instructions for instal-

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

CHILD SAFETY

1-14 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

lation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lb (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who out- grow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward- facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturers instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recom- mends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Cana- dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the man- ufacturers instructions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN Children should remain in a forward- facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer. Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forward-facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certify- ing that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

. Are the childs back and hips against the vehicle seatback?

. Is the child able to sit without slouch- ing?

. Do the childs knees bend easily over the front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor?

. Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?

. Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?

. Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride?

If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE: Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.

WARNING Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is moving. The child could be seriously injured or killed in an accident or sudden stop.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

CHILD RESTRAINTS

1-16 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RE- STRAINTS

WARNING . Failure to follow the warnings

and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passen- gers in a sudden stop or collision: The child restraint must be

used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturers in- structions for installation and use.

Infants and children should never be held on anyones lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.

Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another pas- senger.

NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear

seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward- facing child restraint in the front seat. ( Forward-fa- cing child restraint installation using the seat belts page 1- 27)

Even with the NISSAN Ad- vanced Air Bag System, never install a rear-facing child re- straint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could ser- iously injure or kill a child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.

Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child re- straints may not fit properly in your vehicle.

Child restraint anchor points are designed to withstand loads from child restraints that are properly fitted.

Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or har- nesses.

A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be

used in the front passenger seat.

Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.

Infants and children should always be placed in an appro- priate child restraint while in the vehicle.

. When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing- mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to these anchors. (See Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) page 1-17.) If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. Several manufacturers offer child re- straints for infants and small children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind: . Choose only a restraint with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dard 213.

. Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt sys- tem.

. If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is de- signed for your childs height and weight. Always follow all recom- mended procedures.

. If the combined weight of the child

and child restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH anchors or the seat belt to install the child restraint (not both at the same time).

. If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicles seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.

. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for instal- lation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an ap- proved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forward-facing child restraints be se- cured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.

LATCH label location

Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren System (LATCH) Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible child re- straints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

1-18 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

vehicles seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instructions for installation.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and in- stallation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sud- den stop or collision:

. Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the loca- tions shown in the illustration.

. Inspect the lower anchors by in- serting your fingers into the low- er anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushionmaterial. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.

Child restraint anchorages are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances

are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equip- ment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint an- chorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the da- maged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

LATCH lower anchor location

LATCH lower anchor location The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is attached to the seat- back to help you locate the LATCH anchors.

WARNING The GT-R has seats and seat belts for four occupants, two in the front seats and two in the rear seats. Never use the rear console as a seating position or for a child re- straint.

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attach- ments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating posi- tions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.

Top tether anchor point locations Anchor points are located on the rear parcel shelf. If you have any questions when instal- ling a top tether strap child restraint on the rear seat, it is recommended you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING Child restraint anchorages are de- signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

1-20 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equip- ment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint an- chorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the da- maged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sec- tions before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicles seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child re- straint. Be sure to follow the child re- straint manufacturers instructions for installation. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the LATCH system: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint man- ufacturers instructions.

Rear-facing web-mounted step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an- chors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.

Rear-facing rigid-mounted step 2

Rear-facing step 3

3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

Rear-facing step 4 4. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attach- ment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attach- ment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles. 5. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING The three-point seat belt with Auto- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child re- straint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

1-22 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Rear-facing step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in Child safety and Child restraints before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicles seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child re- straint. Be sure to follow the child re- straint manufacturers instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats: 1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the re- straint manufacturers instructions.

Rear-facing step 2 2. Route the seat belt tongue through

the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instruc- tions for belt routing.

Rear-facing step 3 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Rear-facing step 4 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up

on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Rear-facing step 5 5. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear- ward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

1-24 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Rear-facing step 6 6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to

each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE- STRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sec- tions before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicles seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child re- straint. Be sure to follow the child re- straint manufacturers instructions for installation. Follow these steps to install a forward- facing child restraint using the LATCH system: 1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint man- ufacturers instructions.

Forward-facing web-mounted step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an- chors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point . See

Installing top tether strap page 1-26. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

Forward-facing rigid-mounted step 2 3. The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat- back. If the seating position is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing step 4 4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to remove any slack.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

1-26 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward-facing step 6 6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attach- ment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attach- ment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

Installing top tether strap The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attach- ments. First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only). 1. Flip up the anchor cover from the

anchor point which is located directly behind the child restraint.

2. Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the rear parcel shelf.

4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint installation procedure steps earlier in this section before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when instal- ling a top tether strap, consult a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for details.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RE- STRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING The three-point seat belt with Auto- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child re- straint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. See Front passenger air bag and status light later in this section.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) step 1 Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety and Child restraints sec- tions before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicles seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child re- straint. Be sure to follow the child re- straint manufacturers instructions for installation. Follow these steps to install a forward- facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front

passenger seat: 1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost posi- tion. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint man- ufacturers instructions. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seat- back. If the seating position is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

1-28 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward-facing step 3 3. Route the seat belt tongue through

the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturers instruc- tions for belt routing. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to t h e t e t h e r a n c h o r p o i n t . ( Installing top tether strap page 1-30) Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.

Forward-facing step 4 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to Emer- gency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.

Forward-facing step 5 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up

on the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

Forward-facing step 6 6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear- ward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturers instructions to remove any slack.

Forward-facing step 8 8. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

1-30 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Forward-facing step 10 10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the igni- tion switch in the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, see Front passenger air bag and status light in this section. Move the child restraint to another seating position. It is recommended you have the system checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

Installing top tether strap The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the seat belts. First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt. 1. Flip up the anchor cover from the

anchor point which is located directly behind the child restraint.

2. Position the top tether strap over the top of the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point on the rear parcel shelf.

4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint installation procedure steps earlier in

this section before tightening the tether strap.

If you have any questions when instal- ling a top tether strap, it is recom- mended you consult a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for details.

BOOSTER SEATS

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:

. Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the childs face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach.

. Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the childs arm.

. A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind: . Choose only a booster seat with a

label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

. Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicles seat and seat belt system.

. Make sure the childs head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the childs ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the childs ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the childs ears, a high back booster seat should be used.

. If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with your child.

Always follow all recommended pro- cedures.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

1-32 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an ap- proved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.

Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the Child safety, Child restraints and Boos- ter seats sections earlier in this section before installing a child restraint. Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a forward-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturers instructions.

Outboard position 3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. If the seating position is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the childs hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturers instructions for ad- justing the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the childs shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturers instructions for ad- justing the belt routing.

Front seat 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and

instructions for properly fastening a seat belt. ( Three-point type seat belt with retractor page 1-9)

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

1-34 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, push the igni- tion switch to the ON position. The front passenger air bag status light

may or may not illuminate de- pending on the size of the child and the type of booster seat used. ( Front passenger air bag and status light page 1-42)

PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the following systems: . Driver and passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad- vanced Air Bag System)

. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup- plemental air bag

. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag

. Seat belt pretensioner Supplemental front-impact air bag sys- tem: The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- tem can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions. Front seat-mounted side-impact sup- plemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front pas- senger in certain side impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the

front seating positions in certain side impact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags on both sides are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time. Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover colli- sions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements may cause the cur- tain air bags to inflate. These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash pro- tection provided by the driver and pas- senger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occu- pant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument pa- nel and door finishers. ( Seat belts page 1-6) The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- mental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational.

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Sit upright and well back.

Sit upright and well back.

WARNING . The front air bags ordinarily will

not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of acci- dents.

. The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. ( Front passenger air bag and status light page 1-42)

. The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seat-

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

1-36 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

back and as far-away as practical from the steering wheel or instru- ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

. The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The Ad- vanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to prop- erly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

. The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant clas- sification sensor (pattern sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity o f in ju ry in an acc iden t . ( Front passenger air bag and status light page 1-42)

. Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them in- side the steering wheel rim could increase the risk of hand injury if

the supplemental front air bag inflates.

WARNING . Never let children ride unrest-

rained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dan- gerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

. Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and chil- dren should be properly re- strained in the rear seat, if possible.

. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear- facing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating supple- mental front air bag could ser- iously injure or kill your child. ( Child restraints page 1-15)

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

1-38 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Do not lean against doors or windows. Do not lean against doors or windows.

WARNING Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roof- mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags :

. The side air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a front impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity side collision. Al- ways wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of acci- dents.

. The curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a front impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of acci- dents.

. The seat belts, side air bags and curtain air bags are most effec- tive when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag

on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seat to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustra- tions.

. When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the supplemental side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

. Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may inter- fere with side air bag inflation.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

1-40 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. Crash zone sensor 2. Supplemental front-impact air bag mod-

ules (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System) 3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags 4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bags

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag inflators

6. Pressure sensors in door 7. Occupant classification sensor (pattern

sensor) 8. Occupant classification system control

unit

9. Satellite sensors 10. Seat belt pretensioners 11. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

NISSAN ADVANCED AIR BAG SYS- TEM (front seats) This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification require- ments under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of the informa- tion, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger sup- plemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may in- flate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag opera- tion. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual stage air bag inflators. The system monitors information from the Air bag

Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sen- sors and the occupant classification sen- sor (pattern sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classifica- tion sensor is also monitored. Based on information from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front pas- senger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions, de- pending on the information provided by the occupant classification sensor. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but the air bag will be off). One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system. ( Front passenger air bag and status light page 1-42) If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended you con- tact NISSAN or a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owners Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly. Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the head and chest of the front occu- pants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an in- flating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body. Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the air bag module during inflation. The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision. The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- mental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

1-42 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front passenger air bag status light

Front passenger air bag and sta- tus light

WARNING The front passenger air bag is de- signed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is ne- cessary for most effective protec- t i o n . F a i l u r e t o f o l l ow a l l instructions in this manual concern-

ing the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light: The front passenger air bag status light

is located on the center instrument panel. After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the front passenger air bag status light on the instrument panel illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off or illuminates depending on the front passenger seat occupied status. The light operates as follows: . Unoccupied passenger seat: The

light is OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

. Passenger seat occupied by a small adult, child or child restraint as out- lined in this section: The light illuminates to indicate that the front passenger air bag is OFF and will not inflate in a crash.

. Occupied passenger seat and the passenger meets the conditions out- lined in this section: The light is OFF to indicate that the front passen- ger air bag is operational.

Front passenger air bag: The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some condi- tions as described below as permitted by U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system. The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passen- ger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. The occupant classification sensor (pat- tern sensor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the seat. For example, if a child is in the front passen- ger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, the occupant classification sensor can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF. Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the passenger air bag

to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for example, by not sitting up- right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag. NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap- propriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classification sensor is designed to oper- ate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the Automatic Lock- ing Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in an accident or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. ( Child restraints page 1-15) If the front passenger seat is not occu- pied, the passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in

air bag inflation, because of the object being detected by the occupant classifi- cation sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly. Using the passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passen- ger air bag is automatically turned OFF with the seat occupied. The light will not illuminate when the front passenger seat is unoccupied. If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passenger air bag status light is illumi- nated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly. If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the passenger air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt

is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the passenger air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. If the passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, the system may be sensing an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is OFF). Your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer can check that the system is OFF by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with your dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the passenger seat status. However, if the seat becomes unoccupied, the air bag status light will remain off. If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air bag system, the supple- mental air bag warning light , located in the meter and gauges area will blink. It is recommended you have the system checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN deal- er.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

1-44 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Other supplemental front air bag precautions

WARNING . Do not place any objects on the

steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projec- tiles and cause injury if the front air bag inflates.

. Do not place objects with sharp edges on the seat. Also, do not place heavy objects on the seat that will leave permanent impres- sions in the seat. Such objects can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor (pattern sensor). This can affect the op- eration of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.

. Do not use water or acidic clea- ners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in

serious personal injury. . Immediately after inflation, sev-

eral front air bag system compo- nents will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.

. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supple- mental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.

. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electri- cal system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.

. Tampering with the supplemen- tal air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tamper- ing includes changes to the steer- ing wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing mate- rial over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag sys- tem.

. Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing ad- ditional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that is not specifically designed to as- sure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passen- ger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may inter- fere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sen- sor.

. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.

. Work on and around the front air bag system should be done by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. In- stallation of electrical equipment should also be done by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. The Sup- plemental Restraint System (SRS)

wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Un- authorized electrical test equip- ment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag sys- tem.

. A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a quali- fied repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the func- tion of the supplemental air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identi- fication. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Man- ual.

FRONT SEAT-MOUNTED SIDE-IM- PACT SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG AND ROOF-MOUNTED CURTAIN SIDE-IMPACT AND ROLLOVER SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS The front side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to

those of a higher severity side impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions. Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover colli- sions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements may cause the cur- tain air bags to inflate. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation. When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breath- ing condition should get fresh air promptly. Front side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating side air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

1-46 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

body. The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bags. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. In a rollover, the curtain air bags on both sides are designed to inflate. Under both side-impact situations, the curtain air bags will remain inflated for a short period of time. The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the systems are operational.

WARNING . Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the door finisher and the front seat.

Such objects may become dan- gerous projectiles and cause in- jury if a side air bag inflates.

. Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag sys- tem components will be hot. Do not touch them; youmay severely burn yourself.

. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bags and curtain air bags. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

. Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicles electri- cal system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect prop- er operation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

. Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious per- sonal injury. For example, do not change the front seat by placing material near the seatback or by installing additional trim materi- al, such as seat covers, around the side air bags.

. Work around and on the side air

bag and curtain air bag systems should be done by a GT-R certi- fied NISSAN dealer. Installation of electrical equipment should also be done by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modi- fied or disconnected. Unauthor- ized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identi- fication. When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sec- tions in this Owners Manual.

SEAT BELTS WITH PRETEN- SIONERS (front seats)

WARNING . The pretensioners cannot be re-

used after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.

. If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but the pretensioner is not activated, it is recommended to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, re- placed by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioners. This is to prevent damage to or acci- dental activation of the preten- sioners. Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.

. Work around and on the preten- sioners should be done by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Installa- tion of electrical equipment should also be done by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Un- authorized electrical test equip- ment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioners.

. If you need to dispose of a pre- tensioner or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. In- correct disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants. The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt retractor. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts. When a pretensioner activates, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. The smoke is not harmful, and it does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breath- ing condition should get fresh air promptly. After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest. The supplemental air bag warning light

is used to indicate malfunctions in t he p r e t en s i one r s y s t em . ( S ee

Supplemental air bag warning light page 1-48 for more details.) If the opera- tion of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, it is recommended you have the system checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN deal- er.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the preten- sioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owners Man- ual.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

1-48 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELS Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

SRS air bag The warning labels are located on the surface of the sun visors.

WARNING Do not use a rear-facing child re- straint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying in the meter, monitors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten- sioners and all related wirings. When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warn- ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the SRS air bag systems are operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the air bag and/or pretensioner systems need servicing:

. The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the air bag and/ or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. It is recommended you take your vehicle to the nearest GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioners will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PRO- CEDURE The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags and pretensioners are designed to activate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the sup- plemental air bag warning light will re- main illuminated after inflation has occurred. Repair and replacement of these systems should be done only by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, pretensioners and related parts should be pointed out to the person conducting the maintenance. The ignition switch should always be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING . Once a front air bag, side air bag,

or curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Ad- ditionally, the activated preten- sioners must also be replaced. The air bag module and preten- sioners should be replaced by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. The

air bagmodule and pretensioners cannot be repaired.

. The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and the preten- sioner should be inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle.

. If you need to dispose of a sup- plemental air bag or a preten- sioner or scrap the vehicle, contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal proce- dures could cause personal in- jury.

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

1-50 Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Cockpit ................................................................................................. 2-4 Instrument panel ......................................................................... 2-5 Meters and gauges .................................................................... 2-6

Speedometer ............................................................................ 2-7 Odometer/twin trip odometer ................................... 2-7 Tachometer ............................................................................... 2-8 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...................... 2-8 Fuel gauge .................................................................................. 2-9 Transmission position indicator ............................ 2-10 Upshift indicator ................................................................. 2-10 Instrument brightness control ................................ 2-12

Vehicle information display .............................................. 2-13 Engine oil level display ................................................... 2-13 Transmission system check display ................... 2-15

Drive computer .......................................................................... 2-16 Current fuel consumption .......................................... 2-16 Vehicle speed ........................................................................ 2-17 Cruise control ....................................................................... 2-17 Average fuel consumption and speed ............. 2-17 Elapsed time and trip odometer ........................... 2-18 Distance to empty ............................................................. 2-18 Outside air temperature .............................................. 2-19 Setting (drive computer) .............................................. 2-20 Warning (drive computer) ........................................... 2-24

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders ................................................................... 2-26

Checking lights .................................................................. 2-26 Warning/indicator lights (red) ............................... 2-26 Warning/indicator lights (yellow) ........................ 2-29 Warning/indicator lights (other) .......................... 2-34 Audible reminders ........................................................... 2-34

Warning display ......................................................................... 2-36 Engine oil low pressure warning ........................ 2-37 Engine system warning .............................................. 2-37 Shift lever position warning .................................... 2-37 Reverse warning .............................................................. 2-38 Transmission system warning .............................. 2-38 Transmission oil high temperature warning ................................................... 2-38 Transmission clutch high temperature warning ................................................... 2-39 Parking brake release warning ............................ 2-39 Low brake fluid warning ............................................ 2-39 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning ..... 2-40 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system warning ................................................................ 2-40 AWD clutch high temperature warning ........ 2-40 Front/rear tire size discrepancy warning .... 2-41 AWD system warning ................................................... 2-41

Low tire pressure warning ......................................... 2-42 Run-flat tire warning ....................................................... 2-42 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) warning .................................................................... 2-42 Cruise control system warning .............................. 2-43 Low fuel warning ............................................................... 2-43 Door/trunk open warning .......................................... 2-44 Headlight system warning ......................................... 2-44 Low washer fluid warning .......................................... 2-44 No key warning ................................................................... 2-45

Operation displays ................................................................... 2-45 Engine start operation indicator ........................... 2-46 Shift P warning ................................................................. 2-46 PUSH warning .................................................................... 2-46 Steering lock release malfunction indicator ..................................................... 2-47 Intelligent Key insertion indicator ........................ 2-47 Intelligent Key removal indicator .......................... 2-47 Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator .......................................................... 2-48

Security systems ....................................................................... 2-48 Vehicle security system ................................................ 2-48 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ................... 2-50

Wiper and washer switch ................................................... 2-51 Using the wipers ................................................................. 2-51 Using the washer ............................................................... 2-52

Rear window defroster switch ....................................... 2-52 Headlight and turn signal switch ................................ 2-53

Headlight switch ................................................................. 2-53

Turn signal switch .......................................................... 2-57 Horn .................................................................................................... 2-58 Heated seats ................................................................................ 2-58

Turning on the heaters .............................................. 2-58 Turning off the heaters .............................................. 2-58

Sonar system off switch .................................................... 2-59 Exhaust sound control switch (if so equipped) ................................................................................ 2-59 Power outlets .............................................................................. 2-60 E-Call (SOS) Button ................................................................. 2-61

Emergency support ....................................................... 2-61 Storage ............................................................................................. 2-63

Cup holders .......................................................................... 2-63 Sunglasses holder ........................................................... 2-64 Door pocket ......................................................................... 2-65 Glove box ............................................................................... 2-65 Console box ......................................................................... 2-66 Coat hooks ........................................................................... 2-66

Windows .......................................................................................... 2-67 Power windows ................................................................ 2-67

Interior lights ............................................................................... 2-69 Map lights .............................................................................. 2-69 Interior light control switch .................................... 2-70

Vanity mirror lights ................................................................ 2-71 HomeLink Universal Transceiver .............................. 2-71

Programming HomeLink ........................................ 2-72 Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers and gate openers ................................ 2-73

Operating the HomeLink Universal Transceiver .............................................................................. 2-74 Programming troubleshooting ............................... 2-74 Clearing the programmed information ........... 2-74

Reprogramming a single HomeLink button ....................................................................................... 2-74 If your vehicle is stolen ............................................... 2-75

2-4 Instruments and controls

1. Headlight and turn signal switch (P.2-53) 2. Paddle shifters (P.5-15) 3. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left

side)* 4. Meters and gauges (P.2-6) 5. Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right

side)

MRK (Mark) switch* Cruise control (P.5-35)

6. Wiper and washer switch (P.2-51) 7. VDC, transmission and suspension set up

switches (P.5-25) 8. Trunk lid release switch (P.3-20)

9. Hood release handle (P.3-18) 10. Intelligent Key port (P.5-12) 11. Sonar system OFF switch (P.5-50) 12. Tilting/telescopic steering wheel lever

(P.3-26) 13. Horn (P.2-58) 14. Exhaust sound control switch (if so

equipped) (P.5-59) 15. Push-button ignition switch (P.5-10) 16. Shift lever (P.5-15) 17. Parking brake (P.5-34, P.5-46) *: Refer to the separate Multi Function Dis-

play Owners Manual.

COCKPIT

1. Outside mirror control switch (P.3-28) 2. Rear window defroster switch (P.2-52) 3. CD slot* 4. Heater and air conditioner (P.4-10) 5. Touch screen display* 6. Glove box (P.2-65)

7. Fuse box cover (P.8-22) 8. Power outlet (P.2-60) 9. Display Commander* 10. Front passenger air bag status light

(P.1-42) 11. Hazard warning flasher switch (P.6-2)

12. Trunk release power cancel switch (P.3-21) *: Refer to the separate Multi Function Dis-

play Owners Manual.

Instruments and controls 2-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-6 Instruments and controls

1. Trip A/B reset switch (P.2-7) 2. Speedometer (P.2-7) 3. Tachometer (P.2-8)/Upshift indicator

(P.2-10) 4. Transmission position indicator (P.2-10) 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge (P.2-8)

6. ENTER switch (P.2-16) 7. Instrument brightness control switch

(P.2-12) 8. Vehicle information display (P.2-13) 9. Odometer/twin trip odometer (P.2-7) 10. Fuel gauge (P.2-9) 11. NEXT switch (P.2-16)

NOTE: . Meters and gauges will illuminate

when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

. The needle indicators may move slightly after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction.

METERS AND GAUGES

SPEEDOMETER The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.

CAUTION . For cleaning, use a soft cloth,

dampened with water. Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or cause discoloration to the lens.

. Do not spray any liquid such as water on the meter lens. Spraying

liquid may cause the system to malfunction.

ODOMETER/TWIN TRIP OD- OMETER The odometer indicates the total dis- tance that the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer indicates the distance of individual trips.

Changing the display Push the TRIP A/B RESET switch to change between trips and .

Instruments and controls 2-7

2-8 Instruments and controls

Resetting the trip odometer To reset a trip, display the trip that you want to reset to zero, then push and hold the TRIP A/B RESET switch for more than 1 second.

NOTE: When the battery is disconnected, the memory for trips and is erased, and both return to zero.

TACHOMETER The tachometer indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engine into the red zone .

NOTICE When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The engine coolant temperature is within the normal range when the gauge needle points within the zone shown in the illustration. The engine coolant temperature varies with the outside air temperature and driving conditions.

NOTICE If the gauge indicates engine coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease temperature. If gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possi- ble. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. ( If your vehicle overheats page 6-8)

FUEL GAUGE The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers E (Empty). The low fuel warning will be indicated on the vehicle information display when the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the

gauge reaches E. There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches E. ( Low fuel warning page 2-43) The indicates that the fuel-filler door is located on the passengers side of the vehicle. ( Fuel-filler door page 3-24)

NOTE: If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off. If the light remains on after a few driving trips, it is recom- mended you have the vehicle inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. ( Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) page 2-32)

Instruments and controls 2-9

2-10 Instruments and controls

TRANSMISSION POSITION INDICA- TOR The transmission position indicator indi- cates the gear positions. The indicator blinks if it is not possible to shift the gear when in the position.

1. Upshift indicator (green) 2. Upshift indicator (yellow) 3. Upshift indicator (red)

UPSHIFT INDICATOR When the upshift indicator is set to on, the indicators on the tachometer will illumi- nate to help upshift at a constant engine speed from any gear or to warn the driver of over-revving. The upshift indicator operates only when the shift lever is in the position. This function consists of two modes that can be selected on the vehicle information display: AUTO setting and MANUAL setting.

Setting Push the ignition switch to the ON posi- tion. Use the ENTER switch and toggle the vehicle information display to show the SETTING screen. Use the NEXT switch and ENTER

Instruments and controls 2-11

2-12 Instruments and controls

switch to go to ALERT > UPSHIFT. The current status of the upshift indicator will be shown on the UPSHIFT screen. Note that the function is set to AUTO as the factory default setting. To change the upshift indicator mode, choose SETTING on the UPSHIFT screen. Set one of the following modes by push- ing the NEXT switch , and then push ENTER to complete. . AUTO . 3,000 to 6,300 RPM (MANUAL) . OFF The number will increase by 100 RPM. To increase the number by 500 RPM, push and hold the NEXT switch .

Example When the maximum engine speed is desired: Set the upshift indicator to AUTO. The yellow indicator illuminates approxi- mately 700 RPM before the red zone, and the red indicator illuminates just before the red zone.

When the maximum engine torque is desired: Set the figure at 6,000 RPM. The green indicator starts flashing from approxi-

mately 5,500 RPM and illuminates at 6,000 RPM.

When breaking-in the vehicle: To help avoid high engine speeds during break-in, set the upshift indicator to less than 3,500 RPM. The green indicator starts flashing approximately 500 RPM before the set figure and illuminates from the set figure. ( Break-in schedule page 5-40)

NOTE: . There may be a slight difference

between the timing of the upshift indicator illumination and the tach- ometer indication.

. When the battery terminal is discon- nected, the set memory will be erased and the mode returns to the default.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CON- TROL The instrument brightness can be ad- justed when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Push the switch to adjust the brightness up or down . The bright- ness level is shown on the vehicle infor- mation display. When the headlights are on, the bright- ness of the interior switches is also adjusted at the same time.

NOTE: . The instrument brightness can be

adjusted separately for daytime and nighttime conditions. The adjusted settings are automatically stored.

. When the battery terminal is discon- nected, the set memory will be erased and the setting returns to the default.

The vehicle information display can dis- play the following information. . Engine oil level display . Transmission system check display . Instrument brightness control level

display ( Instrument brightness control page 2-12)

. Drive computer ( Drive computer page 2-16)

. Warning display ( Warning display page 2-36)

. Operation display ( Operation displays page 2-45)

. Cruise control display ( Cruise control page 5-35)

ENGINE OIL LEVEL DISPLAY When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the engine oil status before starting the engine is indicated as illu- strated.

When the oil level is normal OIL LEVEL OK is displayed. Push the displayed LEVEL switch to check the oil level.

Instruments and controls 2-13

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

2-14 Instruments and controls

NOTE: The engine oil level can be displayed after the OIL LEVEL OK display turns off or while the engine is started and running. ( Maintenance page 2-21)

When the oil level is low If the message shown above is displayed, the engine oil level is low. Warm up the engine in a level location. After at least 5 minutes have passed since engine stop, use the engine oil dipstick to check the oil level. ( Engine oil page 8-9) If the oil level is low, it is recommended you have additional engine oil added, or the oil changed, at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

NOTICE If the vehicle is in a location that is not level, accurate measurement of the oil level may not be possible. If OIL LEVEL LOW is displayed, but the level shown by the oil dipstick is normal, move the vehicle to a level location and stop the engine. After at least 5 minutes have passed, open the drivers door and push the igni- tion switch back to ON. If the OIL LEVEL LOW message appears again, have engine oil added or the oil changed.

When the oil level sensor mal- function occurs If the message shown above is displayed, the engine oil level sensor may be mal- functioning. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer immediately.

TRANSMISSION SYSTEM CHECK DISPLAY This is displayed after the engine is started while the transmission system is being checked. It turns off after a few seconds.

NOTE: . During the system check, the shift

lever cannot be moved out of the position. Operate the shift lever after the system check indicator turns off.

. The shift lever cannot be moved if the shift lever button is pushed while the system check is being

performed, even after the system check is finished. Release the button and push it again to operate the shift lever.

. During winter or at other times when the temperature is extremely low, changes in the hydraulic response characteristics may increase the amount of time that is required for the system check. During the system check, a thudding operating noise may occur or the engine speed may decrease, however this does not indicate that there is a malfunction.

Instruments and controls 2-15

2-16 Instruments and controls

1. ENTER switch 2. NEXT switch 3. Vehicle information display The drive computer displays the following information: . Current fuel consumption . Vehicle speed . Cruise control . Average fuel consumption and speed . Elapsed time and trip computer . Distance to empty . Outside air temperature . Setting

. Warning The vehicle information display can be changed when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Push the ENTER switch

to change the display.

NOTE: . The cruise control display is shown if

cruise control is set. ( Cruise control page 5-35)

. The warning display is not shown if there are no conditions to warn the driver.

. Depending on the driving conditions and other factors, the displayed values may differ from the actual values.

. The position of the speedometer needle and the speed shown in the vehicle information display may slightly differ.

CURRENT FUEL CONSUMPTION The current fuel economy is displayed when driving.

DRIVE COMPUTER

VEHICLE SPEED This displays the vehicle speed while driving.

CRUISE CONTROL This displays the set cruise control status.

NOTE: The cruise control display is shown if cruise control is set. ( Cruise con- trol page 5-35)

AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION AND SPEED This displays the average fuel economy and average vehicle speed beginning from the time when the display was last reset. To reset the display, push and hold the NEXT switch for more than 1 second. (The average fuel economy and average vehicle speed are reset at the same time.)

Instruments and controls 2-17

2-18 Instruments and controls

NOTE: . is displayed during the first 1/3

mile (500 m) or the first 30 seconds after a reset.

. The values are updated approxi- mately every 30 seconds.

ELAPSED TIME AND TRIP OD- OMETER This displays the elapsed time and trip odometer beginning from the time when the display was last reset. To reset the display, push and hold the NEXT switch for more than 1 second. (The elapsed time and trip odometer are reset at the same time.)

DISTANCE TO EMPTY This displays the approximate distance that the vehicle can be driven based on the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

NOTE: . If the fuel level is low, the low fuel

warning will be displayed. ( Low fuel warning page 2-43)

. If the vehicle is not refueled after the low fuel warning appears, the dis- play will change to . This change timing may become earlier depending on the driving conditions. This does not indicate that there is a

malfunction. . The values are updated approxi-

mately every 30 seconds.

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE This displays the outside air temperature.

NOTE: . The outside air temperature may not

be displayed correctly in the follow- ing cases. The outside air temperature is

lower than 22F (30C) or is higher than 131F (55C).

The vehicle is stopped or is driving at a low speed (less than approxi- mately 12 MPH (20 km/h)).

The temperature in the engine compartment is high.

. When the outside air temperature is lower than 37F (3C), the low outside temperature warning will be dis- played and ICY is indicated on the outside air temperature display. ( Alert page 2-20)

Instruments and controls 2-19

2-20 Instruments and controls

SETTING (drive computer) This is used to set the alert, maintenance and optional settings. Use the NEXT switch to select an item, then confirm with the ENTER switch

to change to the corresponding setting screen. To return to the initial setting screen, push and hold the ENTER switch for more than 1 second.

NOTE: . When the battery terminal is discon-

nected, the set memory will be erased and the settings return to the default.

. Setting is not possible in the follow- ing cases. The vehicle is being driven. A warning display is active. The instrument brightness con-

trol level display is active. The cruise control status is dis-

played.

Alert This function can be used to make settings for the upshift indicator, time to rest indicator and low outside tem- perature warning.

Upshift indicator: For details concerning the upshift indica- tor, refer to the following section. ( Upshift indicator page 2-10)

TIMER indicator: This alert informs the driver that the set driving time has elapsed. On the TIMER screen, push the NEXT switch to change the time. Push and hold the switch to increase the number every 1 hour. A maximum of 6 hours can be set.

NOTE: The default setting is OFF.

Low outside temperature warning: This alert informs the driver when the outside air temperature is lower than 37F (3C). On the ICY screen, push the NEXT switch

to turn this warning ON/OFF.

NOTE: The default setting is ON.

Maintenance This function can be used to set the various maintenance intervals and to check the engine oil level. The reminders shown below are used to notify the driver of the maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Because these are displayed based on the mileage driven, they do not indicate the actual conditions of the vehicle. Use these functions only as a reference. Input the maintenance distance using the following items: . On each setting screen, push the

Instruments and controls 2-21

2-22 Instruments and controls

NEXT switch to change the mile- age. Push and hold the switch to increase the number every 600 miles (1,000 km).

. Set to to set no reminders.

. To reset the accumulated mileage to zero, go to the RESET screen, then push the NEXT switch and confirm with the ENTER switch .

NOTE: . To restore the mileage to the origi-

nal figure after resetting, push the NEXT switch again.

. When the battery terminal is discon- nected, the set mileage will be erased and the settings will return to their default settings.

Engine oil level: This can be used to check the pre-start oil level while the engine is running. Select SETTING > MAINTENANCE > OIL > ENGINE OIL > LEVEL. If the low level reminder appears, check the level using the engine oil dipstick. ( Checking engine oil level page 8-9)

Engine oil: When the customer set mileage ap- proaches, the reminder will appear on the display and the remaining distance is displayed at regular intervals. Select SETTING > MAINTENANCE > OIL > ENGINE OIL to set or reset the mileage for the engine oil change.

NOTE: The default setting is 9,500 miles (15,000 km). The maximum mileage that can be set is 9,500 miles (15,000 km).

Engine oil filter: The reminder is displayed when the customer set mileage is exceeded. Select SETTING > MAINTENANCE > FILTER to set or reset the mileage for the engine oil filter change.

NOTE: The default setting is 9,500 miles (15,000 km). The maximum mileage that can be set is 9,500 miles (15,000 km).

Transmission oil: The reminder is displayed when the customer set mileage is exceeded. Select SETTING > MAINTENANCE > OIL > T/M OIL to set or reset the mileage for the transmission oil change.

NOTE: The default setting is 37,000 miles (60,000 km). The maximum mileage that can be set is 55,500 miles (90,000 km).

Tires: This reminder appears when the custo- mer set distance comes for maintaining tires. You can set or reset the distance for maintaining tires. ( Setting (drive computer) page 2-20)

WARNING The tire maintenance indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. See Changing wheels and tires in the 8. Do-it-yourself section. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions

Instruments and controls 2-23

2-24 Instruments and controls

affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire maintenance reminder for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire maintenance reminder as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal in- jury or death.

NOTE: The default setting is OFF.

Options This function can be used to make settings for language and unit.

Language: Select ENGLISH or FRANCAIS for use in the vehicle information display.

Unit: Select METRIC or US for use in the vehicle information display.

WARNING (drive computer) Warning information is displayed on the vehicle information display. Push the ENTER switch while a warning display is active to return to the original display. It is also possible to check any warnings tha t have not been cor rec ted . ( Warning display page 2-36)

Checking the warnings Use the NEXT switch to select DE- TAIL, then confirm with the ENTER switch

. When there are multiple warnings, push

the ENTER switch to change the display among them. To return to the initial warning, push and hold the ENTER switch for more than 1 second.

NOTE: If there are no warnings to display, only SKIP can be selected.

Instruments and controls 2-25

2-26 Instruments and controls

Warning/indicator light (red) Warning/indicator light (yellow) Warning/indicator light (other)

Brake warning light All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light Cruise main switch indicator light

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warn- ing light

Cruise set switch indicator light

Charge warning light Exterior light indicator

Engine oil pressure warning light Intelligent Key warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Seat belt warning light Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light

Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Master warning light

Transmission warning light

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warn- ing light

CHECKING LIGHTS With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

, or , , , The following lights (if so equipped) will

come on briefly and then go off: , or , , , , ,

If any light does not come on or operates in a way other than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. It is recommended you have the system checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (red) See Warning display page 2-36 and

Vehicle information display page 2- 13.

or Brake warning light This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Parking brake indicator: When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light: When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following: 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. ( Brake fluid page 8-11)

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, it is recommended you have the warning system checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indicator: When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illu- minate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. It is recommended you have the brake system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer promptly. ( Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light page

2-29)

Brake pad wear warning indicator (models with NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package): When the brake warning light illuminates, it may indicate that there is brake pad wear. Have the brake system checked and brake pads replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION Never drive for a long period of time when the brake warning light illumi- nates for brake pad wear warning indicator is illuminated. Otherwise, the brake may not function properly due to brake pad wear.

WARNING . Your brake system may not be

working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dan- gerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Other- wise, have your vehicle towed

because driving it could be dan- gerous.

. Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

. If the brake fluid level is below the minimum or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light If the light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the alternator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing or if the light remains on, it is recommended you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer immediately.

Instruments and controls 2-27

2-28 Instruments and controls

NOTICE Do not continue driving if the alter- nator belt is loose, broken or miss- ing.

Engine oil pressure warning light This light warns of low engine oil pres- sure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area and stop the engine immedi- ately. It is recommended you call a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Check the vehicle information display or use the dipstick to check the oil level. ( Engine oil level display page 2-13) ( Checking engine oil level page 8-9)

NOTICE Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.

Seat belt warning light and chime The light and chime remind you to fasten seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, and will remain illuminated until the drivers seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime will sound for about 6 seconds unless the drivers seat belt is securely fastened. The seat belt warning light for the front passenger will illuminate if the seat belt is not fastened when the front passengers seat is occupied. For approximately 5 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the system does not activate the warning light for the front passenger. ( Seat belts page 1-6)

Supplemental air bag warn- ing light After pushing the ignition switch to the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light will illuminate for about 7 seconds and then turn off. This means the system is operational. If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and pretensioner systems need ser- vicing and it is recommended your vehicle

be taken to a GT-R certified NISSAN deal- er. . The supplemental air bag warning

light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.

. The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.

. The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supple- mental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioners may not func- tion properly. ( Supplemental re- straint system page 1-34)

WARNING If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended you visit a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for this ser- vice.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (yel- low) See Warning display page 2-36 and

Vehicle information display page 2- 13.

All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warn- ing light The warning light comes on when the ignition switch is pushed to ON. It turns off soon after the engine is started. If the AWD system malfunctions, the warning light will either remain illumi- nated or blink. ( All-Wheel Drive (AWD) page 5-43)

CAUTION . If the warning light comes on

while driving there may be a malfunction in the AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed and have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recom- mended you have the vehicle checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. If the AWD warning light blinks on when you are driving:

blinks rapidly (about twice a second): Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the engine. The driv- ing mode will change to RWD to prevent the AWD system from malfunctioning. If the warning light turns off, you can drive again. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction.

blinks slowly (about once every 2 seconds): Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the engine. Check that all tire sizes are the same as that specified on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the drivers door opening, tire pressure is cor- rect and tires are not worn. ( Tire and loading infor- mation label page 10-14) If the tire pressure is insuffi- cient, fill with nitrogen gas. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer about filling with nitrogen gas. If nitrogen gas is not available, compressed air may be safely used under normal driving conditions.

However, NISSAN recom- mends refilling with nitrogen gas for maximum tire perfor- mance.

. If the warning light is still on after the above operations, have your vehicle checked as soon as pos- sible. It is recommended you have the vehicle checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera- tional. If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. It is recommended you have the system checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti- lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally, but with- out anti-lock assistance. ( Brake sys- tem page 5-52)

Instruments and controls 2-29

2-30 Instruments and controls

Intelligent Key warning light After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds and then turns off. This light warns of a malfunction with the electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent Key system. If the light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to free the steering lock or to start the engine. If the light comes on while the engine is run- ning, you can drive the vehicle. However in these cases, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for repair as soon as possible.

Low tire pressure warning light Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires. The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure and flat tire, or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly. After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, the warning light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning: If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all 4 wheels to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation label located in the drivers door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. ( Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) page 5-4) ( Tire Pressure Monitor- ing System (TPMS) page 6-3)

Run-flat tire warning: The run-flat tire warning warns of a flat tire. If the vehicle is being driven with one or more flat tires, the warning light will illuminate continuously and a chime will sound for 10 seconds. The chime will only sound at the first indication of a flat tire and the warning

light will illuminate continuously. When the flat tire warning is activated, it is recommended you have the system reset and the tire checked and replaced if necessary by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Even if the tire is inflated to the specified COLD tire pressure, the warning light will continue to illuminate until the system is reset. If you select the tire pressure information in the touch screen display, the warning screen will be displayed. The tire pressure for each tire will also be displayed. Refer to the separate Multi Function Display Owners Manual. Your vehicle can be driven for a limited time on a flat tire. ( Run-flat tires page 6-4) ( Run-flat tires page 8-37)

TPMS malfunction: If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. The light will remain on after the 1 minute. It is recommended you have the system checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. ( Tire Pressure Mon- itoring System (TPMS) page 5-4) ( Tire pressure page 8-30)

WARNING . If the light does not illuminate

with the ignition switch pushed to the ON position, it is recom- mended you have the vehicle checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer as soon as possi- ble.

. If the light illuminates while driv- ing, avoid sudden steering man- euvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- ing with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in ser- ious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the drivers door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the

tire pressure, a tire may be flat ( Run-flat tires page 6-4) or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, it is recom- mended you have the vehicle checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. Although you can continue driv- ing with a punctured run-flat tire, remember that vehicle handling stability is reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving a long dis- tance at high speeds may da- mage the tires.

. Do not drive at speeds above 50 MPH (80 km/h) and do not drive more than 50miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat tire. The actual distance the vehicle can be driven on a flat tire depends on outside temperature, vehicle load, road conditions and other factors.

. If you detect any unusual sounds or vibrations while driving with a punctured run-flat tire, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as pos- sible. The tire may be seriously damaged and need to be re-

placed. . When a wheel is replaced, the

TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after the 1 minute. It is recom- mended you contact a GT-R cer- tified NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION . The TPMS is not a substitute for

the regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly.

. Be sure to install the specified size of tires on the four wheels.

Instruments and controls 2-31

2-32 Instruments and controls

NOTE: . If the vehicle is being driven at

speeds of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly.

. The tires of this vehicle are filled with nitrogen gas. When the tire pressure is low, fill the tires with nitrogen gas. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for information on filling the tires with nitrogen gas.

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) If the malfunction indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emis- sion control or the muffler with electronic control valve (if so equipped) malfunction. The malfunction indicator light may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 US gallons (12 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. After a few driving trips, the light should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction ex- ists.

If this indicator light remains on for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the engine is not running, it indi- cates that the vehicle is not ready for an emission control system inspection/ maintenance test. ( Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test (US only) page 10-22)

Operation: The malfunction indicator light will come on in one of two ways: . Malfunction indicator light on steady

An emission control system mal- function has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the light does not turn off after a few driving trips, it is recommended you have the vehicle inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

. Malfunction indicator light blinking An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage:

1) Do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH (72 km/h).

2) Avoid hard acceleration or decel- eration.

3) Avoid steep uphill grades. 4) If possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed. The malfunction indicator light may stop blinking and remain on. It is recommended you have the vehicle inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.

NOTICE Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, re- duced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control sys- tem.

Master warning light When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the master warning light illumi- nates if any of the warning displays appear on the vehicle information display. ( Warning display page 2-36)

Transmission warning light This light warns of the following malfunc- tions.

Transmission system malfunction: The light blinks if a malfunction in the transmission system occurs. If the light blinks, certain gear positions may be- come unusable, so that the vehicle may become undrivable. It is recommended you have the system inspected promptly by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Transmission oil temperature high: The light illuminates if the transmission oil temperature becomes unusually high. If the light illuminates, avoid driving at high speed or at high engine speed until the light turns off. The light will turn off after a short period of time and the vehicle can then be driven normally. If the light illuminates frequently, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN deal- er.

NOTICE If the light continues to illuminate, the engine output may be reduced to prevent transmission damage.

Transmission clutch temperature high: The light illuminates if clutch temperature becomes unusually high. If the light illuminates, pull off the road in a safe area and idle the engine. When the light turns off, driving can be resumed. If the light illuminates frequently, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN deal- er.

NOTICE . Continuing to drive with the light

on could cause serious damage to the transmission.

. If the light continues to illumi- nate, the vehicle cannot be driven because the engine output may be reduced and the clutch may be reduced to keep the clutch disen- gaged.

R mode start function: If the R mode start function is used 4 times continuously, the function may be disabled and cannot be turned on for protection. While the function is disabled, the warning light illuminates. When the warning light goes off, the function can be used again. ( R mode start func- tion page 5-33)

When the warning light illuminates, per- form cool down driving (driving 1.3 mile (2 km) in 5th or 6th gear at a speed of approximately 37 - 50 MPH (60 - 80 km/h) while checking the temperature of the transmission oil until the warning light goes off.

NOTICE While the warning light is illumi- nated, the engine output is con- trolled so that it does not increase.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light illuminates and then turns off. The light comes on when the VDC set up switch is pushed to OFF for more than 1 second. ( VDC, transmission and sus- pension setup switches page 5-25) This indicates that the vehicle dynamic control system and traction control sys- tem are not operating. ( Vehicle Dy- namic Control (VDC) system page 5-54)

Instruments and controls 2-33

2-34 Instruments and controls

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light The light will blink when the VDC system or the traction control system is operat- ing, thus alerting the driver that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road surface may be slippery. If the VDC warning light illuminates when the VDC system is turned on, this light alerts the driver to the fact that the VDC systems fail-safe mode is operating, for example the VDC or hill start assist system may not be functioning properly. It is recommended you have the system checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN deal- er. If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC system function will be canceled but the vehicle is sti l l driveable. ( Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- tem page 5-54)

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS (other)

Cruise main switch indicator light The light comes on when the cruise control is pushed. The light turns off when the main switch is pushed again. While the cruise control system main

switch indicator light is on, the cruise control system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicator light The light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning prop- erly. It is recommended you have the system checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Exterior light indicator This indicator illuminates when the head- light switch is turned to the AUTO, or

position and the front parking lights, instrument panel lights, rear combination lights, license plate lights or headlights are on. The indicator turns off when these lights are turned off.

Front passenger air bag status light The front passenger air bag status light ( ) will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be OFF depending on how the front passenger seat is being used. ( NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats) page 1-40)

High beam indicator light This light comes on when the headlight high beam is on and goes out when the low beam is selected.

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights The light flashes when the turn signal switch lever or hazard switch is turned on.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Door lock warning chime When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See Troubleshooting guide (P.3-17).

Light reminder chime A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened with the headlight switch in the or position and the ignition switch in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. Turn the headlight switch to the OFF (if so equipped) or AUTO position when you leave the vehicle.

Parking brake reminder chime A chime will sound if the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) with the parking brake applied. Stop the vehicle and re- lease the parking brake.

Reverse warning chime The chime will sound inside the vehicle if any of the following conditions occurs. . The drivers door is opened while the

shift lever is in the position and the ignition switch is in the ON position.

. The shift lever is in the position and 5 minutes have passed while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Be sure to move the shift lever out of the position after driving in reverse.

Brake pad wear warning (models without NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package) The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed. After the wear of the brake pad is increased, the sound will be heard

all the time even if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Instruments and controls 2-35

2-36 Instruments and controls

WARNING When the warning light illuminates or blinks and a warning is displayed, promptly take the appropriate ac- tion. Ignoring the warning may result

in malfunctions and accidents.

When the items mentioned below are detected the master warning light illuminates and the warning is displayed on the vehicle information display . A

chime also sounds. If there are multiple warnings, the warn- ing lights remain lit or continue to blink and the warnings displayed in the vehicle information display are switched at reg- ular intervals. The warnings displayed in the vehicle information display can be switched voluntarily by pushing the ENTER switch .

WARNING DISPLAY

ENGINE OIL LOW PRESSURE WARNING This will appear if the engine oil pressure is low. ( Engine oil pressure warning light page 2-28)

ENGINE SYSTEM WARNING This will appear if a potential emission control or the muffler with electronic control valve (if so equipped) malfunction is detected, the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or the vehicle runs out of fuel. ( Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) page 2-32)

SHIFT LEVER POSITION WARNING This will appear if the system cannot detect the shift lever position. Stop the vehicle in a safe location. De- press the brake pedal and move this shift lever to another position then move the lever back to the desired position. If the warning is still displayed after the above operation is performed, it is recom- mended you have the system checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. ( Driving the vehicle page 5-15)

Instruments and controls 2-37

2-38 Instruments and controls

REVERSE WARNING This will appear (and a chime will sound) if the shift lever is in the position for more than 5 minutes, or when the drivers door is opened while the shift lever is in the position.

TRANSMISSION SYSTEM WARNING This will appear if a transmission system malfunction occurs. ( Transmission warning light page 2-33)

TRANSMISSION OIL HIGH TEM- PERATURE WARNING This will appear if the transmission oil temperature becomes unusually high. ( Transmission warning light page 2- 33)

TRANSMISSION CLUTCH HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING This will appear if the transmission clutch temperature becomes unusually high. ( Transmission warning light page 2- 33)

PARKING BRAKE RELEASE WARN- ING This will appear if the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7 km/h) with the parking brake applied. ( Brake warning light page 2-26) ( Parking brake reminder chime page 2-35)

LOW BRAKE FLUID WARNING This will appear if the brake fluid level becomes low. ( Brake warning light page 2-26)

Instruments and controls 2-39

2-40 Instruments and controls

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) WARNING This will appear if the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is not functioning properly. ( Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light page 2-29) ( Brake warning light page 2-26)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM WARNING This will appear if the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system or the hill start assist system is not functioning properly. ( Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light page 2-34) ( Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light page 2-33)

AWD CLUTCH HIGH TEMPERATURE WARNING This will appear if the temperature of the AWD clutch becomes unusually high. ( All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light page 2-29)

NOTE: If the vehicle is driven in a way which causes the rear wheels to slip, the AWD clutch temperature will increase and the warning indicator may flash. Con- tinuing to drive in way that causes the warning light to flash may cause the clutch to reach excessive temperatures

that could result in damage to the vehicle.

FRONT/REAR TIRE SIZE DISCRE- PANCY WARNING This will appear if the diameter of the front and the rear wheels are different. ( All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light page 2-29)

AWD SYSTEM WARNING This will appear if the AWD system is not functioning properly while the engine is running. ( All-Wheel Drive (AWD) warning light page 2-29)

Instruments and controls 2-41

2-42 Instruments and controls

LOW TIRE PRESSURE WARNING This will appear if the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure. ( Low tire pressure warning light page 2-30)

RUN-FLAT TIRE WARNING This will appear and a chime will sound if the vehicle is being driven with one or more flat tires. ( Low tire pressure warning light page 2-30)

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) WARNING This will appear if the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is not function- ing properly. ( Low tire pressure warning light page 2-30)

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM WARN- ING This will appear if the cruise control system is not functioning properly. ( Cruise set switch indicator light page 2-34)

LOW FUEL WARNING This will appear when the fuel level in the tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches the empty (E) position. This displays the approximate distance that the vehicle can be driven based on the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.

NOTE: . The low fuel warning will appear

when the amount of fuel remaining in the tank decreases to approxi- mately 3 US gallons (12 liters).

. The timing of the low fuel warning display may change depending on braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

. If the vehicle is not refueled after the low fuel warning appears, the dis- play will change to . This change timing may become earlier depending on the driving conditions. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction.

Instruments and controls 2-43

2-44 Instruments and controls

DOOR/TRUNK OPEN WARNING This will appear if any of the doors and/or trunk lid are open or not closed securely. The vehicle icon indicates which door or the trunk lid is open.

HEADLIGHT SYSTEM WARNING This will appear if the LED headlight system is not functioning properly. It is recommended you have the system checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN deal- er.

LOW WASHER FLUID WARNING This will appear when the washer tank fluid is at a low level. Add washer fluid as necessary. ( Window washer fluid page 8-12)

NO KEY WARNING This will appear in either of the following conditions.

No key inside the vehicle The warning appears when the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

Unregistered Intelligent Key The warning appears when the ignition switch is pushed from the LOCK position and the Intelligent Key cannot be recog- nized by the system. You cannot start the engine with an unregistered Intelligent Key. ( Intelligent Key system page 3-8)

These displays appear when an appro- priate operation is required in starting or stopping the engine.

Instruments and controls 2-45

OPERATION DISPLAYS

2-46 Instruments and controls

ENGINE START OPERATION INDI- CATOR This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the position. This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed.

SHIFT P WARNING This warning appears and an inside warning chime sounds when the ignition switch is pushed to stop the engine with the shift lever in any position except the position. If this warning appears, move the shift lever to the position. This warning will also turn off when pushing the ignition switch to the ON position.

PUSH WARNING This warning appears when the shift lever is moved to the position with the ignition switch in the ACC position after the SHIFT warning appears. If this warning appears, push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

STEERING LOCK RELEASE MAL- FUNCTION INDICATOR This indicator appears when the steering wheel lock cannot be released from the LOCK position. If this indicator appears, push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left.

INTELLIGENT KEY INSERTION INDI- CATOR This indicator appears when the Intelli- gent Key needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port (for example, the Intelligent Key battery is discharged). If this indicator appears, insert the Intel- ligent Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct direction. ( Intelligent Key battery discharge page 5-12)

INTELLIGENT KEY REMOVAL INDI- CATOR This indicator appears when the drivers door is opened with the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and the Intelli- gent Key placed in the Intelligent Key port. A key reminder chime also sounds. If this indicator appears, remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with you when leaving the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-47

2-48 Instruments and controls

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS- CHARGE INDICATOR This indicator appears when the Intelli- gent Key battery is running out of power. If this indicator appears, replace the battery with a new one. ( Intelligent Key battery replacement page 8-25)

Your vehicle has two types of security systems, as follows: . Vehicle security system . NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System The security condition will be shown by the security indicator light.

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM The vehicle security system provides visual and audio alarm signals if someone opens the doors, hood, or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that acti- vates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle com- ponents in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key(s) in the vehicle, and always lock it when unattended. Be aware of your surround- ings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. Many devices offering additional protec- tion, such as component locks, identifica- tion markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and speci- alty shops. Your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.

SECURITY SYSTEMS

How to arm the vehicle security system 1. Close all windows.

The system can be armed even if the windows are open.

2. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position.

3. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

4. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the Intelligent Key, door handle request switch or power door lock switch. The power door lock switch

should be operated while the door is open, and then closed.

5. Confirm that the security indicator light comes on. The security indicator light stays on for about 30 seconds. The vehicle security system is now pre-armed. After about 30 seconds the vehicle security system automati- cally shifts into the armed phase. The security light begins to flash once every approximately 3 seconds. If, during this 30-second pre-arm time period, the door is unlocked, or the ignition switch is pushed to ACC or ON, the system will not arm.

Even when the driver and/or passen- gers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all doors, hood, and trunk lid locked with the ignition switch in the LOCK position. When pushing the igni- tion switch to the ACC or ON position, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation The vehicle security system will give the following alarm: . The headlights blink and the horn

sounds intermittently. . The alarm automatically turns off

after approximately 1 minute. How- ever, the alarm reactivates if the

vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm is activated by: . Opening the door or the trunk lid

without using the button on the Intelligent Key, the door handle re- quest switch or the mechanical key. (Even if the door is opened by releas- ing the door inside lock knob, the alarm will activate.)

. Opening the hood.

How to stop an activated alarm The alarm will stop by: . Unlocking a door by pushing the

UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key. . Unlocking a door by pushing the door

handle request switch. . Pushing the ignition switch to the ACC

or ON position. If the system does not operate as described above, it is recommended you have it checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Instruments and controls 2-49

2-50 Instruments and controls

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered Intelligent Key. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired op- eration. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Ca- nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Security indicator light The security indicator light is located on the instrument panel. It indicates the status of the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. The light blinks whenever the ignition switch is in the ACC, OFF or LOCK posi- tion. This function indicates the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational. If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, this light will remain on while the ignition switch is in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, it is recommended you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all Intelligent Keys that you have when visiting a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for service.

WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the wind- shield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm wind- shield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.

NOTICE . Do not operate the washer con-

tinuously for more than 30 sec- onds.

. Do not operate the washer if the reservoir tank is empty.

. Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.

. Pre-mix washer fluid concen- trates with water to the manu- facturers recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windowwasher reservoir tank. Do

not use the window washer re- servoir tank to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

The windshield wiper and washer oper- ates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.

USING THE WIPERS Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:

INT (Intermittent) intermittent opera- tion can be adjusted by turning the knob toward (Slower) or (Faster). Low continuous low speed operation High continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up to have one sweep operation of the wiper.

Instruments and controls 2-51

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

2-52 Instruments and controls

NOTE: . In the MIST position, the wipers

operate while the lever is lifted up. When the lever is released, it auto- matically returns to the OFF position and the wipers stop.

. When the speed sensing wiper inter- val function is turned on, the inter- mittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed. (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent op- eration speed will be faster.) To turn this function on and off, see the separate Multi Function Display Owners Manual.

. If the wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.

USING THE WASHER Pull the lever toward you to operate the washer. Then the wiper will also operate several times.

NOTE: When the level of washer fluid is low, a warning display appears on the vehicle information display. ( Low washer fluid warning page 2-44)

To defog/defrost the rear window, start the engine and push the switch on. The indicator light on the switch will come on. Push the switch again to turn the defros- ter off. It will automatically turn off in approxi- mately 15 minutes.

NOTE: When the rear window defroster switch is pressed, the heated outside mirrors also operate at the same time. ( Outside mirrors page 3-28)

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH

NOTICE When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

HEADLIGHT SWITCH

Lighting For USA: The parking, tail and license plate lights will turn on after the engine is started regardless of the position of the headlight switch. The lights will turn off when the engine is turned off. The daytime running lights will also turn on when the engine is started. Turning the switch to the position: The parking, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument lights will come on and

the daytime running light will remain on. Turning the switch to the position: Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on. The daytime running light will turn off.

Instruments and controls 2-53

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

2-54 Instruments and controls

For Canada: The parking, tail and license plate lights will turn on after the engine is started regardless of the position of the headlight switch. The lights will turn off when the engine is turned off while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position. The daytime running lights will also turn on when the engine is started while the headlights are off. Turning the switch to the position: The parking, side marker, tail, license plate and instrument lights will come on and the daytime running light will remain on if the headlights are off.

The autolight system will also be set in this position. Turning the switch to the position: Headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on. The daytime running light will turn off.

Autolight system For USA: The autolight system allows the head- lights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. To set the autolight system: 1. Make sure the headlight switch is in

the AUTO position . 2. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position. 3. The autolight system automatically

turns the headlights on and off. To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the OFF, or position.

The autolight system can turn on the headlights automatically when it is dark and turn off the headlights when it is light. If the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position and one of the doors is opened, the headlights remain on for 45 seconds.

For Canada: The autolight system allows the head- lights to be set so they turn on and off automatically. To set the autolight system: 1. Make sure the headlight switch is in

the AUTO or position . 2. Push the ignition switch to the ON

position. 3. The autolight system automatically

turns the headlights on and off. To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to the position. The autolight system can turn on the headlights automatically when it is dark

and turn off the headlights when it is light. If the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position when the parking brake is ap- plied, the headlights remain off. With the position selected, the head- lights turn off when the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position, the shift lever is placed in the position or the parking brake is applied. (The parking, side mar- ker, tail, license plate, and instrument lights are on.) With the AUTO position selected (head- lights are on), the headlights will remain on for 45 seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and one of the doors is opened.

Instruments and controls 2-55

2-56 Instruments and controls

Headlight beam select When the headlights are on, push the lever to the front of the vehicle to switch to the high beams. The high-beam indicator light illuminates. ( High beam indicator light page 2-34) Pull the lever to the neutral position to switch to the low beams. Pulling the lever toward you will flash the headlight high beam regardless of the position of the headlight switch.

CAUTION Use low beams when there are cars approaching from the opposite di- rection, during city driving and at similar times.

Battery saver system A chime will sound when the driver side door is opened with the headlight switch in the or position and the ignition switch in the ACC, OFF or LOCK position. ( Light reminder chime page 2-34) When the headlight switch is in the or

position while the ignition switch is in the ON position, the lights will automati- cally turn off after a period of time when the ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF position. When the headlight switch remains in the

or position after the lights auto- matically turn off, the lights will turn on when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position.

NOTICE . Be sure to turn the headlight

switch to the OFF (if so equipped) or AUTO position when you leave the vehicle for extended periods of time, otherwise the battery will be discharged.

. Never leave the headlight switch on when the engine is not run- ning for extended periods of time even if the headlights turn off automatically.

Daytime running light system For USA: The daytime running lights automatically illuminate when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the AUTO position. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition

switch is pushed to the OFF position.

WARNING When the daytime running light sys- tem is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.

For Canada: The daytime running lights automatically illuminate when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The daytime running lights operate with the headlight switch in the AUTO position or in the position, the headlight must be off. Turn the headlight switch to the position for full illumination when driving at night. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the daytime running lights do not illuminate. The daytime running lights illuminate once the parking brake is released. The daytime running lights will remain on until the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position or the headlights turn on.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal Move the lever up or down to signal the turning direction. When the turn is com- pleted, the turn signals cancel automati- cally.

Lane change signal . Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

. Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch, and release the lever. The turn signal will automati- cally flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.

Instruments and controls 2-57

2-58 Instruments and controls

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of the steering wheel.

WARNING Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag sys- tem. Tampering with the supple- mental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.

The seat heaters can be used when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The front seats are warmed by the built-in heaters.

TURNING ON THE HEATERS Push the "HI" or "LO" side of the switch to activate the heaters. The switch indicator illuminates.

Switch posi- tion

Function

HI To heat the seat quickly LO To keep the seat warm

TURNING OFF THE HEATERS Move the switch to the level position. The switch indicator turns off.

WARNING Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occu- pants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in those body parts in contact with the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION . Do not put anything on the seat

which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.

. Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.

. Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immedi- ately with a dry cloth.

HORN HEATED SEATS

. If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and it is recommended you have the sys- tem checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

NOTICE . The battery could run down if the

seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.

. Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.

. When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, thinner, or any similar materials.

The sonar system OFF switch on the lower side of the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the sonar system on and off. To turn the sonar system on and off, the ignition switch must be in the ON position. The indicator light on the switch will turn off when the system is turned off. If the indicator light flashes it may indicate a malfunction in the sonar system. ( Sonar system page 5-48 )

The exhaust sound control switch on the lower side of the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the exhaust sound control system on and off. To close the electronic control valve, push the exhaust sound control switch to the ON side. To open the electronic control valve, push the exhaust sound control switch to the OFF side. ( Exhaust sound control system page 5-59)

Instruments and controls 2-59

SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH EXHAUST SOUND CONTROL SWITCH (if so equipped)

2-60 Instruments and controls

CAUTION . The outlet and plug may be hot

during or immediately after use. . Do not use with accessories that

exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not use double adapters or more than one elec- trical accessory.

. This power outlet is not designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit.

. Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned OFF.

. When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water to contact the outlet.

NOTICE . Use power outlet with the engine

running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.

. Avoid using power outlet when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.

. Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.

Next to the steering wheel Pull out the cap to use the outlet. Replace the cap after use.

POWER OUTLETS

Inside the console box Open the cap to use the outlet. Close the cap after use.

EMERGENCY SUPPORT NissanConnect Services provides var- ious services to support dealing with emergencies of the subscribed vehicle and the driver. For example, in case of an illness or serious injury, you can seek support by pushing the in-vehicle E-Call* (SOS) but- ton and connecting to NissanConnect Services. NissanConnect Services can specify the location of the vehicle via GPS, and the information will be sent to the police or other agencies as needed. *: "E-Call" is an abbreviation for the "Emergency Call". For information about other NissanCon- nect Services emergency support re- l a t e d s e r v i c e s , r e f e r t o t h e NissanConnect Services website or con- tact the NissanConnect Services support line.

NissanConnect Services website: For U.S. www.nissanusa.com/connect For Canada www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect (English) www.nissan.ca/nissanconnect/fr (French) NissanConnect Services support line: 1-855-426-6628

WARNING . Please note that the Automatic

Collision Notification service (For details of the Automatic Collision Notification service, refer to the separate Multi Function Display Owners Manual.) and Emergency Call function cannot be used in the following conditions: Emergency functions and ser-

vices will not be available without a paid subscription to NissanConnect Services.

The NissanConnect Services network system is disabled.

The vehicle moves outside the service area where the TCU (Telematics Control Unit) is connected to the system.

The vehicle is outside the area where the cellular network service is receivable.

The vehicle is in a location with poor signal reception such as tunnels, underground parking garages, behind buildings or in mountainous areas.

Instruments and controls 2-61

E-CALL (SOS) BUTTON

2-62 Instruments and controls

The line is busy. The TCU (Telematics Control

Unit) or other systems of your vehicle are not working prop- erly.

It may not be possible to make an emergency call de- pending on the severity of a collision and/or emergency.

. Park the vehicle in a safe location and set the parking brake before operating the E-Call (SOS) button.

. Only use this service in case of an emergency. There may be a pen- alty for inappropriate use of the service.

. Radio waves could adversely af- fect electric medical equipment. Individuals who use a pacemaker should contact the device manu- facturer regarding any possible effects before using the system.

. The TCU (Telematics Control Unit) antenna is installed inside the upper central part of the instru- ment panel. An occupant should not get any closer to the antenna than specified by the pacemaker manufacturer. The radio waves

from the TCU antenna may ad- versely affect the operation of the pacemaker while using the Nis- sanConnect Services.

Making an emergency call The E-Call (SOS) button is located near the map light. 1. Push the E-Call (SOS) button. 2. When the line is connected, speak to

the Response Specialist.

INFO:

. After the E-Call (SOS) button is pushed, it may take some time until the system initiates connection, de- pending on the technical environment and whether the TCU (Telematics Control Unit) is being used by other

services. . An indicator light on the E-Call (SOS)

button shows the readiness of the emergency support system. If the indicator light is not illuminated, push- ing the E-Call (SOS) button does not connect your vehicle to the Response Specialist. The indicator light blinks while con- nected to the NissanConnect Ser- vices Response Center.

. Even when the indicator light is illu- minated, connection to the Nissan- Connect Services Response Center may not be possible. If this occurs in an emergency situation, contact the authorities by other means.

. To avoid disconnecting the line, keep the engine running during an emer- gency call, if it is safe to do so.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION . Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

. Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

Front Slide the cover toward the rear of the vehicle to open. To close, slide the cover back toward the front of the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-63

STORAGE

2-64 Instruments and controls

Rear NOTE: Cup holder is wider and shallower than cup holders and . Small-size cups are likely to tip over in cup holder . Use cup holders and .

SUNGLASSES HOLDER To open the sunglasses holder, push .

WARNING Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the drivers view and to help prevent an accident.

CAUTION . Do not use for anything other

than glasses. . Do not leave glasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the glasses.

DOOR POCKET Door pockets are located inside the drivers side and passengers side doors.

NOTICE Do not grasp the door pockets to open and close the doors. Doing so may damage the pockets.

GLOVE BOX

WARNING Keep glove box lid closed while driv- ing to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

Pull the knob toward you to open the glove box. To close the glove box, press the lid forward until it locks in place.

Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the glove box. ( Mechanical key page 3-3) The mechanical key stops when it is inserted approximately halfway in.

Instruments and controls 2-65

2-66 Instruments and controls

CONSOLE BOX Lift up the lock knob to open the lid. To close the center console box, press on the lid until it locks in place.

NOTE: The console box contains a power out- let.

CAUTION Do not leave the console box open. The open lid may suddenly close when the vehicle stops.

COAT HOOKS To use the coat hook, push the upper side of the hook to release it.

CAUTION Do not hang any objects with sharp edges on the coat hangers. These items may be knocked off if the SRS air bag deploys, possibly causing injury.

NOTICE Do not place items that are more than 2 lb (1 kg) on the hook.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING . Make sure that all passengers

have their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to pre- vent unexpected use of the power windows.

. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended opera- tion of the vehicle and or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave chil- dren, people who require the assistance of others or pets un- attended in your vehicle. Addi- tionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for about 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the LOCK position. If the drivers or front passengers door is

opened during this period of about 45 seconds, power to the windows is can- celed.

Drivers side 1. Window lock button 2. Drivers window switch 3. Front passengers window switch

Instruments and controls 2-67

WINDOWS

2-68 Instruments and controls

Front passengers side 4. Front passengers window switch

Main power window switch (dri- vers side) To open or close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it. The main switch (drivers side switches) will open or close all the windows.

Locking passengers windows When the window lock button is pushed in, only the drivers side window can be opened or closed. Push it in again to cancel.

Passengers side power window switch The passenger side switch will open or close only the corresponding window. To open close the window, push down or pull up the switch and hold it.

Automatic operation To fully open or close the window, com- pletely push down or pull up the switch and release it; it does not need to be held. The window will automatically open or close all the way. To stop the window, just push or lift the switch in the opposite direction. A light push or pull on the switch will cause the window to open or close until the switch is released.

Auto reverse function If the control unit detects something caught in the window as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered. The auto reverse function can be acti- vated when the window is closed by automatic operation when the ignition switch is in the ON position or for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position. Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.

WARNING There are some small distances im- mediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.

Automatic adjusting function

CAUTION When the battery cable is removed from the battery terminal, do not close either of the front doors. The automatic window adjusting func- tion will not work and the side roof panel may be damaged.

The power window has an automatic adjusting function. When the door is being opened, the window is automati- cally lowered slightly to avoid contact between the window and the side roof

panel. When the door is closed, the window is automatically raised slightly. While the automatic adjusting function does not work, the window will be con- trolled as follows: . When the door is opened, the window

lowers for approximately 2 seconds. . While the door is open, the window

cannot be raised.

If the windows do not close automatically If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initi- alize the power window system. 1. Push the ignition switch to start the

engine. 2. Close the door. 3. After starting the engine, open the

window completely by operating the power window switch.

4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the driver side window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed completely.

5. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is

complete. 6. Perform steps 2 through 5 above for

the passenger side window by oper- ating either drivers or passengers side switch.

If the power window automatic function does not operate properly after perform- ing the procedure above, it is recom- mended you have your vehicle checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

MAP LIGHTS Push the button as illustrated to turn the light on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-69

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-70 Instruments and controls

INTERIOR LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH The interior light control switch has three positions: ON , DOOR and OFF .

ON position When the switch is in the ON position , the map lights will illuminate.

NOTICE Do not use the light for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a dis- charged battery.

NOTE: The lights will also turn off after a period of time when the lights remain illuminated after the ignition switch has been pushed to the OFF or LOCK posi- tion to prevent the battery from becom- ing discharged.

DOOR position When the switch is in the DOOR position , the map lights will turn on when the

door is opened and turn off when the door is closed. The map lights will turn off approximately 15 seconds after the door is closed with the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position.

NOTE: When the interior light control switch is in the DOOR position and the door is open, the light will remain on even when the map light switch is pressed to turn off. Key-linked interior light control system: The map lights will turn on and off linked with the locking and unlocking of the door. This function operates when the interior light control switch is in the DOOR posi- tion.

. When entering the vehicle When the drivers seat door is unlocked, the map light illuminates for approxi- mately 15 seconds, then it turns off. While the map light is on, if the ignition switch is pushed to the ACC or ON position, or if the drivers side door is locked, the light turns off. . When exiting the vehicle When the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF or LOCK position, the map lights turn on for approximately 15 seconds, then it turns off. If the drivers side door is locked while the map lights are on, the light turns off.

NOTE: It is possible to cancel the key-linked interior light control system setting. See the separate Multi Function Display Owners Manual.

OFF position When the switch is in the OFF position , the map lights will not illuminate, regard- less of any condition.

There is an illuminated vanity mirror on the reverse side of the sun visor.

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver provides a convenient way to consolidate the functions of up to three individual hand-held transmitters into one built-in device. HomeLink Universal Transceiver: . Will operate most Radio Frequency

(RF) devices such as garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security systems.

. Is powered by your vehicles battery. No separate batteries are required. If the vehicles battery is discharged or is disconnected, HomeLink will retain all programming.

When the HomeLink Universal Trans- ceiver is programmed, retain the origi- nal transmitter for future programming procedures (Example: new vehicle pur- chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional i n f o r m a t i o n , r e f e r t o

Programming HomeLink page 2-72.

WARNING . Do not use the HomeLink Uni-

versal Transceiver with any gar- age door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as re- quired by federal safety stan- dards. (These standards became effective for opener models man- ufactured after April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object in the path of a closing garage door and then automatically stop and reverse, does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these fea- tures increases the risk of serious injury or death.

. During the programming proce- dure your garage door or security gate will open and close (if the transmitter is within range). Make sure that people or objects are clear of the garage door, gate, etc. that you are programming.

. Your vehicles engine should be turned off while programming the HomeLink Universal Trans- ceiver. Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless

Instruments and controls 2-71

VANITY MIRROR LIGHTS HomeLink UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

2-72 Instruments and controls

and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355- 3515.

NOTE: It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being pro- grammed to HomeLink for quicker programming and accurate transmis- sion of the radio-frequency. 1. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1-3 in (26-76 mm) away from the HomeLink surface, keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and handheld transmitter but- ton. DO NOT release until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful pro- gramming.)

NOTE: Some devices to be programmed may require you to replace Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in the Programming HomeLink for Canadian customers and gate

openers page 2-73.

3. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light. . If the indicator light is solid/

continuous, programming is com- plete and your device should acti- vate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released.

. If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a solid/continuous light, continue with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device. A second person may make the following steps easier. Use a ladder or other device. Do not stand on your vehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage door opener motor in the garage, locate the learn or smart button (the name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer but it is usually located near where the hang- ing antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there is difficulty locating the button, reference the garage door openers manual.

5. Press and release the learn or smart button.

NOTE: Once the button is pressed, you have approximately 30 seconds to initiate the next step.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for two seconds and release. Repeat the press/hold/release se- quence up to 3 times to complete the programming process. HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site at : www. homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

PROGRAMMING HomeLink FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE OPENERS Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are de- signed to time-out in the same manner. If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties programming a gate operator or garage door opener by using the Programming HomeLink procedures, replace Programming HomeLink Step 2 with the following:

NOTE: When programming a garage door opener, etc., unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possi- ble damage to the garage door opener components. Step 2: Using both hands, simultaneously press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button. During programming, your hand- held transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press and hold the desired HomeLink button while you

Instruments and controls 2-73

2-74 Instruments and controls

press and re-press (cycle) your hand- held transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful programming. DO NOT release until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming. Proceed with Programming HomeLink step 3 to complete. Remember to plug the device back in when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HomeLink UNI- VERSAL TRANSCEIVER The HomeLink Universal Transceiver, after it is programmed, can be used to activate the programmed device. To op- erate, simply press and release the appro- priate programmed HomeLink Universal Transceiver button. The amber indicator light will illuminate while the signal is being transmitted. For convenience, the hand-held transmit- ter of the device may also be used at any time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLESHOOT- ING If the HomeLink does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information: . replace the hand-held transmitter

batteries with new batteries. . position the hand-held transmitter

with its battery area facing away from the HomeLink surface.

. press and hold both the HomeLink and hand-held transmitter buttons without interruption.

. position the hand-held transmitter 1-3 in (26-76 mm) away from the HomeLink surface. Hold the transmit- ter in that position for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink is not pro- grammed within that time, try holding the transmitter in another position - keeping the indicator light in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink buttons, refer to the HomeLink web site at: www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED IN- FORMATION The following procedure clears the pro- grammed information from both buttons. Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons can be re- programmed, see Reprogramming a single HomeLink button page 2-74.

To clear all programming 1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. HomeLink is now in the programming mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Programming HomeLink - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE HomeLink BUTTON To reprogram a HomeLink Universal Transceiver button, complete the follow- ing. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink

button. Do not release the button. 2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing

the HomeLink button, proceed with Programming HomeLink - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink at: www.homelink.com or 1- 800-355-3515. The HomeLink Universal Transceiver button has now been reprogrammed. The new device can be activated by pushing the HomeLink button that was just programmed. This procedure will not affect any other programmed HomeLink buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the codes of any non-rolling code device that has been programmed into HomeLink. Consult the Owners Manual of each device or call the manufacturer or dealer of those devices for additional information. When your vehicle is recovered, you will need to reprogram the HomeLink Uni- versal Transceiver with your new trans- mitter information. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired op- eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Ca- nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-75

2-76 Instruments and controls

MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys ........................................................................................................ 3-2 Intelligent Key .......................................................................... 3-2

Doors ..................................................................................................... 3-4 Locking with inside lock knob .................................... 3-5 Locking with power door lock switch .................. 3-5 Automatic door lock system ....................................... 3-5 Locking with mechanical key ..................................... 3-6 Opening the doors .............................................................. 3-7

Intelligent Key system ............................................................. 3-8 Intelligent Key functions ................................................. 3-9 Remote keyless entry system .................................. 3-12 Setting hazard indicator and horn mode ...... 3-14 Warning signals ................................................................... 3-16 Troubleshooting guide .................................................. 3-17

Hood .................................................................................................... 3-18 Opening the hood ............................................................. 3-18 Closing the hood ................................................................ 3-19

Trunk .................................................................................................. 3-20 Trunk open request switch ..................................... 3-20 Trunk lid release switch ............................................. 3-20 Trunk release power cancel switch ................. 3-21 Opening and closing the trunk ............................ 3-22 Emergency trunk lid release .................................. 3-22

Fuel-filler door ............................................................................ 3-24 Opening the fuel-filler door ..................................... 3-25 Closing the fuel-filler door ....................................... 3-25

Steering wheel ........................................................................... 3-26 Tilt/telescopic steering column ........................... 3-26

Sun visors ....................................................................................... 3-27 Mirrors ............................................................................................... 3-27

Inside mirror ........................................................................ 3-27 Outside mirrors ................................................................. 3-28 Vanity mirror ....................................................................... 3-29

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record any key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, this key can be duplicated by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

1. Intelligent Key (2 sets) 2. Mechanical key (inside Intelligent Keys) (2

sets) 3. Key number plate (1 set)

INTELLIGENT KEY Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicles Intelligent Key system com- ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components. As many as 4 In- telligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Immobi-

lizer System of your vehicle. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key compo- nents when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

NOTICE . Be sure to carry the Intelligent

Key with you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a precision de- vice with a built-in transmitter. To avoid damaging it, please note the following. The Intelligent Key is water

resistant; however, wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.

Do not bend, drop or strike it against another object.

Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in a place where temperatures exceed 140F (60C).

If the outside temperature is below 14F (10C), the battery of the Intelligent Key may not

KEYS

function properly. Do not change or modify the

Intelligent Key. Do not use a magnet key

holder. Do not place the Intelligent

Key near an electric appliance such as a television set, per- sonal computer or cellular phone.

Do not allow the Intelligent Key to come into contact with water or salt water, and do not wash it in a washing machine. This could affect the system function.

. If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intel- ligent Key. This will prevent the Intelligent Key from unauthorized use to unlock the vehicle. For information regarding the eras- ing procedure, please contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Mechanical key To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob at the back of the Intelli- gent Key. To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position. Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doo r s and the g l o ve box . ( Locking with mechanical key page 3-6) ( Glove box page 2-65)

CAUTION Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key.

Valet hand-off When you have to leave a key with a valet, give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the mechanical key with you to protect your belongings. To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being opened during valet hand-off, follow the procedures below. 1. Push the trunk release power cancel

switch to the OFF side. ( Trunk release power cancel switch page 3- 21)

2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.

3. Lock the glove box with the mechan- ical key. ( Glove box page 2-65)

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet, keeping the mechanical key in your pocket or bag for insertion into the Intelligent Key when you retrieve your vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING . Always have the doors locked

while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides great- er safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unin- tentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.

. Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended opera- tion of the vehicle and or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave chil- dren, people who require the assistance of others or pets un- attended in your vehicle. Addi- tionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

CAUTION To prevent theft or accidents, be sure to stop the engine and lock the doors before stepping away from the ve- hicle.

NOTICE When the battery cable is removed from the battery terminal, do not close either of the front doors. The automatic window adjusting func- tion will not work, and the side roof p a n e l m a y b e d a m a g e d . ( Automatic adjusting function page 2-68)

NOTE: . The doors of this vehicle are some-

what harder to close than those of an ordinary vehicle (especially when the vehicle is new). This is because the stiffness of the rubber has been increased to improve the airtight- ness of the vehicle interior during situations such as higher speed driving. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction.

. When the drivers door is locked or unlocked, the fuel-filler door is auto- matically locked or unlocked at the same time.

When the door is being opened, the window is automatically lowered slightly to avoid contact between the window and the side roof panel. When the door is closed, the window is automatically raised slightly. ( Automatic adjusting function page 2-68)

DOORS

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB To lock a door individually, push down the inside lock knob to the lock position then close the door. To unlock, lift up the inside lock knob to the unlock position .

NOTE: When locking the door without an Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle.

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH Operating the power door lock switch will lock or unlock all the doors. The switches are located on the drivers and front passengers door armrests. To lock the doors, push the power door lock switch to the lock position with the drivers or front passengers door open, then close the door.

NOTE: When locking the door this way, be sure not to leave the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle. To unlock the doors, push the power door lock switch to the unlock position .

Lockout protection When the power door lock switch (driver or front passenger) is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key left in the key port and any door open, all doors will lock and unlock automatically. When the power door lock switch (driver or front passenger) is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and any door open, all doors will unlock automatically and a chime will sound after the door is closed. These functions help to prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SYSTEM . All doors lock automatically when the

vehicle speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).

. All doors unlock automatically when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The automatic unlock function can be deactivated or activated. To deactivate or activate the automatic door unlock system, perform the following procedure: 1. Close all doors. 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON

position. 3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step

2, push and hold the power door lock switch to the position (UNLOCK) for more than 5 seconds.

4. When activated, the hazard indicator will flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard indicator will flash once.

5. The ignition switch must be placed in the OFF and ON position again be- tween each setting change.

When the automatic door unlock system is deactivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. To unlock the door manu- ally, use the inside lock knob or the power door lock switch (drivers or front passen- gers side).

LOCKING WITH MECHANICAL KEY The drivers door will be locked or un- locked using the mechanical key. 1. Press the rear end of the drivers

outside door handle to lift up the front end .

2. With the outside door handle lifted up, use the mechanical key and turn the key cylinder cap counterclockwise to remove.

3. Turning the door key cylinder to the front of the vehicle will lock the drivers door, and turning to the rear of the vehicle will unlock the drivers door.

4. Replace the key cylinder cap in the reverse order.

NOTICE Do not drive with the cap removed. Water that enters through the key- hole may cause a malfunction.

NOTE: . Do not pull too hard on the door

handle when locking or unlocking the doors. Pulling too hard will pre- vent the mechanical key from turn- ing, making it impossible to lock or unlock the doors.

. Unlocking the drivers door using the mechanical key will not unlock the fuel-filler door.

OPENING THE DOORS

Opening from outside the vehicle 1. Press the rear end of the outside door

handle to lift up the front end of the handle.

2. Pull the front end of the outside door handle toward you.

Opening from inside the vehicle Lift up the inside door handle to open a door from inside the vehicle.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTICE Do not grasp the door pockets to open and close the doors. Doing so may damage the pockets.

WARNING . Radio waves could adversely af-

fect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric med- ical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.

. The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pushed. The Federal Aviation Agency (FAA) advises the radio waves may affect aircraft naviga- tion and communication sys- tems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an air- plane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote control- ler function or pushing the request switch on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may af- fect the Intelligent Key system operation. Be sure to read the following before using

the Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION . Be sure to carry the Intelligent

Key with you when operating the vehicle.

. Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

. The Intelligent Key is always commu- nicating with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intelligent Key sys- tem transmits weak radio waves. En- vironmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following oper- ating conditions. In such cases, cor- rect the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key. When operating near a location

where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.

When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular tele- phone, transceiver, and CB radio.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

When the Intelligent Key is in con- tact with or covered by metallic materials.

When any type of radio wave re- mote control is used nearby.

When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.

When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.

. Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating condi- tions, the batterys life is approxi- mately 2 years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one. ( Intelligent Key battery re- placement page 8-25)

. Since the Intelligent Key is continu- ously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.

. Because the steering wheel is locked electrically, unlocking the steering wheel with the ignition switch in the LOCK position is impossible when the vehicle battery is completely dis- charged. Pay special attention that the vehicle battery is not completely discharged.

. Do not push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key held in your hand. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recog- nizing that the Intelligent Key is out- side the vehicle.

. After locking the doors, check that the doors are securely locked by testing them.

. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the key with you and then lock the doors.

. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the trunk, make sure you carry the key with you and then close the trunk.

. Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

INTELLIGENT KEY FUNCTIONS It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel- filler door and trunk lid by pushing the request switch on the outside door han- dles and the trunk lid.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Intelligent Key operating range The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch. The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm) from each request switch.

NOTE: . When the Intelligent Key battery is

discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating loca- tion, the Intelligent Key systems operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.

. If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bum- per, the request switches may not function.

. When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone who does not carry the Intelligent Key to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

Intelligent Key operation You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out from your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door handle request switch

within the range of operation.

NOTE: . When the drivers door is locked or

unlocked, the fuel-filler door is auto- matically locked or unlocked at the same time.

. When you lock or unlock the doors or the trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn (or the out- side chime) will sound as a confir- mat ion . ( Set t ing hazard indicator and horn mode page 3-14)

Locking doors: 1. Move the shift lever to the position,

push the ignition switch to the OFF position and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close all the doors. 3. Push the drivers or front passengers

door handle request switch while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All the doors will lock. 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice

and the outside chime sounds twice.

NOTE: . Doors will lock with the Intelligent

Key while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

. Doors will not lock with the Intelli- gent Key while any door is open.

. Doors will not lock by pushing the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another registered In- telligent Key.

Unlocking doors: 1. Push the drivers or front passengers

door handle request switch once while carrying the Intelligent Key with

you. 2. The hazard indicator flashes once and

outside chime sounds once. The cor- responding door will unlock.

3. Push the door handle request switch again within 1 minute.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once and outside chime sounds once again. All the doors will unlock.

NOTE: All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pushing the request switch while the doors are locked. If during this 1-minute time period, the request switch is pushed, all doors will be locked auto- matically after another 1 minute. . Opening any door . Pushing the ignition switch

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Opening trunk lid: 1. Push the trunk open request switch

for more than 1 second. 2. The trunk will unlatch. An outside

chime will sound four times. 3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

NOTE: . To prevent the Intelligent Key from

being accidentally locked in the trunk , lockout protect ion is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

. When the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will open.

Battery saver system When all the following conditions are met for a period of time, the battery saver system will cut off the power supply to prevent battery discharge. . The ignition switch is in the ACC

position, and . All doors are closed, and . The shift lever is in the position.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, fuel- filler door, and activate the panic alarm by pushing the buttons on the Intelligent Key.

NOTE: Before locking the doors, make sure the Intelligent Key is not left in the vehicle.

Remote keyless entry operating range The LOCK/UNLOCK button on the Intelli- gent Key can operate at a distance of approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. (The effective distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.) The lock and unlock buttons on the Intelligent Key will not operate when: . the distance between the Intelligent

Key and the vehicle is over 33 ft (10 m). . the Intelligent Key battery runs down. The LOCK/UNLOCK operating range var- ies depending on the environment. To securely operate the lock and unlock buttons, approach the vehicle to about 3 ft (1 m) from the door.

Remote keyless entry operation NOTE: . When the drivers door is locked or

unlocked, the fuel-filler door is auto- matically locked or unlocked at the same time.

. When you lock or unlock the doors or the trunk lid, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn (or the out- side chime) will sound as a confir- mat ion . ( Set t ing hazard indicator and horn mode page 3-14)

Locking doors: 1. Move the shift lever to the position,

push the ignition switch to the OFF position, and make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close all the doors. 3. Push the LOCK button on the

Intelligent Key. 4. All the doors will lock. 5. The hazard indicator flashes twice

and the horn chirps once.

NOTE: . Doors will lock with the Intelligent

Key while the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

. Doors will not lock with the Intelli- gent Key while any door is open.

Unlocking doors: 1. Push the UNLOCK button on

the Intelligent Key once. 2. The hazard indicator flashes once. The

drivers door will unlock. 3. Push the UNLOCK button on

the Intelligent Key again within 60 seconds.

4. The hazard indicator flashes once again. All the doors will unlock.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is

performed within 1 minute after pushing the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key while the doors are locked. If during this 1- minute time period, the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors will be locked automatically after another 1 minute. . Opening any door . Pushing the ignition switch

Opening trunk lid: 1. Push the TRUNK button on the

Intelligent Key for more than 1 second. 2. The trunk will unlatch. 3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Using panic alarm: If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened, you may activate the alarm to call attention as follows: 1. Push the PANIC button on the

Intelligent Key for more than 1 sec- ond.

2. The theft warning alarm and head- lights will stay on for 25 seconds.

3. The panic alarm stops when: . It has run for 25 seconds, or . Any of the buttons on the Intelli-

gent Key are pushed. (Note: the panic button should be pushed for more than 1 second to turn the

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

panic alarm off.)

SETTING HAZARD INDICATOR AND HORN MODE This vehicle is set in hazard indicator and horn mode when you first receive the vehicle. When you lock/unlock the doors, the hazard indicator will flash and the horn (or the outside chime) will sound as a confirmation. The following descriptions show how the hazard indicator and horn will activate when locking/unlocking the doors and how the horn feature can be deactivated.

Hazard indicator and horn mode

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system (Using door handle request switch or trunk open re-

quest switch)

HAZARD - twice OUTSIDE CHIME - twice

HAZARD - once OUTSIDE CHIME - once

HAZARD - none OUTSIDE CHIME - 4 times

Remote keyless entry sys- tem

(Using , or button)

HAZARD - twice HORN - once

HAZARD - once HORN - none

HAZARD - none HORN - none

Hazard indicator mode

DOOR LOCK DOOR UNLOCK TRUNK UNLOCK

Intelligent Key system (Using door handle request switch or trunk open re-

quest switch)

HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none HAZARD - none

Remote keyless entry sys- tem

(Using , or button)

HAZARD - twice HAZARD - none HAZARD - none

Switching procedure The horn beep feature can be deactivated with the following procedures. 1. Push the LOCK and UNLOCK

buttons simultaneously for more than 2 seconds.

2. The hazard indicator flashes 3 times. 3. The horn beep feature will be deacti-

vated (Hazard indicator mode). 4. To reactivate the horn beep feature

(Hazard indicator and horn mode), push the buttons once more. The hazard indicator flashes once and the horn beeps once.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING SIGNALS To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly due to an erroneous opera- tion of the Intelligent Key listed on the following chart or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or beep sounds inside and outside the vehicle and a warning displays in the v e h i c l e i n f o r m a t i o n d i s p l a y . ( Warning display page 2-36) ( Operation displays page 2-45) When a chime or beep sounds or a warning displays, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE Symptom Possible cause Action to take

When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds con- tinuously.

The shift lever is not in the position.

Shift the shift lever to the position.

When opening the drivers door to get out of the vehi- cle

The inside warning chime sounds continu- ously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

The Intelligent Key is in the In- telligent Key port.

Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port.

When closing the door after getting out of the vehicle

The NO KEY warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds 3 times and the inside warning chime sounds for approxi- mately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

Push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

The SHIFT P warning appears on the display and the outside chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift lever is not in the position.

Move the shift lever to the posi- tion and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

When closing the door with the inside lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds and all the doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle request switch to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately 2 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.

The door handle request switch is pushed before the door is closed.

Push the door handle request switch after the door is closed.

When closing the trunk lid The outside chime sounds for approximately 10 seconds and the trunk lid opens.

The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk.

Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPENING THE HOOD 1. Pull the hood lock release handle

located below the instrument panel. The hood will then spring up slightly.

2. Pull the lever at the front of the hood with your fingertips and raise the hood.

3. Grasp the insulated part of the stay and release it from the hook, then securely insert it into the hood hole .

WARNING If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, do not open the hood. Doing so could cause injury.

HOOD

CAUTION . Do not insert hands, clothing,

tools or other items into the engine compartment while the engine is running.

. Do not touch the exhaust system parts, radiator or other hot parts until the engine and the parts have cooled.

NOTICE Do not open the hood while the wiper arms are lifted away from the windshield. The hood and wipers will be damaged.

CLOSING THE HOOD 1. While supporting the hood, store the

stay to the original position. 2. Slowly lower the hood. When it is at a

height of 1 ft (30 cm) or higher, drop the hood and make sure that both sides of the hood securely lock in place.

WARNING . Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to open and result in an

accident. . Be sure to check that the hood is

securely closed before driving. If both sides of the hood are not locked in place, the hood may open during driving, possibly causing an accident.

CAUTION When closing the hood, lower it slowly so that hands or other items do not get caught.

NOTE: Because the hood of this vehicle re- quires more force to close than that for other vehicles, the hood will be difficult to close if you lower it all the way and then attempt to press it closed. Be sure to drop the hood from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm) and be sure that both sides securely lock in place.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING . Do not drive with the trunk lid

open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. ( Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) page 5-3)

. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk closed, when not in use, and prevent childrens access to In- telligent Keys. TRUNK OPEN REQUEST SWITCH

The trunk lid can be opened by pushing the trunk open request switch when the Intelligent Key is within the operating range of the trunk lock/unlock function regardless of the inside lock knob posi- tion. ( Intelligent Key system page 3- 8)

TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH Press the trunk lid release switch to unlock the trunk.

TRUNK

TRUNK RELEASE POWER CANCEL SWITCH When the switch located inside the glove box is in the OFF position , the power to the trunk lid will be canceled and the trunk lid cannot be opened by the trunk lid release switch, the trunk open request switch or the TRUNK button on the Intelligent Key. When you have to leave the vehicle with a valet and want to keep your belongings safe in the glove box and the trunk, push this switch to OFF and lock the glove box with the mechanical key. Then leave the vehicle and the Intelligent Key with the

valet and keep the mechanical key with you. ( Valet hand-off page 3-3) To connect the power to the trunk lid, push the switch to the ON position .

Except for carbon trunk lid models

For carbon trunk lid models

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPENING AND CLOSING THE TRUNK When opening the trunk, first unlock it then lift up the trunk lid so that it is fully open. When closing the trunk, lower the trunk lid and press it until it is securely locked in place. The strap (except for carbon trunk lid models) or the handle (for carbon trunk lid models) can be used when the trunk lid is dirty.

NOTICE . Open and close the trunk without

grasping the rear spoiler. Grasp- ing the rear spoiler to open or close the trunk may damage the spoiler.

. Do not leave the key inside the trunk.

NOTE: . To prevent the Intelligent Key from

being accidentally locked in the trunk , lockout protect ion is equipped with the Intelligent Key system. When the trunk lid is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will sound

and the trunk will open. . The trunk of this vehicle is slightly

more difficult to close than an or- dinary vehicle (particularly when the vehicle is new). This is because the trunk rigidity has been increased to handle the high load on the rear spoiler during vehicle operation. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction. Check that the trunk is securely locked.

EMERGENCY TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the trunk lid securely latched, when not in use, and pre- vent childrens access to Intelligent Keys.

The emergency trunk lid release mechan-

ism allows opening of the trunk lid in the event that people become locked inside the trunk or in the event of the loss of electrical power such as a discharged battery.

Inside the trunk To open the trunk lid from the inside, pull the release handle until the lock releases and push up on the trunk lid. The release lever is made of a material that glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ambient light. The handle is located on the back of the trunk lid as illustrated.

From the passenger compart- ment The trunk can be opened with the emer- gency trunk lid opener located on the floor in front of the passengers seat. 1. Remove the board located on the

floor in front of the passengers seat.

2. Insert the mechanical key into the emergency trunk lid opener and turn it clockwise until it stops.

NOTE: Because the trunk rigidity has been increased to handle the high load on the rear spoiler during vehicle opera- tion, more force is required to operate the mechanical key (particularly when the vehicle is new). Be sure to turn the key clockwise until it stops.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The fuel-filler door is located on the right and rear side of the vehicle.

WARNING . Gasoline is extremely flammable

and highly explosive under cer- tain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.

. Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Contin- ued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.

. Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replace- ment. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunc- tion and possible injury. It could also cause the malfunction indi- cator light to come on.

. Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your

vehicle. . Do not fill a portable fuel contain-

er in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel contain- ers: Always place the container on

the ground when filling. Do not use electronic devices

when filling. Keep the pump nozzle in con-

tact with the container while you are filling it.

Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.

NOTICE . If fuel is spilled on the vehicle

body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

. Insert the cap straight into the fuel-filler tube, then tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks. Failure to

tighten the fuel-filler cap properly may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. If the light illuminates be- cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install the cap and continue to drive the vehicle. The light should turn off after a few driving trips. If the

light does not turn off after a few driving trips, it is recom- mended you have the vehicle inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

( Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) page 2-32)

. This vehicle includes a system that can supply fuel even during high-G (gravity) turns. The fuel tank pressure is higher when the vehicle is hot. If the vehicle is refueled when the vehicle is hot, the fuel pump may automatically shut off before the tank is full. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction.

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR 1. Unlock the fuel-filler door by using one

of the following operations. . Push the door handle request

switch with the Intelligent Key car- ried with you.

. Push the UNLOCK button on the Intelligent Key.

. Push the power door lock switch to the UNLOCK position.

2. Press the rear side of the fuel-filler door to release the door lock, and open the door.

3. Turn the cap slowly counterclock- wise to remove it. During refueling, place the cap on the inside of the door .

CLOSING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR 1. Turn the cap clockwise until a single

click sound is heard. 2. Close the door. Lock the fuel-filler

door by using one of the following operations.

. Push the door handle request switch with the Intelligent Key carried with you.

. Push the LOCK button on the Intelli-

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

gent Key. . Push the power door lock switch to

the LOCK position.

NOTE: After a single click is heard and the cap is released it may move slightly. This is not a malfunction.

WARNING . Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving. You could lose con- trol of your vehicle and cause an accident.

. Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is neces- sary for proper steering opera- tion and comfort. The drivers air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning for- ward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive ser- ious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.

TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING COL- UMN

Tilt adjustment This adjusts up/down the position of the steering wheel. 1. Press lever down . 2. Move the steering wheel up/down

and stop it in an appropriate position. 3. Lift up lever to lock the steering

wheel in position .

STEERING WHEEL

Telescopic adjustment This adjusts the forward/backward posi- tion of the steering wheel. 1. Press lever down . 2. Move the steering wheel forward/

backward and stop it in an appro- priate position.

3. Lift up lever to lock the steering wheel in position .

Lower the sun visor to block sunlight coming from the forward direction. To block sunlight coming from the side, lower the sun visor, then unclip it from the hook and move it to the side.

INSIDE MIRROR The inside mirror is designed so that it automatically changes reflection accord- ing to the intensity of the headlights of the following vehicle. The anti-glare system will be automati- cally turned on when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. When the anti-glare system is turned on, the indicator light will illuminate and excessive glare from the headlights of the vehicle behind you will be reduced. Push the * switch to make the inside rearview mirror operate normally. The indicator light will turn off. Push the I Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

SUN VISORS MIRRORS

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

switch to turn the system on.

NOTICE Do not allow any object to cover the sensors or apply glass cleaner on them. Doing so will reduce the sensi- tivity of the sensor, resulting in im- proper operation.

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.

The outside mirror will operate only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Adjusting the outside mirrors 1. Turn the switch right or left to select

the right or left side mirror . 2. Operate the control switch to adjust

the mirror angle.

WARNING Adjust the mirrors before starting to drive. Adjusting the mirrors during driving is dangerous as it reduces the drivers attention to the forward direction.

Folding the outside mirrors Push the switch down to fold the outside mirrors. Push the switch up to unfold the mirrors before driving.

CAUTION . Do not touch the mirrors while

they are moving. Your hand may be pinched, and the mirror may malfunction.

. Do not drive with the mirrors stored. You will be unable to see

behind the vehicle. . If the mirrors were folded or

unfolded by hand, there is a chance that the mirror will move forward or backward during driv- ing. If the mirrors were folded or unfolded by hand, be sure to adjust them again electrically be- fore driving.

NOTE: . If the switch is operated continu-

ously, the mirror may stop before movement is completed. This does not indicate that there is a malfunc- tion. Wait a few moments, then operate the switch again.

. If the mirrors were folded or un- folded by hand, the mirrors may start moving when the ignition switch is set to the ACC or ON position.

. When the ignition switch is in the ON position, operating the rear window defroster will also remove frost and fog from the outside mirrors. ( Rear window defroster switch page 2-52)

VANITY MIRROR To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the sun visor and pull up the cover.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMO

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Multi Function Display Owners Manual .................... 4-2 RearView Monitor ........................................................................ 4-2

RearView Monitor system operation .................... 4-3 How to read the displayed lines ............................... 4-3 Difference between predictive and actual distances ..................................................................... 4-3 How to park with predictive course lines ......... 4-5 Adjusting the screen .......................................................... 4-6 How to turn on and off predictive course lines ................................................................................ 4-7 Sonar indicator ....................................................................... 4-7 RearView Monitor system limitations ................... 4-7 System Maintenance ......................................................... 4-8

Ventilators ........................................................................................ 4-9 Center ventilators .............................................................. 4-9 Side ventilators .................................................................... 4-9

Heater and air conditioner ............................................... 4-10 Automatic air conditioner ........................................ 4-11 Operating tips .................................................................... 4-13 In-cabin microfilter ......................................................... 4-13 Servicing air conditioner ............................................ 4-14

Antenna ........................................................................................... 4-14 Window antenna ............................................................ 4-14 Satellite antenna .............................................................. 4-15

Car phone or CB radio ........................................................ 4-15

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Refer to the separate Multi Function Dis- play Owners Manual that includes the following information. . Multi function display system . Settings . Audio system . Bluetooth Hands-Free Phone System . NissanConnect Services powered by

SiriusXM . SiriusXM Travel Link . SiriusXM TrafficTM

. Apple CarPlay

. Navigation

. Voice recognition

. Multi function meter

WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could re- sult in serious injury or death.

. The RearView Monitor is a conve- nience but it is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows, and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

. The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid dama- ging the vehicle.

. The distance guide line and the vehicle width line should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved sur- face. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati- cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is placed in the position. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.

MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY OWNERS MANUAL REARVIEW MONITOR

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just above the vehicles license plate.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OP- ERATION With the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion, move the shift lever to the position to operate the RearView Monitor.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with reference to the bumper line are displayed on the monitor. Distance guide lines: Indicate distances from the bumper. . Red line : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) . Yellow line : approx. 3 ft (1 m) . Green line : approx. 7 ft (2 m) Vehicle width guide lines : Indicates the approximate vehicle width.

Predictive course lines : Indicate the predictive course when back- ing up. The predictive course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the position and the steering wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the neutral position. The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predictive course lines are wider than the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDIC- TIVE AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The displayed guide lines and their loca- tions on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or down- hill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guide lines (refer to illustra- tions). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-3

4-4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

Backing up on a steep uphill When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown further than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting ob- ject The predictive course lines do not touch the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.

Backing up behind a projecting object The position is shown further than the position in the display. However, the position is actually at the same dis- tance as the position . The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to the

position if the object projects over the actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE COURSE LINES

WARNING . If the tires are replaced with

different sized tires, the predic- tive course line may not be dis- played correctly.

. On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predictive course line and the actual course line.

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is dis- played on the screen when the shift lever is moved to the position.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-5

4-6 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the pre- dictive course lines enter the park- ing space .

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines parallel to the parking space while referring

to the predictive course lines. 5. When the vehicle is parked in the

space completely, move the shift lever in an appropriate gear and apply the parking brake.

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN 1. While on a RearView Monitor screen,

touch the touch screen display. The Camera Settings screen will come up.

2. Touch the Display Settings key. 3. Touch the Brightness, Contrast,

Tint, Color or Black Level key. 4. Adjust the item by touching the + or

key on the touch screen display.

NOTE: Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the park- ing brake is firmly applied.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF PRE- DICTIVE COURSE LINES If the RearView Monitor is in operation and the rear view is displayed, turn on and off the predictive course line setting according to the following procedure. 1. Touch the touch screen display. 2. Touch the Predictive Course Lines

key to turn the feature on or off.

If the RearView Monitor is not in opera- tion, change the setting according to the following procedure. 1. Touch the Settings key on the

Launch Bar on the touch screen display.

2. Touch the Camera key. 3. Touch the Predictive Course Lines

key. The indicator illuminates when the item is turned on.

SONAR INDICATOR The sonar indicator will appear in the RearView Monitor display. ( Sonar system page 5-48)

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIM- ITATIONS

WARNING Listed below are the system limita- tions for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.

. The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object.

. Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper can- not be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show ob- jects close to the bumper or on the ground.

. Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual dis- tance because a wide-angle lens

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-7

4-8 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

is used. . Objects in the RearView Monitor

will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.

. Use the displayed lines as a re- ference. The lines are highly af- fec ted by the number o f occupants, fuel level, vehicle po- sition, road conditions and road grade.

. Make sure that the trunk lid is securely closed when backing up.

. Do not put anything on the rear- view camera. The rearview cam- era is installed above the license plate.

. When washing the vehicle with high-pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water con- densation on the lens, a malfunc- tion, fire or an electric shock.

. Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause da- mage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunc- tion: . When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects.

. When strong light is directly coming on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.

. Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.

. The screen may flicker under fluores- cent light.

. The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.

. Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.

. There may be a delay when switching to the RearView Monitor screen.

. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.

. Do not use wax on the camera win- dow. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with mild detergent diluted with water.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION . Do not use alcohol, benzine or

thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth dampened with diluted mild cleaning agent and then wipe with a dry cloth.

. Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera , the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

CENTER VENTILATORS Adjust the air flow direction of the venti- lators by moving the center knob (up/ down, left/right) until the desired position is achieved.

SIDE VENTILATORS Turning the center knob clockwise or counterclockwise will close or open the ventilators. Adjust the air flow direction by moving the ventilators until the desired position is achieved.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-9

VENTILATORS

4-10 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

WARNING . The air conditioner cooling func-

tion operates only when the en- gine is running.

. Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. On hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high en- ough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

. Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the heater and air conditioner system.

NOTE: . Odors from inside and outside the

vehicle can build up in the air condi- tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas- senger compartment through the vents.

. When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air

recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

1. front defroster button 2. Temperature control dial (drivers side)/

AUTO (automatic) button 3. Display screen 4. Temperature control dial (passengers

side)/DUAL zone control button 5. outside air circulation button 6. rear window defroster button

( Rear window defroster switch page 2-52)

7. ONOFF button 8. fan speed control button 9. MODE (manual air flow control) button 10. A/C (air conditioner) button 11. air recirculation button

AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER

Automatic operation Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO): This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribu- tion and fan speed are also controlled automatically. 1. Push the AUTO button on. (The in-

dicator light on the button will illumi- nate.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial on the drivers side to the left or right to

set the desired temperature. . The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

. A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid con- ditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunc- tion.

3. You can individually set drivers and front passengers side temperature using each temperature control dial. When the DUAL zone control button is pushed or the passengers side tem- perature control dial is turned, the indicator light on the DUAL zone control button will come on. To turn off the passengers side temperature control, push the DUAL zone control button.

Heating (A/C OFF): The air conditioner does not activate in this mode. Only use this mode when you need to heat the vehicle. 1. Push the AUTO button on. (The in-

dicator light on the button will illumi- nate.)

2. If the indicator light on the A/C button

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-11

4-12 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

is turned on, push the A/C button. (The indicator light will turn off.)

3. Turn the temperature control dial on the drivers side to set the desired temperature. . The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.

. Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature or the system may not work properly.

. Not recommended if windows fog up.

4. You can individually set drivers and front passengers side temperature using each temperature control dial. When the DUAL zone control button is pushed or passengers side tempera- ture control dial is turned, the DUAL indicator light will come on. To turn off the passengers side temperature control, push the DUAL zone control button.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging: 1. Push the front defroster button

on. (The indicator light on the button will come on.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial on

the drivers side to set the desired temperature. . To quickly remove ice from the

outside of the windows, use the fan speed control button to set

the fan speed to maximum. . As soon as possible after the wind-

shield is clean, push the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode.

When the front defroster button is pushed, the air conditioner will automati- cally be turned on at outside tempera- tures above 36F (2C) to defrost the windshield, and the air recirculation mode will automatically be turned off. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart- ment to improve the defrosting perfor- mance.

Manual operation Fan speed control: Push the fan speed control button to manually control the fan speed. Push the AUTO button to return to automatic control of the fan speed.

Air intake control: . Push the air recirculation button

to recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator light on the

button will come on. . Push the outside air circulation

button to draw outside air into the passenger compartment. The in- dicator light on the button will come on.

. To switch to automatic control mode, push and hold the air recirculation button or the outside air circula- tion button (whichever one with an indicator light illuminated) for about 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air recirculation and outside air circula- tion buttons) will flash twice, and then the air intake will be controlled auto- matically.

Air flow control: Push the MODE button repeatedly to change the air flow mode.

: Air flows from the center and side ventilators.

: Air flows from the center and side ventilators and the foot outlets.

: Air flows mainly from the foot outlets. : Air flows from the defroster and foot

outlets.

Turning the system on/off Push the ONOFF button.

OPERATING TIPS When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the

air flow from the foot outlets may not operate. However, this is not a malfunc- tion. After the coolant temperature warms up, the air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally. The sensors and located on the instrument panel help maintain a con- stant temperature. Do not put anything on or around the sensors.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER The air conditioning system is equipped with an in-cabin microfilter which collects dirt, dust, etc. To make sure the air conditioner heats, defogs, and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter in accordance with the maintenance schedule in the 9. Maintenance and schedules section of this manual. It is recommended to see a NISSAN dealer or GT-R certified NISSAN dealer to replace the filter. The filter should be replaced if air flow is extremely decreased or when win- dows fog up easily when operating heater or air conditioning system.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-13

4-14 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER The air conditioning system in your NISSAN is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant will not harm the earths ozone layer. However, special charging equipment and lubricant are required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to y ou r a i r c o nd i t i o n i n g s y s t em . ( Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants page 10-2) Your NISSAN dealer or GT-R certified NISSAN dealer will be able to service your environmentally friendly air conditioning system.

WARNING The system contains refrigerant un- der high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experi- enced technician with the proper equipment.

WINDOW ANTENNA The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear window.

CAUTION . Do not place metalized film near

the rear window glass or attach any metal parts to it. This may cause poor reception or noise.

. When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear win- dow antenna. Lightly wipe along the antenna with a dampened

soft cloth.

ANTENNA

SATELLITE ANTENNA The satellite antenna is located on the rear part of the vehicle roof.

CAUTION . A build up of ice on the satellite

antenna can affect radio perfor- mance. Remove the ice to restore radio reception.

. When removing snow from the roof, do not apply strong force to the satellite antenna. That may cause broken satellite antenna and roof panel dent.

. When using a high pressure car wash, keep the high pressure nozzle away from the satellite antenna. The seal may be de- formed or damaged.

. The radio performance may be affected if cargo carried on the roof blocks the radio signal. If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite antenna.

When installing a car phone or a CB radio in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following cautions, otherwise the new equipment may adversely affect the elec- tronic control modules and electronic control system harness.

WARNING . A cellular phone should not be

used for any purpose while driv- ing so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some juris- dictions prohibit the use of cellu- lar phones while driving.

. If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands- free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full atten- tion may be given to vehicle operation.

. If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems 4-15

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

4-16 Display screen, heater, air conditioner and audio systems

CAUTION . Keep the antenna as far away as

possible from the electronic con- trol modules.

. Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system har- ness. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.

. Adjust the antenna standing- wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.

. Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.

. For details, it is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer or GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ..................... 5-3 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ............................... 5-3 Three-way catalyst .............................................................. 5-3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .......... 5-4 Avoiding collision and rollover ................................... 5-7 Off-road recovery ................................................................. 5-8 Rapid air pressure loss ..................................................... 5-8 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ....................... 5-9 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) driving safety precautions ............................................................... 5-9

Push-button ignition switch ............................................ 5-10 Operating range for engine start ......................... 5-10 Ignition switch operation ............................................ 5-11 Ignition switch positions .............................................. 5-11 Emergency engine shut off ....................................... 5-12 Intelligent Key battery discharge .......................... 5-12

Before starting the engine ................................................ 5-13 Starting the engine ................................................................. 5-14 Driving the vehicle ................................................................... 5-15

Dual clutch transmission ............................................. 5-15 Driving tips .............................................................................. 5-21

VDC, transmission and suspension setup switches ............................................................................ 5-25

Usage of each mode ....................................................... 5-25 How to switch the modes .......................................... 5-26

Features of each mode .............................................. 5-28 Turbocharger system ........................................................... 5-32 R mode start function ......................................................... 5-33

How to use R mode start function ................... 5-34 Parking brake .............................................................................. 5-34 Cruise control ............................................................................. 5-35

Precautions on cruise control ............................... 5-36 Steering-wheel-mounted controls .................... 5-36 Indicators and display ................................................. 5-37 Cruise control operations ......................................... 5-37

Hill Start Assist System ....................................................... 5-39 Break-in schedule .................................................................... 5-40

Wheel alignment .............................................................. 5-40 Fuel Efficient Driving Tips .................................................. 5-41 Increasing fuel economy ................................................... 5-42 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) ............................................................ 5-43

AWD warning light .......................................................... 5-43 Tight corner braking phenomenon .................. 5-44 Tires ............................................................................................ 5-44 AWD system characteristics ................................... 5-45

Limited Slip Differential (LSD) ......................................... 5-45 Parking/parking on hills ..................................................... 5-46 Sonar system .............................................................................. 5-48

Sonar indicator .................................................................. 5-49 Sonar system OFF switch ......................................... 5-50

Sonar system setting ..................................................... 5-50 Power steering ........................................................................... 5-51 Brake system ............................................................................... 5-52

Braking precautions ........................................................ 5-52 Parking brake break-in .................................................. 5-52

Brake assist ................................................................................... 5-53 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .............................. 5-53

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .................. 5-54 Cold weather driving ............................................................. 5-57

Freeing a frozen door lock ......................................... 5-57 Anti-freeze ............................................................................... 5-57 Battery ........................................................................................ 5-57

Draining of coolant water ........................................ 5-57 Tire equipment .................................................................. 5-57 Special winter equipment ........................................ 5-57 Driving on snow or ice ................................................ 5-57 Engine block heater (if so equipped) .............. 5-58

Exhaust sound control system (if so equipped) ................................................................................ 5-59 Active noise cancellation (if so equipped)/ Active sound enhancement (if so equipped) .... 5-59

Active noise cancellation .......................................... 5-60 Active sound enhancement .................................... 5-60

WARNING . Do not leave children or adults

who would normally require the support of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be left alone either. They could acciden- tally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.

. Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seat- back and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent childrens access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING . Do not breathe exhaust gases;

they contain colorless and odor- less carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

. If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected imme- diately.

. Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.

. Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.

. Keep the trunk lid closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passen- ger compartment. If you must drive with the trunk lid open, follow these precautions: a. Open all the windows. b. Set the air recirculation to

off and the fan control to high to circulate the air.

. The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a quali- fied mechanic whenever: The vehicle is raised for ser-

vice. You suspect that exhaust

fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.

You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.

You have had an accident involving damage to the ex- haust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING . The exhaust gas and the exhaust

system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.

Starting and driving 5-3

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

5-4 Starting and driving

. Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

NOTICE . Do not use leaded gasoline. De-

posits from leaded gasoline ser- iously reduce the three-way catalysts ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

. Keep your engine tuned up. Mal- functions in the ignition, fuel in- jection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if notice- able loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. It is recommended you have the vehicle inspected promptly by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.

. Do not race the engine while warming it up.

. Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) Each tire should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter- mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illumi- nates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicles handling and stopping abil- ity. If the vehicle is being driven with one or more flat tires, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate continuously and a chime will sound for 10 seconds. The chime will only sound at the first indication of a flat tire, and the warning light will illuminate continuously. When the flat tire warning is activated, it is recommended you have the system reset and the tire checked and replaced if necessary by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Even if the tire is inflated to the specified COLD tire pressure, the warning light will continue to illuminate until the system is reset. Your vehicle can be driven for a limited time on a flat tire. ( Run- flat tires page 8-37) Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the drivers responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating prop- erly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure tell-

tale. When the system detects a malfunc- tion, the telltale will flash for approxi- mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al- ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.

Additional information . The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).

. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended

pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.

. The TIRE LOW PRESSURE - VISIT DEALER warning appears in the vehi- cle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illumi- nated and low tire pressure is de- tected. The TIRE LOW PRESSURE - VISIT DEALER warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off. The TIRE LOW PRESSURE - VISIT DEALER warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illumi- nated. The TIRE LOW PRESSURE - VISIT DEALER warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal- function.

. The FLAT TIRE - VISIT DEALER warn- ing appears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and one or more flat tires are detected.

. Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicles operation and the outside tempera- ture. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside tem- perature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. Altitude can also affect tire pressure. These may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires.

. GT-R vehicles are delivered from the factory with nitrogen-filled tires. For best performance, NISSAN recom- mends that GT-R owners maintain their vehicles by using nitrogen for tire inflation. Because nitrogen is more stable than compressed air, it is less prone to pressure fluctuation result- ing from temperature variations. If nitrogen is not available, compressed air may be safely used under normal driving conditions. However, NISSAN recommends refilling with Nitrogen for maximum tire performance.

. The Tire and Loading Information label (also referred to as the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label) is located in the drivers door opening.

Starting and driving 5-5

5-6 Starting and driving

. You can also check the pressure of all tires on the touch screen display. Refer to the separate Multi Function Display Owners Manual.

. The tire pressure sensor should be reset anytime the wheels or tires are removed or replaced.

. If the tire is removed in order to replace the tire pressure sensor bat- tery, it may not be possible to reuse the removed tire from the wheel. To replace the tire pressure sensor bat- tery, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

WARNING . If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneu- vers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- ing with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in ser- ious personal injury. Check the

tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat ( Run-flat tires page 6-4) or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended you have the vehicle checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. Although you can continue driv- ing with a punctured run-flat tire, remember that vehicle handling stability is reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving a long dis- tance at high speeds may da- mage the tires.

. Do not drive at speeds above 50 MPH (80 km/h) and do not drive more than 50miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat tire. The actual distance the vehicle can be driven on a flat tire depends on outside temperature, vehicle load, road

conditions and other factors. . When a wheel is replaced, the

TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. It is recommended you contact your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer as soon as possi- ble for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

NOTICE . The TPMS may not function prop-

er ly when the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the wheels are buried in snow.

. The TPMS may not function prop- erly if the TPMS sensor is not reset and when wheels/tires from

another GT-R are installed on your vehicle.

. The TPMS will not function prop- erly if non-GT-R wheels are in- stalled on the vehicle.

. Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem- porarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. Some exam- ples are: . Facilities or electric devices using

similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.

. If a transmitter set to similar frequen- cies is being used in or near the vehicle.

. If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.

Low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases.

. If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and tire without TPMS.

. If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID has not been registered.

. If the wheel is not originally specified by NISSAN.

FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired op- eration. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Ca- nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLL- OVER

WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid exces- sive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with any vehicle, a loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects, or cause the vehicle to roll- over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in this manual, and also instruct your passen- gers to do so. ( Seat belts page 1-6) Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted

Starting and driving 5-7

5-8 Starting and driving

person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic. 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. 2. Do not apply the brakes. 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while the vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all

tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane. . If you decide that it is not safe to

return the vehicle to the road sur- face based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS Rapid air pressure loss or a blow-out can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires. Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds. Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspect the tires for wear and damage. ( Wheels and tires page 8- 29) If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or blows-out while driving maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the con- ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

WARNING The following actions can increase the chance of losing control of the vehicle if there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure. Losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury.

. The vehicle generally moves or pulls in the direction of the flat tire.

. Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

. Do not rapidly release the accel- erator pedal.

. Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact. 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gra-

dually stop the vehicle. 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers

and contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING

WARNING Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alco- hol can increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of

alcohol. Remember, drinking and driving dont mix! And that is true for drugs, too (over- the-counter, prescription, and illegal drugs). Dont drive if your ability to oper- ate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

WARNING . Do not drive beyond the perfor-

mance capability of the tires, even with AWD engaged. Acceler- ating quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or sudden braking may cause loss of control.

. Always use the specified tires on all four wheels. Install tire chains on the rear wheels when driving on slippery roads and drive care- fully.

. This vehicle is not designed for offroad (rough road) use. Do not drive on sandy or muddy roads that tires may get stuck in.

. Do not attempt to raise two wheels off the ground and shift

the transmission to any or position with the engine run-

ning. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

. Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer, (such as the dy- namometers used by some states for emissions testing), or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynam- ometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drive- train damage or unexpected ve- hicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

. When a wheel is off the ground due to an unlevel surface, do not spin the wheel excessively.

Starting and driving 5-9

5-10 Starting and driving

WARNING Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the ve- hicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed three consecutive times or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.

Before operating the push-button igni- tion switch, be sure to move the shift lever to the position. OPERATING RANGE FOR ENGINE

START The operating range for starting the engine inside the vehicle is shown in the illustration. . If the Intelligent Key is on the instru-

ment panel, rear parcel shelf, inside the glove box, door pocket, cup holders or console box, or the corner of the passenger compartment, it may not be possible to start the engine. Carry the Intelligent-Key and try to start the engine again.

. If the Intelligent Key is near the door or door glass outside the vehicle, it may

be possible to start the engine.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

IGNITION SWITCH OPERATION When the Intelligent Key is carried with you and the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change as follows: . Push center once to change to ACC. . Push center two times to change to

ON. . Push center three times to change to

OFF. (No position illuminates.) . Push center four times to return to

ACC.

. Open or close any door to return to LOCK during the OFF position.

IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position) The ignition switch can only be locked in this position. The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ACC position while carrying the Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted in the port.

ACC (Accessories) This position activates electrical acces- sories such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position) This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories.

OFF The engine can be turned off without locking the steering wheel. The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition switch cannot be switched to the LOCK position until the shift lever is moved to the position.

NOTE: . If the steering lock release malfunc-

tion indicator appears on the vehicle information display when the igni- tion switch is pressed, press the ignition switch again while gently turning the steering wheel left and right. ( Steering lock release malfunction indicator page 2-47)

. If the shift warning appears on the vehicle information display when the ignition switch is pushed, the shift lever is in any position except the position. Move the shift lever to the position. ( Shift P warning page 2-46)

. If the Intelligent Key battery dis- charge indicator appears on the vehicle information display, the In- telligent Key battery is discharged and the ignition switch will not operate. Insert the Intelligent Key into the key port to operate the ignition switch. ( Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator page 2- 48)

. When all of the following conditions are met for 60 minutes, the battery saver system will cut off the power supply to prevent battery discharge. The ignition switch is in the ACC

Starting and driving 5-11

5-12 Starting and driving

position, and All doors are closed, and The shift lever is in the position.

. Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position when the engine is not running for an extended period of time. This can discharge the battery.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the fol- lowing procedure: . Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch 3 consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

. Push and hold the push button igni- tion switch for more than 2 seconds.

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY DIS- CHARGE If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost discharged, the guide light of the Intelligent Key port blinks and the indicator appears on the vehicle informa- tion display. ( Intelligent Key insertion indicator page 2-47) In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the port allows you to start the engine. Make sure that the mechanical key side faces backward as illustrated. Insert the Intelligent Key in the port until it is latched and secured. To remove the Intelligent Key from the

port, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and pull the Intelligent Key out of the port.

NOTICE Never place anything except the Intelligent Key in the Intelligent Key port. Doing so may cause damage to the equipment.

NOTE: . Make sure the Intelligent Key is in

the correct direction when inserting it into the Intelligent Key port. The engine may not start if it is in the incorrect direction.

. Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelligent Key port after the ignition switch is pushed to the OFF position.

. The Intelligent Key port does not charge the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the low battery indicator in the vehicle information display, re- place the battery as soon as possi- ble. ( Intelligent Key battery

replacement page 8-25) . Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.

. Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid and window washer fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.

. Check that all windows and lights are clean.

. Visually inspect tires for their appear- ance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.

. Lock all doors.

. Position seat.

. Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

. Fasten seat belts and ask all passen- gers to do likewise.

. Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. ( Warning lights, indicator lights and audible remin- ders page 2-26)

Starting and driving 5-13

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-14 Starting and driving

NOTE: . This vehicle includes spark plugs

that are designed for maximum performance. If the start time be- comes longer, the plugs may be fouled, making the engine difficult to start. If this occurs, start the engine using the procedure de- scribed in this section.

. A click sound may be heard when the brake pedal is depressed and released. This is normal.

. A low rattling operating sound may occur when the engine is started or stopped. This is because of the transmission gear design, light fly- wheel and dry sump lubrication system used in this transmission. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction. This sound is likely to occur in particular if the engine is stopped when the temperature of the transmission oil is high.

1. Check the positions of the accelerator pedal and brake pedal . Adjust the steering wheel and seat positions so that the correct driving posture is achieved. ( Front seats page 1-3)

2. Check that the parking brake is en- gaged.

3. Check that the shift lever is in the or position. ( is recommended.)

4. Firmly depress the brake pedal. With- out depressing the accelerator pedal, push the ignition switch once to start the engine.

5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever to the position, and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.

NOTE: . Care should be taken to avoid situa-

tions that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no- start conditions such as: a. Installation or extended use of

electronic accessories that con- sume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

b. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short dis- tances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

. If the engine is difficult to start, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to the OFF posi- tion, and then release the accelera- tor pedal. Then perform steps 1 to 5 to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat this procedure.

. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may

STARTING THE ENGINE

make the vehicle more difficult to start. If this occurs, wait for more than 3 minutes, and then push the ignition switch again to start the engine.

. To maintain high performance over a long period of time, the engine speed is limited to 4,300 rpm when the engine is revved with the shift lever in the or position, and to 4,000 rpm when the engine oil or coolant temperature is low or higher than normal.

. If the ignition switch is pushed before the shift lever is moved to the position, the ignition switch will not change to the OFF position. If this occurs, the SHIFT warning display appears on the vehicle in- formation display. When stopping the engine, be sure to move the shift lever to the position and then push the ignition switch. Failure to do so may result in discharge of the battery. ( Shift P warning page 2-46)

. If the shift lever was in the or position when the engine was stopped, then be sure to move the shift lever to the position before starting the engine the next time. If

the engine is started with the shift lever in the position, then it may not be possible to drive the vehicle even when the shift lever is moved to the or position. If this occurs, the SHIFT warning appears on the vehicle information display. ( Shift P warning page 2-46)

CAUTION If the engine was stopped soon when the engine is hot, the cooling fan may operate for approximately 2 minutes after the engine was stopped to cool the components in the engine compartment. When the cooling fan is operating, be sure that hands or other items do not get caught in it.

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION The GT-R dual clutch transmission is a newly-developed system that uses an electronically controlled multiple-disc wet clutch attached to the highly efficient manual transmission. This transmission has two driving modes. . position (Automatic gearshift):

allows automatic shifting of the man- ual transmission.

. position (Manual gearshift): allows quick shifting of the manual transmission.

NOTE: When starting or driving on a steep uphill grade, shift to the position and operate the paddle shifter to shift down to 1st gear similar to a manual transmission vehicle. The GT-R dual clutch transmission was developed specifically to maximize vehi- cle performance and driving enjoyment. The GT-R transmission components were designed using different engineering standards than typical passenger car transmissions. Because of this, the GT-R has different operating characteristics, and various rattle noises may be heard during some driving conditions because

Starting and driving 5-15

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-16 Starting and driving

of the following items: . Gear clearances . Ultralight flywheel . Dry sump lubrication These noises do not indicate that there is a malfunction.

WARNING . Do not depress the accelerator

pedal while shifting from the or position to the or

position. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is com- pleted. Failure to do so could cause loss of control and an accident.

. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.

. Never shift to either the or position while the vehicle is mov- ing forward and or posi- tion while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.

. The shift lever contains a power- ful magnet. Do not place electro-

nic medical devices or other electronic products that are sus- ceptible to magnetic force close to the shift lever.

. Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

. If the shift lever is moved from to position, or to position before the vehicle stops, you may not be able to shift gear or it may take longer to shift gear. Make sure to depress the brake pedal and check that the vehicle has stopped before shifting.

CAUTION . Because the vehicle includes a

dual clutch transmission that automatically controls the clutch and shifting operation of the manual transmission, whenever the shift lever is in a position other than or , the vehicle will begin to move slowly, in the same way as when the clutch in a manual transmission vehicle is partially engaged. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when the

vehicle is stopped. In some cir- cumstances the vehicle may not start moving on its own, however this does not indicate that there is a malfunction.

NOTICE . To avoid possible damage to your

vehicle; when stopping the vehi- cle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle in place by depressing the accelerator pedal. Doing so may cause the clutch to overheat and result in transmission da- mage. Use the brakes to prevent the vehicle from moving.

. The GT-R dual clutch transmis- sion is provided with a dry sump lubrication system that improves efficiency and ensures reliability under high g-force conditions. When oil viscosity is high at low temperatures, it takes longer for all components to be sufficiently lubricated. Thus, when the trans- mission temperature is low (ap- proximately 104F (40C), do not accelerate rapidly or run the en- gine faster than 4,000 rpm.

Operating the shift lever After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever from the position to the , , or position. Push the button to shift into the or position. All other positions can be selected without pushing the button.

Shift lever operation Push the button while depressing the brake pedal.

Push the button.

Just move the shift lever.

Automatically returns.

position: Use this position for parking and starting the engine. The ignition switch will be changed to the OFF or LOCK position.

CAUTION Use the position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.

position: Use this position for driving in reverse. A chime will sound inside the vehicle and a warning will appear in the vehicle infor- mation display if the shift lever is in the position for more than 5 minutes, or when the drivers door is opened while the shift lever is in the position.

position: Neither forward nor reverse gear is en- gaged.

position: Use this position for all normal forward driving. The shift lever can be moved between and to alternately change each other. The position indicator indi- cates the gear position with the indica- tion of A or M. . position: Use this position for ordin-

ary driving, with the gears shifted automatically from first gear to sixth gear according to the speed and driving conditions.

. position: Operate the paddle shifter to drive in first gear to sixth gear as desired.

. The position indicator blinks if it is not p o s s i b l e t o s h i f t t h e g e a r . ( Transmission position indicator page 2-10)

Starting and driving 5-17

5-18 Starting and driving

CAUTION . Grip the shift lever correctly when

operating it. Failure to do so may cause a finger or other items to be trapped between the lever and gate, possibly causing an acci- dent.

. Because rolling resistance is re- duced in the GT-R, the vehicle can move when on a road with a slight gradient, even when in the

position. Be sure to depress the brake pedal.

NOTICE . Be sure to observe the following

precautions. Failure to do so may result in shift lever malfunction. Do not spill water, beverages

or other liquids on the shift lever.

Do not allow sand or similar substances to contact the shift lever.

. Develop the habit of performing the operations marked with without pressing the button. If the button is pressed at these times, there is the possibility that the lever could accidentally enter the or positions.

. When the vehicle is hot, the area around the shift lever may be hot or may produce an unusual sound, however this does not indicate that there is a malfunc- tion.

. Avoid depressing the brake and accelerator pedals at the same time. Depressing both pedals at the same time could cause the clutch to overheat and accelerate

deterioration.

NOTE: . When moving the shift lever out of

the position, it may not be possi- ble to move the shift lever if the button is pressed before the brake pedal is depressed. Press the button only after depressing the brake pedal.

. Do not place coins or other small objects in the area around the shift lever. These objects may get stuck in the shift gate and prevent the shift lever from moving into a position. Sometimes, you may not be able to retrieve these objects.

. Immediately after a cold start, while the transmission system check dis- play (T/M SYSTEM CHECK IN PRO- CESS) appears on the vehicle information display, the shift lever cannot be moved out of the position. This is because a check of the transmission system is in pro- gress. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction. Move the shift lever after the message on the vehicle information display turns off.

. The shift lever knob and console-

mounted shift indicator have a gen- uine leather finish that requires proper care and maintenance. ( Cleaning interior page 7-5)

Shift lock release If the battery charge is low or discharged, the shift lever may not be moved from the

position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever button pushed. To move the shift lever, perform the following procedure. 1. Push the ignition switch to the OFF or

LOCK position. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Remove the shift lock cover using a

suitable tool wrapped with a cloth. 4. Push down the shift lock as illustrated.

5. Push the shift lever button and move the shift lever to the position while holding down the shift lock.

Push the ignition switch to the ON posi- tion to unlock the steering wheel. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location. If the battery is discharged completely, the steering wheel cannot be unlocked. Do not move the vehicle with the steering wheel locked.

NOTICE If the shift lever cannot be moved out of the position after perform- ing the shift lock release procedure, it is recommended you immediately have the vehicle inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Adaptive shift control The adaptive shift control system auto- matically operates when the transmission is in the position and selects an appropriate gear depending on the road conditions such as uphill, downhill or curving roads.

Starting and driving 5-19

5-20 Starting and driving

Control on uphill and curving roads: A low gear is maintained that suits the degree of the slope or curve to allow smooth driving with a small number of shifts.

Control on downhill roads: The adaptive shift control system shifts to a low gear that suits the degree of the slope, and uses the engine brake to reduce the number of times that the foot brake must be used.

Control on winding roads: A low gear is maintained on continuous curves that involve repeated acceleration and deceleration, so that smooth accel- eration is available instantly when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

NOTE: Adaptive shift control may not operate when the transmission oil temperature is low immediately after the start of driving or when it is very hot. If this occurs, switch to the position and downshift if necessary.

position Changing to the position: To change to the position from the position, either move the shift lever to the

side or operate the paddle shifter. The position indicator indicates the gear posi- tion with the indication of M. If the paddle shifter is used, in one operation the position changes to the

position and the gear position shifts (except for downshifting from 2nd gear to 1st gear). For the downshift operation from the 2nd gear to the 1st gear, the first paddle shifter operation changes the

position to the position, and the second operation changes the gear posi- tion. To return to the position, either move the shift lever to the side again or pull the right side (up sift side) paddle shifter for approximately 2 seconds. The position indicator indicates the gear position with the indication of A.

Changing gears using paddle shifters:

NOTE: The vehicle cannot be accelerated from a stop condition while the gear is in the 2nd to 6th position. When accelerating the vehicle from a stop condition, use the 1st gear position. To shift up, pull the paddle shifter on the right side toward you. To shift down, pull the paddle shifter on the left side toward you.

. First gear: Use this position when accelerating from a stop, climbing a steep hill slowly or engine braking at low speeds.

. Second gear: Use this position when accelerating or engine braking at mid-low speeds.

. Third gear: Use this position when accelerating or gently engine braking at middle speeds.

. Fourth gear: Use this position when accelerating or gently engine braking at mid-high

speeds. . Fifth gear:

Use this position for all normal for- ward driving at highway speeds. En- gine braking is weaker in this position.

. Sixth gear: Use this position for all normal for- ward driving at highway speeds. En- gine braking is weakest in this position.

Suggested maximum speed in each gear: Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate. Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed (shown below) in any gear. For level road driving, use the highest gear sug- gested for that speed. Always observe posted speed limits, and drive according to the road conditions that will ensure safe operation. Do not over-rev the en- gine when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle control.

Gear MPH (km/h)

1st 36 (58)

2nd 63 (102)

3rd 91 (148)

4th

5th

6th

DRIVING TIPS After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal and push the shift lever button before shifting the shift lever from the position to the , , or position. Be sure the vehicle is fully stopped before attempting to shift the shift lever. The transmission is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from to any other position. The shift lever cannot be moved out of the position and into any other position with the ignition switch other in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

Starting and driving 5-21

5-22 Starting and driving

When accelerating from a stop Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and push the shift lever button to shift into a driving gear as following: . To drive forward, move the shift lever

to the position. . To back up, move the shift lever to the

position.

Starting on level ground or an uphill: 1. Check the shift lever position indicator

on the meter to confirm that the driving gear is selected.

2. Release the parking brake. 3. Release the foot brake pedal gradu-

ally, then slowly depress the accelera- tor pedal to start the vehicle in motion.

( R mode start function page 5-33)

NOTE: . To prevent the clutch from over-

heating when the parking brake is applied, engine output is limited when the accelerator pedal is de- pressed. In particular, the vehicle may not start smoothly when the accelerator pedal is depressed with the parking brake applied on an uphill grade. To enable smooth starting, release the parking brake

before moving the vehicle. . The hill start assist system operates

when the vehicle is accelerating from a stop on an uphill. ( Hill Start Assist System page 5-39)

When driving the vehicle

WARNING Do not move the shift lever to the position while driving. Doing so may result in an accident due to loss of engine braking. It may also damage the transmission.

Normal driving: Drive with the shift lever in the position. The appropriate gear will be automati- cally shifted according to the position of the accelerator pedal, the driving speed and driving conditions.

Passing: . position: Fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear depending on the vehicle speed. Then depress the accel- erator pedal as needed to adjust vehicle

speed. . position: Use the paddle shifter to down shift, then fully depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. Then depress the accelerator pedal as needed to adjust vehicle speed.

Hill climbing: . When the vehicle speed decreases,

depress the accelerator pedal to the floor with the shift lever in the position. This automatically shifts the transmission into a lower gear and maintains this position depending on the gradient of the hill.

. The system may down shift according to the accelerator pedal position and the vehicle speed.

. If the transmission is frequently chan- ging gears while driving, switch to the

position and select the appropriate gear for the driving conditions.

Driving on a downhill: . position: The system shifts down according to the degree of downhills to increase the effec- tiveness of the engine brake. . position: When driving on a long slope, selecting the position and 4th or 3rd gear will

provide gentle engine braking. When driving on a steep downhill, select- ing the position and 2nd or 1st gear will provide powerful engine braking.

WARNING . When the shift lever is in the

position, the adaptive shift con- trol system will stay in a low gear in order to maintain the effective- ness of the engine brake. How- ever if the vehicle is traveling too fast depending on the degree of the slope, you should shift to the

position and use the paddle shifter to shift down. If you con- tinue to use only the foot brake, a high load will be applied to the brake, which may overheat, redu- cing its effectiveness. Be sure to use the engine brake together w i t h t h e f o o t b r a k e . ( Adaptive shift control page 5-19)

. Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.

NOTICE When driving in the position, gear- shifting will be performed automati- cally with the adaptive shift control system ( Adaptive shift control page 5-19) even on road conditions with continuous and sudden hills or curves. However, when the transmis- sion oil temperature is low immedi- ately after starting the vehicle or high when engaging in high perfor- mance driving, there may be some cases where the system cannot con- trol shifting. When this occurs, switch to the position and select a lower gear, depending on the gradient of the hill.

When stopping the vehicle Leave the shift lever in the or position and firmly depress the foot brake pedal. If the vehicle will be stopped for a long period of time, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the or position as necessary.

WARNING . Do not race the engine while the

vehicle is stopped. Doing so may accelerate the vehicle suddenly and cause an accident when shifting to a driving gear.

. While the engine is running, the propeller shaft that transmits torque from the engine to the transmission is turning at all times. Crawling or reaching under the vehicle while the engine is running may result in serious injury.

NOTICE When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, do not hold the vehicle in place by depressing the accelerator pedal. Doing so may cause the clutch to overheat and result in transmission damage. Use the brakes to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Starting and driving 5-23

5-24 Starting and driving

When parking the vehicle

WARNING Before exiting the vehicle, be sure to move the shift lever to the position and stop the engine. If the engine is running and the shift lever is not in the position, the vehicle may start moving due to partial engagement of the clutch or to the effects of gravity on a slope, or the vehicle may suddenly accelerate due to acciden- tal operation of the accelerator ped- al, possibly causing an accident.

For models without NCCB (NISSAN Car- bon Ceramic Brake) package:

WARNING Follow the instructions below when parking the vehicle to help prevent the brake rotor and brake pads from rusting together. Failure to follow the instructions could cause the rotor and pads to rust together. If the rotor and pads rust together, there may be a popping noise and some vibration when the vehicle is driven, a wheel may not roll correctly,

or the brake pads could be damaged. If the pads are damaged, this may reduce the effectiveness of the brake system which could cause a collision, serious personal injury or death.

The GT-R uses brake pad materials that have high metallic content. The brake pad material helps maintain braking perfor- mance in a wide range of weather and driving conditions. For the first 3,000 miles (5,000 km) of the vehicles service life, and for the first 3,000 miles (5,000km) after a brake replace- ment, the brake pad to brake rotor clearance is very small. When parking, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the position. Idle the engine for more than 20 seconds without depressing the brake pedal. This allows the brake pads to move away from the rotor so the pad does not contact the rotor. Additionally, the brakes must be dry before parking the vehicle after driving on wet roads or after washing the vehicle. If the roads are wet, lightly apply the brakes for a short distance before parking the vehicle to dry the brakes. After wash- ing the vehicle, dry the brakes by driving on a dry road for a few miles and apply

the brakes normally based on traffic and road conditions. The metallic brake pads and brake disc rotor may rust together when the brakes are not applied: . If the vehicle is not idled for 20

seconds without the brakes applied, or if the brakes are applied when the vehicle is shut off, the rotor and pads can rust together, even when the brake pads are dry.

. If the brakes are wet when the vehicle is parked and the parking brake is applied for a long time.

It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer if the brake pads and brake rotor have rusted together. 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. With the foot brake pedal depressed,

apply the parking brake. 3. Move the shift lever to the position. 4. Check the shift lever position indicator

on the meter to confirm that the position is selected.

5. Push the ignition switch to stop the engine.

For models with NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package: ( NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) page 8-20)

The control of the dual clutch transmis- sion, Bilstein DampTronic electronically controlled shock absorbers and Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) can be changed to the desired modes by operating the setup switches. Select the desired mode best suited to the driving conditions.

NOTE: Bilstein DampTronic is a registered trademark of ThyssenKrupp Bilstein Suspension GmbH.

USAGE OF EACH MODE

R mode This mode enables optimum GT-R high performance during performance or high-speed driving. If the gear is shifted or the accelerator pedal is quickly operated when the trans- mission setup switch is in R mode and the engine warmed up, a sound effect is output to enhance the sense of sporti- ness. ( Active sound enhancement page 5-60)

Normal mode This mode is suitable for normal driving or performance driving. When the engine is started again, all modes will return to the normal mode.

Other modes for each switch Transmission: SAVE mode: This mode improves the fuel economy for long distance driving and reduce fatigue by enabling easy acceleration pedal op- eration.

Suspension: COMF mode: This mode is suitable for normal driving.

VDC: OFF mode: This mode is an emergency mode that can be used to free the vehicle from slush and deep snow, etc.

Starting and driving 5-25

VDC, TRANSMISSION AND SUSPENSION SETUP SWITCHES

5-26 Starting and driving

1. Transmission setup switch 2. Suspension setup switch 3. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) setup

switch

HOW TO SWITCH THE MODES Each time the engine is started, all switches are set to the normal mode. The normal mode is recommended for normal driving. Move the VDC, transmis- sion and suspension setup switches up or down to change the mode when the engine is running.

: Push and hold the switch for longer than approximately 1 second

: Push the switch * The selected mode is maintained even if the shift lever is moved between and position.

NOTICE . ESC (Electronic Stability Control)

OFF indicated on the VDC setup switch stands for VDC OFF.

. When the ignition switch is

pushed to the ON position, the indicators on the setup switches may illuminate briefly, however this is not a malfunction.

Starting and driving 5-27

5-28 Starting and driving

FEATURES OF EACH MODE

Transmission The transmission mode differs depending on the shift lever position, or .

position:

Set up mode Features . In addition to the normal mode functions, this mode allows you to

achieve higher engine speed, greater powertrain torque and engine braking.

. With the VDC switch in R mode, the R mode start function can be used. ( R mode start function page 5-33)

. When the R mode is selected, the maximum speed is lower than the one in the normal mode.

Normal (light is off) . For everyday and performance driving, an appropriate gear position is

automatically selected. . For long distance driving, this mode helps improve fuel economy by

reducing engine output compared to the normal mode. . The engine response to accelerator operation changes to be less

sensitive to pedal movement than the normal mode. The engine speed does not change as quickly for small accelerator pedal position changes.

. This mode controls powertrain torque on snowy roads and slippery surfaces making starting and driving easier.

. When the SAVE mode is selected, the maximum speed is lower than the one in the normal mode.

position:

Set up mode Features . This mode allows you to shift gears quickly and directly. . This mode will not allow the transmission to automatically upshift even

when the engine speed reaches the red zone. Do not rev the engine into the red zone.

. With the VDC switch in R mode, the R mode start function can be used. ( R mode start function page 5-33)

Normal (light is off)

. For everyday and performance driving, any gear position can be selected.

. This mode will allow the transmission to automatically upshift even when the engine speed is about to reach the red zone.

. For long distance highway driving, this mode improves fuel economy by reducing engine output compared to the normal mode.

. The engine response to accelerator operation changes to be less sensitive to pedal movement than the normal mode. The engine speed does not change as quickly for small accelerator pedal position changes.

. This mode controls powertrain torque on snowy roads and slippery surfaces making starting and driving easier.

. This mode allows the transmission to automatically upshift even when the engine speed is about to reach the red zone.

. When the SAVE mode is selected, the maximum speed is lower than the one in the normal mode.

NOTICE . When the engine speed ap-

proaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce the engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.

. Quickest shifting in the R mode with the transmission in the position is available when the engine speed is high. However, the transmission may shift more slowly when the engine speed is low.

Starting and driving 5-29

5-30 Starting and driving

Suspension

Set up mode Features . The damping force of the shock absorbers is set for maximum vehicle

performance. . Riding comfort becomes harder.

Normal (light is off) . The damping force of the shock absorbers is variably adjusted for

everyday driving or maximum vehicle performance. . The damping force of the shock absorbers is variably adjusted for more

comfortable driving. Movement of the vehicle body is larger than the normal and R modes.

NOTICE While maximizing vehicle perfor- mance, shock absorber control may automatically be returned to the normal mode. If the R mode or the COMF mode is selected in the case above, the suspension setup switch indicator may turn off. Operate the suspension setup switch to the R mode or the COMF mode and check to make sure the indicator illumi- nates. If the indicator does not illu- minate, it is recommended you have the system checked by a GT-R certi- fied NISSAN dealer.

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

Set up mode Features . In addition to the normal mode function, this mode adjusts front and

rear wheel power distribution to improve handling. . With the transmission switch in R mode, the R mode start function can

be used. ( R mode start function page 5-33)

Normal (light is off)

. This mode is for use in a broad range of driving conditions, for routine driving during fair to rainy weather, as well as for driving on road surfaces that are slippery due to snow or ice. Make sure to use this mode for everyday driving.

. Temporary mode that can be used to free if it is stuck in snow or mud Also place transmission setup switch in SAVE mode when freeing a stuck vehicle.

NOTE: Always make sure the VDC is ON before driving the vehicle by checking that the VDC OFF indicator lights on the meter and the VDC set-up switch are not illuminated. The GT-R is a high performance vehicle and the VDC must be on/activated to provide proper powertrain operation and intended drivability.

WARNING . The VDC OFF mode should ONLY

be used briefly to help free the vehicle if stuck in snow or mud by temporarily stopping operation of the VDC to maintain wheel torque.

. Driving the GT-R with the VDC off may lead to handling issues re- lated to steering maneuvers, ac- celeration, or deceleration. Moreover, driving with the VDC off can result in an inoperative vehicle by causing serious da- mage to the powertrain, including damage to the Transaxle Assem- bly including Transfer, Clutch, Gears, Transaxle case and all of its components and other drive- train component(s) by overheat- ing or excessive force.

. Damage to the powertrain or any drivetrain component(s) that oc- curs when there is a record in the Vehicle Status Data Recorder (VSDR) that the vehicle was driven with VDC off during the period when the damage was incurred is excluded from warranty cover-

Starting and driving 5-31

5-32 Starting and driving

age.

See your 2021 Warranty Information Booklet for important related information and warranty coverage exclusions. See also section 2 ( Transmission warn- ing light page 2-33) and section 5 ( Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- tem page 5-54) of this Owners Manual, Transmission Clutch Temperature High and Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) Sys- tem for important additional related information.

The turbocharger system uses engine oil for lubrication and cooling of its rotating components. The turbocharger turbine turns at extremely high speeds and it can get very hot. It is essential to maintain a supply of oil flowing through the turbocharger system. Therefore, a sud- den interruption of oil supply may cause a malfunction in the turbocharger. To ensure prolonged life and perfor- mance of the turbocharger, it is essential to perform the following maintenance procedure: . Change your engine oil according to

the recommended intervals shown in the 9. Maintenance and schedules section of this manual. Use only the recommended engine oil.

. If the engine had been operating at high engine speed for an extended period of time, let it idle for a few minutes prior to shutdown.

. Do not accelerate your engine to high engine speed immediately after start.

NOTICE . This vehicle includes spark plugs

that are designed for high per- formance. For this reason, if the engine is repeatedly started and stopped over a short time, the spark plugs may become fouled, making the engine difficult to start. To prevent diminished starting performance, avoid starting and stopping the engine repeatedly during a short period of time.

NOTE: . When the vehicle is delivered, the

engine oil level is 0.39 in (10 mm) below the H mark on the engine oil dipstick for optimum high perfor- mance driving. The engine oil can be filled up to the H mark if not enga- ging in performance driving.

. Because of the high performance characteristics of the GT-R engine, more frequent oil level inspections are necessary. Check the oil level every 1,800 miles (3,000km) and adjust as necessary. Also, change the engine oil based on the driving conditions. For the information re-

TURBOCHARGER SYSTEM

garding oil replacement intervals, refer to the 9. Maintenance and schedules section of this manual.

. Some amount of oil is consumed by your engine under normal operating conditions, and oil consumption by itself does not necessarily indicate any malfunction. If your rate of oil consumption increases suddenly or without explanation, NISSAN recom- mends that you have your vehicle inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

This function enables the driver to start acceleration from a stop by selecting R mode with the VDC and transmission setup switch. The engine output will be maintained at approximately 4,100 rpm. When using the R mode or the R mode start function, always use proper seating position and follow the safety instructions in Section 1 of this manual.

WARNING . Failure to follow the warnings

and instruction for the use of this feature may cause a loss of ve- hicle control or a collision which may lead to serious personal in- jury or death:

. Make sure to drive carefully with- in legal limits.

. Only use this function when you can guarantee that it is safe to do so, based on the surrounding traffic conditions.

. Do not use this function on slip- pery or wet roads. This may cause loss of vehicle control and could result in an accident.

. The R mode start function has been developed not only for con-

trolling the engine, transmission and VDC system, but also the settings of the suspension and tires. Therefore, any modification of the vehicle may disrupt the vehicles balance. This will not only reduce the optimum perfor- mance of the vehicle but may also cause damage to powertrain components, including the trans- mission.

NOTICE . When the temperature of the

engine coolant and transmission oil is high or low, the function cannot be used. The temperature range in which the R mode start function can be used: Engine coolant: 140F - 212F

(60C - 100C) Transmission oil: 140F - 266F

(60C - 130C)

. If the R mode start function is used 4 times consecutively, the function may be disabled and cannot be turned on to protect the vehicle system. While the

Starting and driving 5-33

R MODE START FUNCTION

5-34 Starting and driving

function is disabled, the warning light illuminates. When the warn- ing light illuminates, perform cool down driving. ( Cool down page GTR-14) When the warning light turns off, the function can be used again.

. The performance of start may vary depending on the amount of wheel spin ,or increase and decrease of the engine output in response to the outside tempera- ture. (This vehicle was set up according to the road surface conditions of the straight sec- tions of the Sendai Highland Ra- ceway course in Japan at 59F (15C).)

. For safety reasons, VDC control may activate automatically when driving on a slippery road surface, such as a wet road, in order to apply the brakes or limit the engine output.

. Frequent use of the R mode start function increases the load on the powertrain related parts such as the clutch and transmission compared to normal driving. In particular, the clutch will wear out

more quickly.

HOW TO USE R MODE START FUNCTION 1. Move the shift lever to the or

position. 2. Select the R mode with the transmis-

sion setup switch. ( VDC, trans- mission and suspension setup switches page 5-25)

3. Select the R mode with the VDC setup switch.

4. Depress the brake pedal firmly with your left foot and keep depressing the brake pedal.

5. Depress the accelerator pedal quickly to the floor with your right foot while the brake pedal is depressed. The engine speed will increase to approxi- mately 4,100 rpm and will be main- tained.

6. Within 3 seconds after depressing the accelerator pedal, release the brake pedal.

WARNING . Be sure the parking brake is fully

released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.

. Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.

. Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When park- ing, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.

. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended opera-

PARKING BRAKE

tion of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assis- tance of others or pets unat- t e n d e d i n y o u r v e h i c l e . Additionally, the temperature in- side a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

To apply: Pull the parking brake lever up. To release: 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. 2. While pulling up on the parking brake

lever slightly, push the button and lower the lever completely.

3. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.

The cruise control allows driving at speeds above 25 MPH (40 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

WARNING Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following condi- tions. Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an acci- dent.

. When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed.

. In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed.

. On winding or hilly roads.

. On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

. In very windy areas.

NOTE: . When the SAVE mode is selected

with the transmission setup switch, the acceleration and deceleration can be controlled smoothly. When the SAVE mode is selected, the maximum setting speed is lower than the one in the normal mode.

When the vehicle approaches a gen- tle uphill, there may be a slight delay as the vehicle returns to the preset speed. However, the vehicle will gradually accelerate and return to the preset speed.

Starting and driving 5-35

CRUISE CONTROL

5-36 Starting and driving

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CON- TROL . If the cruise control system malfunc-

tions, it will cancel automatically. The SET indicator will blink and the cruise control system warning will appear to warn the driver. ( Cruise control system warning page 2-43)

. If the engine coolant temperature becomes excessively high, the cruise control system will be canceled auto- matically.

. If the SET indicator blinks, turn the cruise control main switch off and it is recommended you contact a GT-R

certified NISSAN dealer. . The SET indicator may sometimes

blink when the cruise control main switch is turned on while pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE, SET/COAST or CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise control system, perform the steps below in the order indicated.

STEERING-WHEEL-MOUNTED CONTROLS 1. MAIN switch

Turns cruise control ON/OFF. 2. SET/COAST switch (pressed down)

Lowers the set vehicle speed. 3. RESUME/ACCELERATE switch (pressed

up) Raises the set vehicle speed.

4. CANCEL switch Cancels cruise control.

INDICATORS AND DISPLAY 1. CRUISE display

Displays the set vehicle speed. 2. CRUISE indicator

Informs the driver that the MAIN switch is ON.

3. SET indicator Informs the driver that the vehicle is driving at the set speed.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

Constant-speed driving To set the cruising speed, perform the following procedure. 1. Push the MAIN switch on. The CRUISE

indicator will come on.

2. Accelerate your vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET/COAST switch and release it. (The SET indicator will illuminate in the meter.) Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

NOTE: If the vehicle speed reaches approxi- mately 3 MPH (5 km/h) over the set speed, the set speed on the vehicle information display blinks.

Starting and driving 5-37

5-38 Starting and driving

Passing another vehicle To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle will return to the pre- viously set speed.

Increasing the set vehicle speed To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following methods: . Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET/COAST switch.

. Push and hold the RESUME/ACCELER- ATE switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.

. Push and then quickly release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will increase by about 1 MPH or 1 km/h.

Decreasing the set vehicle speed To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following methods: . Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET/COAST switch.

. Push and hold the SET/COAST switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows down to the desired speed.

. Push and then quickly release the SET/COAST switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by about 1 MPH or 1 km/h.

Resuming the preset speed To resume the preset speed, push and release the RESUME/ACCELERATE switch. The vehicle will resume the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).

Canceling the preset speed To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following methods: . Push the CANCEL switch . The SET

indicator will turn off. . Tap the brake pedal . The SET

indicator will turn off. . Turn the MAIN switch off. Both the

CRUISE indicator and SET indicator will turn off.

NOTE: . If cruise control was canceled by

pressing the cancel switch or by depressing the brake pedal, the system changes to standby status.

. If you depress the brake pedal while pushing the RESUME/ACCELERATE or SET/COAST switch and reset at the cruising speed, the cruise control will be deactivated. Turn the MAIN switch off once and then turn it on again.

Under the following conditions, cruise control will be automatically canceled. . Vehicle speed drops to below approxi-

mately 19 MPH (30 km/h). . Vehicle speed drops to more than

approximately 8 MPH (13 km/h) below the set vehicle speed.

. The shift lever is moved to a position other than .

. VDC operates.

. A tire is spinning.

. There is a malfunction in the cruise control system.

WARNING . Never rely solely on the hill start

assist system to prevent the ve- hicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially care- ful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possi- ble serious injury or death.

. The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

. The hill start assist may not pre- vent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from

rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.

NOTICE When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, do not hold the vehicle in place by depressing the accelerator pedal. Doing so may cause the clutch to overheat and result in transmission damage. Use the brakes to prevent the vehicle from moving.

The hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill. Hill start assist will operate automatically under the following conditions: . The shift lever is moved to a forward

or reverse position. . The vehicle is stopped completely on a

hill by applying the brake. The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and hill start assist will stop

Starting and driving 5-39

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM

5-40 Starting and driving

operating completely. Hill start assist will not operate when the shift lever is moved to the or position or on a flat and level road.

NOTE: This system does not function when the Vehicle Dynamic Control VDC) system warning appears on the vehicle infor- mation display located in the tach- ometer. ( Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system warning page 2-40)

NOTICE Follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine perfor- mance and ensure the future relia- bility and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these re- commendations may result in shor- tened engine life and reduced vehicle performance.

Please observe the following types of driving until the mileage shown below has been reached. Until 300 miles (500 km): . Do not depress the accelerator pedal

more than halfway and avoid rapid acceleration.

. Drive with the engine speed kept at less than 3,500 RPM.

. Avoid unnecessary quick steering, abrupt braking and driving on poor roads.

300 to 600 miles (500 to 1,000 km): . Avoid rapid acceleration in a low gear

(1st to 3rd gears) with the accelerator pedal fully depressed. Depress the pedal slowly.

. Avoid unnecessary quick steering and abrupt braking.

. Drive with the suspension setup switch in the COMF mode to allow more suspension stroke.

600 to 1,200 miles (1,000 to 2,000 km): . Drive with the engine speed kept

relatively high with the shift lever in the position. Shifting is recom- mended between 1st and 4th gears.

. Avoid unnecessary quick steering and abrupt braking.

. Drive with the suspension setup switch in the COMF mode to allow more suspension stroke.

Even though the mileage reaches over 1,200 miles (2,000 km), the clutch may take longer to properly engage if the vehicle is mainly driven in town at a low speed. NISSAN recommends breaking in the clutch at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

WHEEL ALIGNMENT Do not adjust the wheel alignment until the mileage reaches 1,000 miles (1,600 km). Until then, the suspension may not engage enough and the height may be higher. However, make sure to adjust the align-

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

ment after 1,000 miles (1,600 km). The wheel alignment can be adjusted by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer in accor- dance with specifications for city driving to high performance driving. The tires on the GT-R may have different wear rates and wear patterns in compar- ison to conventional passenger vehicles. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer to confirm that the alignment is within specifications.

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle. 1. Use smooth accelerator and brake

pedal application. . Avoid rapid starts and stops. . Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possi- ble.

. Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain constant speed. . Look ahead to try and anticipate

and minimize stops. . Synchronizing your speed with

traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops.

. Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and im- prove fuel efficiency.

3. Use air conditioning (A/C) at higher vehicle speeds. . Below 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load.

. Above 40 MPH (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerody- namic drag.

. Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.

4. Drive at economical speeds and dis- tances. . Observing the speed limit and not

exceeding 60 MPH (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aero- dynamic drag.

. Maintaining a safe following dis- tance behind other vehicles re- duces unnecessary braking.

. Safely monitoring traffic to antici- pate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth accel- eration changes.

. Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.

5. Use cruise control. . Using cruise control during high-

way driving helps maintain a steady speed.

. Cruise control is particularly effec- tive in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the shortest route. . Utilize a map or navigation system

to determine the best route to save time.

Starting and driving 5-41

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

5-42 Starting and driving

7. Avoid idling. . Shutting off your engine when safe

for stops exceeding 30-60 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an automated pass for toll roads. . Automated passes permit drivers

to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting.

9. Winter warm up. . Limit idling time to minimize impact

to fuel economy. . Vehicles typically need no more

than 30 seconds of idling at start- up to effectively circulate the en- gine oil before driving.

. Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your vehicle cool. . Park your vehicle in a covered

parking area or in the shade when- ever possible.

. When entering a hot vehicle, open- ing the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, re- sulting in reduced demand on your A/C system.

11. Use the SAVE mode. . It is recommended that you select

the SAVE mode with the transmis- sion setup switch while driving, except engaging in high perfor- mance driving. Doing so will enable improved fuel economy. ( VDC, transmission and suspension setup switches page 5-25)

. Keep your engine tuned up.

. Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.

. Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

. Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

. Use the recommended viscosity en- gine oil. ( Oil viscosity page 10-7)

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

AWD WARNING LIGHT The AWD warning light is located in the meter. The AWD warning light comes on when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. It turns off soon after the engine

is started. If any malfunction occurs in the AWD system while the engine is running, the warning light will come on. The warning light may blink rapidly (about twice per second) while trying to free a stuck vehicle due to high AWD clutch temperature. The driving mode may change to two-wheel drive. If the warning light blinks rapidly during opera- tion, stop the vehicle with the engine idling in a safe place immediately. Then if the light goes off after a while, you can continue driving. A large difference between the diameters of front and rear wheels will make the warning light blink slowly (about once per two seconds). Pull off the road in a safe area, and idle the engine. Check that all tire sizes are the same, tire pressure is correct and tires are not worn and winter tires are not installed on the front or rear wheels only. If the warning light is blinking after the above operation, it is recommended you have your vehicle checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer as soon as possi- ble. If non-genuine GT-R tires are used, the warning light may illuminate. ( GT-R special precautions page GTR-5)

WARNING . Do not attempt to raise two

wheels off the ground and shift the transmission to any drive or reverse position with the engine running. Doing so may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

. Do not attempt to test an AWD equipped vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer (such as the dy- namometers used by some states for emissions testing) or similar equipment even if the other two wheels are raised off the ground. Make sure that you inform the test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in drivetrain damage or unexpected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.

Starting and driving 5-43

ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD)

5-44 Starting and driving

NOTICE . If the warning light comes on

while driving there may be a malfunction in the AWD system. Reduce the vehicle speed and it is recommended you have your ve- hicle checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer as soon as possi- ble.

. If the warning light remains on after the above operation, it is recommended you have your ve- hicle checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer as soon as possi- ble.

. The powertrain may be damaged if you continue driving with the warning light blinking.

. Do not spin the rear wheels while driving. Spinning the rear wheels may increase the temperatures of the AWD clutch system and damage the system. Adjust the accelerator pedal position to stop wheel spin.

TIGHT CORNER BRAKING PHE- NOMENON If the steering wheel is turned more than half a turn when the vehicle is started when it is cold, it may be harder to move the vehicle forward and backward. This phenomenon is known as the tight corner braking phenomenon. This phenomenon is unique to AWD vehicles, and occurs due to a difference in speeds between the front and rear wheels while the vehicle is turning. This does not indicate that there is a malfunc- tion.

NOTE: If the tight corner braking phenomenon occurs, a slipping sound may be heard from the tires, or a squeaking sound may be heard from the drive system.

Reducing tight corner braking phenomenon The tight corner braking phenomenon can be reduced if the following three conditions are met: . Transmission setup switch is set to

Normal mode. . Vehicle speed is low (less than ap-

proximately 6 MPH (10 km/h)).

. The steering wheel is turned more than 1/2 turn.

TIRES This vehicle is equipped with special tires. When changing the tires, install the de- signated special tires. Replacing tires as a set of four with new ones is recom- mended. However, if a tire is punctured or damaged, it may be possible to replace only the damaged tire. Determining whether one tire or a complete set of tires should be replaced is based on a number of factors including tire wear and condition. Contact your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. They can recommend if an individual tire or a complete set should be replaced.

NOTICE If tires other than the designated tires, tires with large differences in wear or tires of different sizes are installed, the AWD performance will be degraded and the drive mechan- ism may be damaged.

AWD SYSTEM CHARACTERISTICS The AWD system automatically distri- butes the optimal torque to the front and rear wheels. This provides both the superior turning performance of a rear wheel drive vehicle and the traction of a AWD vehicle. Electronic control continuously distri- butes torque to the front and rear wheels in the range from 0:100 (rear-wheel drive mode) to 50:50 (all-wheel drive mode) to match the driving conditions and road conditions. This allows the engine output (torque) to be effectively transmitted to the road surface.

The rear final drive of this vehicle is equipped with a 1.5-way mechanical Lim- ited Slip Differential (LSD).

WARNING Sudden operation of the accelerator pedal can result in fishtailing or sideslip, possibly causing an acci- dent. Use particular caution when driving in rainy weather or on slip- pery roads.

NOTICE Use the designated differential gear oil. If any oil other than the desig- nated oil is used, the LSD may not operate correctly, and noise and vibration may occur, possibly result- ing in a malfunction.

NOTE: . If the vehicle accelerates from a stop

with the steering wheel turned in cold temperatures, the inner wheel tire may slip and some noise or vibration may be heard. This phe- nomenon is unique to vehicles

equipped with the LSD. This does not indicate that there is a malfunc- tion.

. The LSD controls the speed differ- ence between the left and right wheels, and optimally allocates tor- que to the wheels.

. The 1.5-way mechanical LSD in the rear final drive of this vehicle is characterized by its asymmetrical LSD effects when the accelerator pedal is ON and when it is OFF. This allows the appropriate amount of torque for the driving environment to be transmitted to the road sur- face.

Starting and driving 5-45

LIMITED SLIP DIFFERENTIAL (LSD)

5-46 Starting and driving

WARNING . Do not stop or park the vehicle

over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.

. Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.

. Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.

. To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended opera- tion of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assis- tance of others or pets unat- t e n d e d i n y o u r v e h i c l e . Additionally, the temperature in- side a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.

. Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be

applied and the transmission placed into the position. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident.

. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

. Follow the instructions below when parking the vehicle to help prevent the brake rotor and brake pads from rusting to- gether. Failure to follow the in- structions could cause the rotor and pads to rust together. If the rotor and pads rust together, there may be a popping noise and some vibration when the vehicle is driven, a wheel may not roll correctly, or the brake pads could be damaged. If the pads are damaged, this may re- duce the effectiveness of the brake system which could cause a collision, serious personal injury or death. (for models without NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package)

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

1. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Move the shift lever to the position. 3. To help prevent the vehicle from roll-

ing into the street when parked on a sloping drive way, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated. . HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB:

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

. HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.

. HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO CURB: Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

For models without NCCB (NISSAN Car- bon Ceramic Brake) package: The GT-R uses brake pad materials that have high metallic content. The brake pad material helps maintain braking perfor- mance in a wide range of weather and

driving conditions. For the first 3,000 - 6,000 miles (5,000 - 10,000 km) of the vehicles service life, and for the first 3,000 - 6,000 miles (5,000 - 10,000 km) after a brake replacement, the brake pad to brake rotor clearance is very small. When parking, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the position. Idle the engine for more than 20 seconds without depressing the brake pedal. This allows the brake pads to move away from the rotor so the pad does not contact the rotor. Additionally, the brakes must be dry before parking the vehicle after driving on wet roads or after washing the vehicle. If the roads are wet, lightly apply the brakes for a short distance before parking the vehicle to dry the brakes. After wash- ing the vehicle, dry the brakes by driving on a dry road for a few miles and apply the brakes normally based on traffic and road conditions. The metallic brake pads and brake disc rotor may rust together when the brakes are not applied: . If the vehicle is not idled for 20

seconds without the brakes applied, or if the brakes are applied when the vehicle is shut off, the rotor and pads can rust together, even when the

brake pads are dry. . If the brakes are wet when the vehicle

is parked and the parking brake is applied for a long time.

It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer if the brake pads and brake rotor have rusted together. For models with NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package: ( NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) page 8-20)

Starting and driving 5-47

5-48 Starting and driving

WARNING . The sonar system is a conveni-

ence but it is not a substitute for proper parking. Always look around and check that it is safe to do so before parking. Always move slowly.

. Read and understand the limita- tions of the sonar system as contained in this section. Incle- ment weather may affect the function of the sonar system; this may include reduced perfor- mance or a false activation.

. This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects.

. The system is designed as an aid to the driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle. The sys- tem will not detect small objects below the bumper, and may not detect objects that are too close to the bumper or on the ground.

. If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing in-

accurate measurement of obsta- cles or false alarms.

CAUTION . Keep the interior of the vehicle as

quiet as possible to hear the tone clearly. Excessive noise (such as audio system volume or an open vehicle window) will interfere with the tone and it may not be heard.

. Keep the sonar (located on the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the sonar with sharp objects). If the sonar is covered, it will affect the accuracy of the sonar system.

. The sonar system may not oper- ate correctly if a license plate cover is installed.

The sonar system sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the bumper. The sonar indicator will also appear in the touch screen display. ( Sonar indica- tor page 5-49.) The system detects front obstacles when the shift lever is in the position or position and both front and

SONAR SYSTEM

rear obstacles when the shift lever is in the position. The system may not detect objects at speeds above 6 MPH (10 km/h) and may not detect certain angular or moving objects. Refer to the illustration for approximate zone coverage areas. As you move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the tone increases. When you move even closer to the obstacle, the tone will sound continuously. The sensitivity level of the sonar can be adjusted (higher or lower) in the sonar setting display. ( Sonar system setting page 5-50) The intermittent tone will stop in 3 seconds when an obstacle is detected by only the corner sensor and the dis- tance does not change.

Sonar display Corner sonar indicator Center sonar indicator RearView Monitor display

SONAR INDICATOR With the Automatic Display with Sonar key ON in the touch screen display, when the front sonar detects obstacles near the bumper, a tone will sound and the sonar indicator will appear in the touch screen display . When the RearView Monitor is displayed, the sonar indicator will appear in the upper corner of the display . The sonar indicators and indicate the position of the object and the distance to the object with its color and rate of blinking. When an object is detected, the indicator (green) appears and blinks (the tone sounds intermittently). When the vehicle moves closer to the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow and the rate of blinking increases (the rate of the tone increases). When the vehicle moves even closer to the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns red (the tone sounds continuously). When the RearView Monitor is dis- played, the colors of the sonar indicator and the distance guide lines in the rear view indicate different distance to the object.

Starting and driving 5-49

5-50 Starting and driving

SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH The sonar system OFF switch on the lower side of the instrument panel allows the driver to turn the sonar system on and off. To turn the sonar system on and off, the ignition switch must be in the ON position. The indicator light on the switch will turn off when the system is turned off. If the indicator light flashes it may indicate a malfunction in the sonar system. The sonar system will turn on automati- cally under the following conditions. . When the shift lever is placed in the

position.

. When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 6 MPH (10 km/h).

. When the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and turned back to the ON position again.

SONAR SYSTEM SETTING Sonar settings can be adjusted. 1. Touch the Settings key on the

Launch Bar in the touch screen dis- play.

2. Select the Sonar key. Select a menu item to change from the following options. . Sonar . Only FR Sensor Use . Automatic Display with Sonar . Sonar Sensitivity . Volume

Sonar When this item is turned ON, the front and rear sonar is activated. When this item is turned to OFF (indicator turns off), the front and rear sonar is deactivated. ON (default) - OFF

Only FR Sensor Use When this item is turned on, only the rear sonar is turned off. The amber markers are displayed at the rear corners of the vehicle icon. ON - OFF (default)

Automatic Display with Sonar Automatically shows the sonar view on the touch screen display when the sonar is activated. ON (default) - OFF

Sonar Sensitivity Adjust the sensitivity level of the sonar. higher (right) - lower (left)

Volume Adjust the volume of the tone. higher (right) - lower (left)

WARNING If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.

The power assisted steering uses a hy- draulic pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering. If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you will still have control of the vehicle. However, much greater steering effort is needed, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

Starting and driving 5-51

POWER STEERING

5-52 Starting and driving

BRAKING PRECAUTIONS The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunc- tions, you will still have braking at two wheels. You may feel a small click and hear a sound when the brake pedal is fully depressed slowly. This is not a malfunc- tion and indicates that the brake assist mechanism is operating properly.

Vacuum assisted brakes The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pres- sure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and the stopping dis- tance will be longer.

Wet brakes When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking. To dry brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly tapping the brake pedal to heat-up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving

the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Using the brakes Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will cause over- heating of the brakes, wearing out the brake and pads faster and reduce gas mileage. To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING . While driving on a slippery sur-

face, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.

. If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.

PARKING BRAKE BREAK-IN Break in the parking brake shoes when- ever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or drums/ro- tors are replaced, in order to assure the best braking performance. This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual and can be performed by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

BRAKE SYSTEM

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING . The Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dan- gerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control dur- ing braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping dis- tances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal sur- faces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.

. Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness. When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) con-

trols the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By pre- venting each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.

Self-test feature The ABS includes electronic sensors, elec- tric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system

each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the meter. The brake system then operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, it is recom- mended you have the vehicle checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Normal operation The ABS operates at speeds above 3 to 6 MPH (5 to 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions. When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. How- ever, the pulsation may indicate that road

Starting and driving 5-53

BRAKE ASSIST

5-54 Starting and driving

conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.

The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- tem uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC sys- tem helps to perform the following func- tions. . Controls brake pressure to reduce

wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

. Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction con- trol function).

. Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions: understeer (vehicle tends to not

follow the steered path despite increased steering input)

oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving condi- tions).

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations. When the VDC system operates, the VDC warning light in the meter flashes so

note the following: . The road may be slippery or the

system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path.

. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly.

. Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

. The VDC mode can be changed using the VDC setup switch. ( VDC, transmission and suspension setup switches page 5-25)

( Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light page 2-34, Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light page 2-33) If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC warning light illuminates in the meter. The VDC system automatically turns off. The VDC setup switch is used to turn off the VDC system. The VDC off indicator

illuminates to indicate the VDC sys- tem is off. When the VDC setup switch is used to turn off the system, the VDC system still

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by transferring power to a non slipping drive wheel. The VDC warning light flashes if this occurs. All other VDC functions are off and the VDC warn- ing light will not flash. The VDC system is automatically reset to on when the ignition switch is placed in the off position then back to the on position. ( Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light page 2-34, Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off indicator light page 2-33) The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine andmove the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.

WARNING . The VDC system is designed to

help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving

and cornering on slippery sur- faces and always drive carefully.

. Do not modify the vehicles sus- pension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN ap- proved or are extremely deterio- rated, the VDC system may not operate properly. This could ad- versely affect vehicle handling performance, and the VDC warn- ing light may illuminate.

. If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate.

. If engine control related parts are not standard equipment or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC warning light may illuminate.

. When driving on extremely in- clined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illumi- nate. Do not drive on these types

of roads. . When driving on an unstable sur-

face such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the VDC warn- ing light may illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto a stable surface.

. If wheels or tires other than the those recommended are used, the VDC system may not operate properly and the VDC warning light may illuminate.

. The VDC system is not a substi- tute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.

NOTE: . Always make sure the VDC is ON

before driving the vehicle by check- ing that the VDC OFF indicator lights on the meter and the VDC set-up switch are not illuminated. The GT-R is a high performance vehicle and the VDC must be on/ activated to provide proper power- train operation and intended driva- bility.

Starting and driving 5-55

5-56 Starting and driving

WARNING . The VDC OFF mode should ONLY

be used briefly to help free the vehicle if stuck in snow or mud by temporarily stopping operation of the VDC to maintain wheel torque.

. Driving the GT-R with the VDC off may lead to handling issues re- lated to steering maneuvers, ac- celeration, or deceleration. Moreover, driving with the VDC off can result in an inoperative vehicle by causing serious da- mage to the powertrain, including damage to the Transaxle Assem- bly including Transfer, Clutch, Gears, Transaxle case and all of its components and other drive- train component(s) by overheat- ing or excessive force.

. Damage to the powertrain or any drivetrain component(s) that oc- curs when there is a record in the Vehicle Status Data Recorder (VSDR) that the vehicle was driven with VDC off during the period when the damage was incurred is excluded from warranty cover-

age.

See your 2021 Warranty Information Booklet for important related information and warranty coverage exclusions. See also section 2 ( Transmission warn- ing light page 2-33) and section 5 ( Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) sys- tem page 5-54) of this Owners Manual, Transmission Clutch Temperature High and Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) Sys- tem for important additional related information. . Except for the emergency cases

above, any issues related to driving stability (e.g., steering maneuvers and maneuvers during acceleration and deceleration) and any damages to drivetrain components (e.g., transfer, clutch, a sort of gear, trans- axle case) will not be covered by warranty if there is a record in the Vehicle Status Data Recorder (VSDR) that the vehicle was driven with VDC off.

. When attempting to free the vehicle frommud or fresh snow, the VDC will detect the tire slipping, and the engine speed may not increase even when the accelerator pedal is de- pressed. To raise the engine speed,

use the VDC set up switch to turn the VDC system OFF and select SAVE mode with the transmission switch. ( VDC, transmission and sus- pension setup switches page 5-25)

. When the VDC system is turned OFF, all VDC functions (including traction control), except for the ABS func- tions, are deactivated.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply deicer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the Intelligent Key system.

ANTI-FREEZE In the winter when it is anticipated that the outside temperature will drop below 32F (0C), check antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. ( Engine cooling system page 8-6)

BATTERY If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. ( Battery page 8-13)

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, in- cluding the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For details, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certi- fied NISSAN dealer.

TIRE EQUIPMENT The GT-R summer tires are made from a specially formulated rubber to maximize the vehicles performance capabilities. Performance of summer tires is substan- tially reduced when temperatures are less than 32F (0C) so you must drive care- fully. NISSAN recommends the use of winter or all-season tires on all four wheels if you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions when tem- peratures are less than 32F (0C).

WARNING Never use summer tires when the temperature is below 4F (20C) to prevent permanent tread deforma- tion which may cause tire damage or tire failure. This may cause a loss of vehicle control which can result in serious personal injury or death.

Tire chains may be used. ( Tire chains page 8-38) If you install tires, they must also be the specified size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter: . A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to

remove ice and snow from the win- dows and wiper blades.

. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.

. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

. Extra window washer fluid to refill the reservoir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING . Wet ice (32F, 0C and freezing

rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or grip under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.

. Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive

Starting and driving 5-57

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-58 Starting and driving

wheels will lose even more trac- tion.

. Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.

. Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.

. Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.

. Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads.

. Snow can trap dangerous ex- haust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehi- cle.

NOTE: When driving on snow, select the SAVE mode with the setup switch. By select- ing the SAVE mode, the engine output is controlled appropriately for snow or

slippery road surfaces. This enables the vehicle to start or accelerate smoothly.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so equipped) Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold temperature starting. The engine block heater should be used when the outside temperature is 20F (7C) or lower.

To use the engine block heater 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Plug the engine block heater cord into

a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten- sion cord.

3. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

4. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least 2 - 4 hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.

5. Before starting the engine, unplug and properly store the cord to keep it away from moving parts.

WARNING . Do not use your engine block

heater with an ungrounded elec- trical system or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seriously injured by an electrical shock if you use an ungrounded connec- tion.

. Disconnect and properly store the engine block heater cord before starting the engine. Damage to the cord could result in an elec- trical shock and can cause ser- ious injury.

. Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3- pronged extension cord rated for at least 10A. Plug the exten- sion cord into a Ground Fault In te r rupt (GF I ) p ro tec ted , grounded 110-VAC outlet.

Failure to use the proper exten- sion cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury.

This system enhances exhaust sound silencing by closing the electronic control valve while starting the engine, and while idling after starting the engine.

To close the electronic control valve, push the exhaust sound control switch to the ON side. To open the electronic control valve, push the exhaust sound control switch to the OFF side.

NOTE: Do not disconnect the electronic control valve connector. If the connector is not plugged in, the system will detect this as a malfunction and engine output will be limited.

Starting and driving 5-59

EXHAUST SOUND CONTROL SYSTEM (if so equipped)

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION (if so equipped)/ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT (if so equipped)

5-60 Starting and driving

NOTE: To operate the active noise cancellation and active sound enhancement system properly: . Do not cover the speakers or woofer. . Do not cover the microphones. . Do not change or modify speakers

including the woofer and any audio related parts such as the amplifier.

. Do not make any modification includ- ing sound deadening or modifications around the microphones, speakers or woofer.

ACTIVE NOISE CANCELLATION The active noise cancellation uses the front and rear microphones to detect engine booming noise. The system then automatically generates a noise cancel- ling sound through the speakers and woofer to reduce engine booming noise. The front and rear microphones are located inside of the roof. The front speakers are located on the doors and the woofer is located in between the rear seats.

ACTIVE SOUND ENHANCEMENT The active sound enhancement gener- ates sounds according to engine speed and driving modes selected by the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, transmis- sion and suspension setup switches through the speakers and woofer to enhance the quality of the engine sound. In addition, if the gear is shifted or the accelerator pedal is quickly operated when the transmission setup switch is in R mode and the engine warmed up, a sound effect is output to enhance the sense of sportiness. ( R mode page 5-25)

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ........................................ 6-2 Roadside assistance program .......................................... 6-2 Emergency engine shut off ................................................. 6-3 Flat tire ................................................................................................. 6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .......... 6-3 Run-flat tires ............................................................................. 6-4

Jump starting ................................................................................ 6-5 Push starting .................................................................................. 6-7 If your vehicle overheats ...................................................... 6-8 Towing your vehicle ................................................................. 6-9

Towing recommended by NISSAN ....................... 6-9 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) ...... 6-9

6-2 In case of emergency

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights will flash. The flasher can be actuated with the ignition switch in any position. Some state lawsmay prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.

WARNING . If stopping for an emergency, be

sure to move the vehicle well off the road.

. Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circum- stances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

. Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.

In the event of a roadside emergency, Roadside Assistance Service is available to you. Please refer to your Warranty Information Booklet (U.S.) or Warranty & Roadside Assistance Information Booklet (Canada) for details.

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE PROGRAM

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the fol- lowing procedure: . Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch 3 consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or

. Push and hold the push-button igni- tion switch for more than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light (in the meter) or the warning message (on the display). This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). ( Low tire pressure warn- ing light page 2-30) ( Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) page 5-4)

WARNING . If the low tire pressure warning

light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneu- vers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- ing with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in ser- ious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat ( Run-flat tires page 6-4) or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, it is recom- mended you have the vehicle checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. When a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer as soon as possi- ble for tire replacement and/or system resetting.

. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN

In case of emergency 6-3

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

6-4 In case of emergency

could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

. Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.

NOTE: . You can check the pressure of all

four tires on the touch screen dis- play. See the separate Multi Func- tion Display Owners Manual.

. The tires of this vehicle are filled with nitrogen gas. When the tire pressure is low, fill the tires with nitrogen. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for information on filling the tires with nitrogen.

. If nitrogen is not available, com- pressed air may be safely used under normal driving conditions. However, NISSAN recommends re- filling with nitrogen for maximum tire performance.

RUN-FLAT TIRES Run-flat tires are those tires that can be used temporarily if they are punctured. ( Run-flat tires page 8-37) Also, see the tire safety information in the Warranty Information Booklet.

WARNING . Although you can continue driv-

ing with a punctured run-flat tire, remember that vehicle handling stability is reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving a long dis- tance at high speeds may da- mage the tires.

. Do not drive at speeds above 50 MPH (80 km/h) and do not drive more than 50miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat tire. The actual distance the vehicle can be driven on a flat tire depends on outside temperature, vehicle load, road conditions and other factors.

. Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid hard cornering or braking, which may cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

NOTICE . Never install tire chains on a

punctured run-flat tire, as this could damage your vehicle.

. Avoid driving over any projection or pothole, as the clearance be- tween the vehicle and the ground is smaller than normal.

. Do not enter an automated car wash with a punctured run-flat tire.

. It is recommended you have the punctured tire replaced by your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer as soon as possible, as the tires performance capability is re- duced.

If you have a flat tire and have to stop the vehicle, follow the instructions below. 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road

and away from traffic. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. 3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Move the shift lever to the position.

4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic,

and to signal professional road assis- tance personnel that you need assis- tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

For the tire removing procedure, see the following section. ( Jacking vehicle and removing wheels page 8-42)

The following circumstances indicate that the battery is discharged. . The starter motor does not turn or it

turns weakly and the engine does not start.

. The vehicle lights are much dimmer than usual.

. The sound of the horn is weak. The horn makes no sound.

NOTICE When the battery is discharged, do not close either of the front doors. The automatic window adjusting function will not work, and the side roof panel may be damaged.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed. For the battery maintenance information, see the following section. ( Battery page 8-13)

WARNING . If done incorrectly, jump starting

can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.

. Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.

. Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Bat- tery fluid is a corrosive sulphuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.

. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

. The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an im- properly rated battery can da- mage your vehicle.

. Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles)

In case of emergency 6-5

JUMP STARTING

6-6 In case of emergency

and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump start- ing.

. Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.

. Your vehicle has an automatic engine cooling fan. It could come on at any time. Keep hands and other objects away from it.

WARNING Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle , position the two vehicles ( and ) to bring their batteries into close proximity to each other. Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply parking brake. Move the shift lever to the position. Switch off all

unnecessary electrical systems (light, heater, air conditioner, etc.).

3. Remove the battery cover. Cover the battery with a firmly wrung out moist cloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the se- quence as illustrated ( ? ? ? ).

If the battery is disconnected or discharged, the steering wheel will lock and cannot be turned. Supply power using jumper cables before pushing the ignition switch and dis- engaging the steering lock.

CAUTION . Always connect positive (+) to

positive (+) and negative () to body ground (as illustrated), not to the battery.

. Make sure that the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that clamps do not contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started .

NOTE: Do not keep the starter motor en- gaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting your engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable ( ? ? ? ).

8. Be sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover the vent holes as it may be contaminated with corrosive acid.

9. Put the battery cover on.

NOTE: If the clamp clip is difficult to connect to the battery terminal, remove the cowl top cove r to make i t eas i e r . ( Removing the cowl top cover page 8-5)

Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing.

NOTICE Your NISSAN cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.

In case of emergency 6-7

PUSH STARTING

6-8 In case of emergency

WARNING . Do not continue to drive if your

vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.

. To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radia- tor filler cap and the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is still hot. When the cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious in- jury.

. Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect unusual noise, etc., take the following steps: 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road,

apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to the position. Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the windows, move the temperature control to maximum hot and fan

control to high speed. 3. If engine overheating is caused by

climbing a long hill on a hot day, run the engine at a fast idle (approxi- mately 1,500 rpm) until the tempera- ture gauge indication returns to normal.

4. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.

5. Open the engine hood.

WARNING If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent get- ting burned.

6. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If cool- ant is leaking, the drive belts are missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.

7. When the coolant temperature gauge goes down to the midpoint, stop the engine and wait until the gauge goes down further to C (cold).

8. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the reservoir tank. Add coolant to the reservoir, if neces- sary, after opening the coolant reser- voir cap with a heavy cloth covering it. ( Engine cooling system page 8- 6)

9. It is recommended you have your vehicle repaired at the nearest GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

When towing your vehicle, all State (Pro- vincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for tow- ing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehi- cle, NISSAN recommends that you have a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions.

WARNING . Never ride in a vehicle that is

being towed. . Never get under your vehicle after

it has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION Always attach safety chains before towing.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be used when towing your vehicle or the vehicle be placed on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

NOTICE Never tow the vehicle with any of the wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive da- mage to the powertrain.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)

WARNING To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when reco- vering a stuck vehicle:

. Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regard- ing the recovery procedure.

. Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural members of the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-9

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-10 In case of emergency

. Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle.

. Only use devices specifically de- signed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturers in- structions.

. Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.

. Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturers instruc- tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure: 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system and select SAVE mode with the transmission setup switch. ( VDC, transmission and suspen- sion setup switches page 5-25)

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstruc-

tions. 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left

to clear an area around the front tires. 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward. . Shift back and forth between the

and positions. . Apply the accelerator as little as

possible to maintain the rocking motion.

. Release the accelerator pedal be- fore shifting between the and

positions. . Do not spin the tires above 35 MPH

(55 km/h). 5. Turn on the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system. 6. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a

few tries, contact a professional tow- ing service to remove the vehicle.

WARNING . Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. . Do not spin your tires at high

speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious in- jury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior .......................................................................... 7-2 Washing ........................................................................................ 7-2 Waxing ........................................................................................... 7-3 Removing spots ..................................................................... 7-3 Underbody .................................................................................. 7-3 Glass ................................................................................................ 7-3 Wheels ............................................................................................ 7-4 Chrome parts ........................................................................... 7-4 Front grille .................................................................................. 7-4 Outside door handles ........................................................ 7-4 Tire dressing ............................................................................. 7-4 Dry carbon fiber parts (if so equipped) ............... 7-5

Cleaning interior .......................................................................... 7-5 Air fresheners ........................................................................ 7-6 Floor mats ................................................................................ 7-6 Seat belts .................................................................................. 7-8

Corrosion protection ............................................................... 7-9 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion ................................................................. 7-9 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion ............................................................................. 7-9 To protect your vehicle from corrosion ........... 7-9

7-2 Appearance and care

In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle as soon as you can: . after a rainfall to prevent possible

damage from acid rain . after driving on coastal roads . when contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface

. when dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.

WASHING Wash dirt off the vehicle with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lu- kewarm (never hot) water.

NOTICE . Do not use an automatic car

wash. The rear spoiler may be damaged.

. Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, caus- ing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.

. Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.

. Do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surfacemay become water-spotted.

. Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or da- maged.

. For models with decorative stick- er and/or protection film on front fender and rear bumper, observe the following: Wash dirt off the vehicle with a

wet sponge and plenty of water. Then wipe the vehicle gently using a soft cloth.

Do not apply direct water pressure, such as high-pres- sure sprayer, on the vehicle body around the sticker and/ or protection film. This may cause the sticker and/or pro- tection film edges to peel away or come off from the vehicle.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be regularly cleaned. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. Avoid leaving water spots on the paint surface by using a damp chamois to dry the vehicle.

WAXING Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before reapplying wax. A GT-R certified NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product. . Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup- plied with the wax.

. Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or clea- ners that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compound or aggressive polish- ing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish

may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

WARNING Do not use wax on the glass, rubber or plastic parts around the glass or door. This may prevent the window operation or cause poor visibility and the wax cannot be coated uniformly.

NOTICE . Do not use compound agents on

clear-coated dry carbon fiber parts (such as the NISMO models bumper, side sill protector, rear spoiler, roof, hood, hood duct, front fender duct, etc.).

. Do not use any chemical agents (wax, coating agent, compound agent, etc.) on matte-painted dry carbon fiber parts (such as the rear diffuser, a rear spoiler that is of specifications other than NISMO, etc.).

REMOVING SPOTS Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possi- ble from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer or any automotive acces- sory stores.

UNDERBODY In areas where road salt is used in winter, the underbody must be cleaned regularly. This will prevent dirt and salt from build- ing up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspen- sion. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.

Appearance and care 7-3

7-4 Appearance and care

NOTICE When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine- based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conduc- tors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.

WHEELS Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance. . Clean the inner side of the wheels

when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.

. Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

. NISSAN recommends that the road wheels be waxed to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.

CAUTION Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.

Aluminum alloy wheels Wash regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. Salt could discolor the wheels if not removed. It may discolor to black depending on storage conditions. If only one wheel is changed, it may be different color with other wheels. If the wheel is changed, It is recommended you consult with a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

NOTICE Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:

. Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels.

. Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient tempera-

ture. . Rinse the wheel to completely

remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is ap- plied.

CHROME PARTS Clean chrome parts regularly with a non- abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

FRONT GRILLE Use alcohol (IPA), such as ethanol, to remove dirt, tar and oil spots, etc. that adheres to the surface of plated parts.

OUTSIDE DOOR HANDLES After driving on a road where salt is used in winter, immediately wash and clean the outside door handles that are provided with a special coating. This will keep the beautiful finish longer.

TIRE DRESSING NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce dis- coloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This

compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint. If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions: . Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more easily with an oil-based tire dressing.

. Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).

. Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

. Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by tire dressing manu- facturer.

DRY CARBON FIBER PARTS (if so equipped) Because of the characteristics of the material, the dry carbon fiber parts may turn yellow due to exposure to ultraviolet rays. The surfaces of dry carbon fiber parts are coated with a special ultraviolet protection paint. To maintain the appear- ance of these parts, it is important to take proper care of them.

NOTICE . Do not use compound agents on

clear-coated dry carbon fiber parts (such as the NISMO models bumper, side sill protector, rear spoiler, roof, hood, hood duct, front fender duct, etc.).

. Do not use any chemical agents (wax, coating agent, compound agent, etc.) on matte-painted dry carbon fiber parts (such as the rear diffuser, a rear spoiler that is of specifications other than NISMO, etc.).

. When dry carbon fiber parts be- come dirty, prepare a dilute cleaning solution by mixing one capful of mild detergent in a bucket of water, and use that mixture to clean the parts.

NOTE: The surfaces of the dry carbon fiber parts are lightly coated like a race car so that you can feel the proper texture of real carbon, which may feel rough. This is normal.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry soft cloth. Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather. Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturers recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat materi- al. Use a cloth dampened only with water, to clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious perso- nal injury.

Appearance and care 7-5

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-6 Appearance and care

CAUTION . Never use benzine, thinner, or any

similar material. . For cleaning, use a soft cloth,

dampened with water. Never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or cause discoloration to the lens.

. Do not spray any liquid such as water on the meter lens. Spraying liquid may cause the system to malfunction.

NOTICE . Small dirt particles can be abra-

sive and damaging to the leather surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leathers natural finish.

. Never use fabric protectors un- less recommended by the manu-

facturer. . Do not use glass or plastic cleaner

on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.

. Do not spill on or make contact with interior surfaces while hand- ling air fresheners, aroma agents, cosmetics, sunscreen, etc. They may cause permanent discolora- tion, stain, crack, paint peeling, etc. depending on the ingredi- ents. If they contact the interior surface, wipe them off immedi- ately using a soft cloth.

. Do not use the chlorine-based cleaning liquid such as chlorine dioxide and hypochlorous acid, which may cause the paint peel- ing, corrosion, etc. If it is unavoid- able to clean or sterilize interior surfaces, use less than 75% etha- nol. Wipe the interior parts with a dry cloth dampened with ethanol. Wipe off ethanol completely. If you leave it uncleaned, it may cause paint peeling, discolora- tion, etc. Since ethanol is flam- mable, be careful of fire.

AIR FRESHENERS Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If an air freshener is used, take the following precautions: . Hanging-type air fresheners can

cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface.

. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and disco- loration when spilled on interior sur- faces.

Carefully read and follow the manufac- turers instructions before using air fresh- eners.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death:

. NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them up-

side down or backwards. . Use only genuine NISSAN floor

mats or equivalent floor mats that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.

. Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat po- sitioning hooks. ( Floor mat installation page 7-7)

. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.

. Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.

. After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.

The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular clean- ing and replaced if they become exces- sively worn.

Floor mat installation Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the floor mat positioning hooks for each seating position varies depend- ing on the vehicle. When installing genuine NISSAN floor mats, follow the installation instructions provided with the floor mat and the following: 1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell

so that the mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat

is properly positioned. 3. Make sure the floor mat does not

interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition in the OFF position and the shift lever in the (Park) position, fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position. It is recommended you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle.

Appearance and care 7-7

7-8 Appearance and care

Positioning hooks The illustration shows the location of the floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. ( Seat belt maintenance page 1-12)

WARNING Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye, or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.

Cleaning the power window fin- isher Moisten a soft cloth with neutral deter- gent and wipe off the dirt on the power window finisher . After wiping off the dirt, soak a cloth with water and wring it out thoroughly, then wipe off the neutral detergent.

NOTICE Some cleaners may cause the paint to peel or cause spots to occur. If using a cleaner, it is recommended you consult with a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

MOST COMMON FACTORS CON- TRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORRO- SION . The accumulation of moisture-retain-

ing dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.

. Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS IN- FLUENCE THE RATE OF CORRO- SION

Moisture Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can acceler- ate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle, and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing where atmospheric pollution ex- ists, or where road salt is used.

Temperature A temperature increase will accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use will accelerate the corrosion process. Road salt will also accelerate the disin- tegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION . Wash and wax your vehicle often to

keep the vehicle clean. . Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible. . Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumula- tion.

. Check the underbody for accumula- tion of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.

Appearance and care 7-9

CORROSION PROTECTION

7-10 Appearance and care

CAUTION . NEVER remove dirt, sand or other

debris from the passenger com- partment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

. Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface deicing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended you consult a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ..................................................... 8-3 Engine compartment check locations ....................... 8-4

Removing the cowl top cover .................................... 8-5 Engine cooling system ............................................................ 8-6

Checking engine coolant level ................................... 8-8 Changing engine coolant ............................................... 8-8

Engine oil ............................................................................................ 8-9 Checking engine oil level ................................................ 8-9 Changing engine oil and filter ................................. 8-10

Transmission oil ......................................................................... 8-10 Power steering fluid ............................................................... 8-11 Brake fluid ...................................................................................... 8-11 Window washer fluid ............................................................. 8-12 Battery ............................................................................................... 8-13

Precautions ............................................................................. 8-14 Fluid level check .................................................................. 8-14 Jump starting ........................................................................ 8-15

Drive belts ....................................................................................... 8-16 Spark plugs .................................................................................... 8-16

Replacing spark plugs .................................................... 8-17 Air cleaner ...................................................................................... 8-17 Windshield wiper blades ..................................................... 8-18

Cleaning ..................................................................................... 8-18 Replacing the wiper blades ....................................... 8-18

Brakes ............................................................................................... 8-19 Self-adjusting brakes .................................................... 8-19 Brake pad wear warning (models without NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package) ................................................................ 8-19 High performance brake system (models without NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package) .......................................... 8-19 Replacing the brake pads (models without NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package) ................................................................ 8-20

NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) (if so equipped) ................................................................................ 8-20

Replacing brake pads and brake disc rotors ............................................................................. 8-21

Fuses .................................................................................................. 8-22 Engine compartment ................................................... 8-22 Passenger compartment .......................................... 8-23

Intelligent Key battery replacement ......................... 8-25 Lights ................................................................................................. 8-27

Headlights ............................................................................. 8-27 Exterior and interior lights ....................................... 8-28

Wheels and tires ....................................................................... 8-29 Tire pressure ....................................................................... 8-30 Tire and loading information label ................... 8-32 Checking the tire pressure ...................................... 8-33

Tire labeling ............................................................................ 8-35 Types of tires ......................................................................... 8-37 Tire chains ............................................................................... 8-38

Changing wheels and tires ..................................... 8-39 Jacking vehicle and removing wheels ............ 8-42 Wheel lock nuts (if so equipped) ......................... 8-47

When performing any inspection or main- tenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precau- tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING . Park the vehicle on a level sur-

face, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to the position.

. Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replace- ment or repairs.

. If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, cloth- ing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.

. It is advisable to secure or re- move any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before work- ing on your vehicle.

. Always wear eye protection

whenever you work on your ve- hicle.

. If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.

. Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

. Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from fuel tank and the battery.

. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition key is in the OFF position and the en- gine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the ne- gative battery cable before work- ing near the fan.

. The fuel filter or fuel lines should be serviced by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines are under high pressure even when the engine is off.

CAUTION . Do not work under the hood while

the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.

. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil and coolant. Impro- perly disposed engine oil, coolant, and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.

NOTICE . Never connect or disconnect the

battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.

. Never leave the engine or trans- mission related component har- nesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion.

This 8. Do-it-yourself section gives in- structions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

Do-it-yourself 8-3

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-4 Do-it-yourself

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is also available. ( Owners Manual/Service Manual order information page 10-24) You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operat- ing difficulties or excessive emissions. If in doubt about any servicing, we recom- mend that it be done by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

1. Fuse/fusible link holder 2. Battery 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Engine oil dipstick 5. Brake fluid reservoir 6. Air cleaner

7. Power steering fluid reservoir 8. Radiator filler cap 9. Coolant reservoir cap (pressure type) 10. Coolant reservoir 11. Window washer fluid reservoir

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

NOTICE The coolant reservoir is equipped with a pressure type cap, and the radiator is equipped with a non- pressure type cap. Do not switch the radiator filler cap and the coolant reservoir cap. Doing so will cause substandard cooling performance and overheating.

REMOVING THE COWL TOP COVER Remove the cowl top cover if necessary. 1. Remove the battery cover.

2. Unfasten the 5 clips and remove the cowl top cover by pulling it up.

Do-it-yourself 8-5

8-6 Do-it-yourself

3. Unfasten the 3 clips and remove the cowl top cover by pulling it towards the front of the vehicle.

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) and 50% water to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant pro- tection. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING . Never remove the radiator or

coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the en- gine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. ( If your vehicle overheats page 6-8)

. The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a genuine NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION . Never use any cooling system

additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.

. When adding or replacing cool- ant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Gen- uine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted to provide antifreeze protection to 34F (37C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) concentrate following the direc- tions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti- freeze/ Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufactures instructions to maintain mini- mum antifreeze protection to 34F (37C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Antifreeze/ Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the en- gine cooling system.

. The life expectancy of the fac- tory-fill coolant is 24,000 miles (38,400 km) or 2 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) (or equivalent coolant), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti- freeze/Coolant (green), or the use of nondistilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory- fill coolant. Refer to the 9. Main- tenance and schedules section of this manual for more details.

Except for NISMO models

NISMO models

: MAX line : MIN line : Between MAX and MIN lines (except for

NISMO models)

Do-it-yourself 8-7

8-8 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LE- VEL Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below the MIN level , open the reservoir cap (pressure type) and add coolant up to between the MAX and MIN level. If the reservoir is empty, open the radiator filler cap and check the coolant level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to between the MAX and MIN level.

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 24,000 miles (38,400 km) or 2 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the 9. Maintenance and sche- dules section of this manual for more details. If the cooling system frequently re- quires coolant, it is recommended you have it checked by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Check that the level of coolant is between MAX and MIN on the pressurized radiator reservoir. If the level is below the mid- point, the amount of coolant circulating may be insufficient for maximum vehicle performance, possibly causing engine overheating or other trouble. For the coolant level and mixture ratio when engaging in performance driving, see Coolant level and mixture ratio page GTR-15. Except for NISMO models: If it is difficult to determine the midpoint between MAX and MIN, remove the cool- ant reservoir cap and look inside through the opening to check that the coolant level is above the divider between the top half and bottom half of the pressur-

ized coolant reservoir.

NOTICE . The coolant reservoir is equipped

with a pressure type cap, and the radiator is equipped with a non- pressure type cap. Do not switch the radiator filler cap and the coolant reservoir cap. Doing so will cause substandard cooling performance and overheating.

. If you have added only water as the coolant in an emergency, change it to a coolant mixture ratio specified as soon as possi- ble.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT If major cooling system repairs are re- quired, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. The service procedures can be found in the appro- priate NISSAN Service Manual. Improper servicing can result in re- duced heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING . To avoid the danger of being

scalded, never change the cool- ant when the engine is hot.

. Never remove the radiator filler cap and the coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator and reservoir.

. Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as pos- sible.

. Keep coolant out of reach of children and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake. 2. Run the engine until it reaches oper-

ating temperature. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait at least 5

minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the oil.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be within the range . If the oil level is below , remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the open-

ing. Do not overfill . 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

NOTE: . It is normal to add some oil between

oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions. More engine oil is consumed by frequent acceleration/deceleration especially when the engine rpm is high. If your rate of oil consumption increases suddenly or without ex- planation, NISSAN recommends that you have your vehicle inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. When the vehicle is delivered, the engine oil is set to 0.39 in (10 mm) below the H mark for optimal high performance driving. The engine oil can be filled up to the H mark if performance driving is not engaged.

NOTICE . Mobil 1 (0W-40) (100% synthetic)

is the factory fill oil. The VR38 engine with its plasma-sprayed bores was developed using this oil. NISSAN cannot ensure proper engine operation and durability if other 0W-40 non-equivalent syn-

Do-it-yourself 8-9

ENGINE OIL

8-10 Do-it-yourself

thetic oil is used. If Mobil 1 (0W- 40) or equivalent is not available, Mobil 1 (10W-40) (100% synthetic) or equivalent may be used; how- ever, some performance loss may be noticed.

. Oil level should be checked reg- ularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine. See the 2021 NISSAN GT-R Warranty Informa- tion Booklet for details including applicable exclusions.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL AND FILTER NOTE: When replacement is required, it is recommended you contact a GT-R cer- tified NISSAN dealer for servicing.

WARNING . Prolonged and repeated contact

with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

. Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as pos-

sible. . Keep used engine oil out of reach

of children.

NOTE: When checking or replacement is re- quired, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for servi- cing.

NOTICE . It is recommended that you use

only Genuine NISSAN Transmis- sion Oil R35 Special or equivalent. Do not mix with other fluids.

. Using transmission oil other than Genuine NISSAN Transmission Oil R35 Special or equivalent may cause deterioration in driveability and transmission durability, and may damage the transmission. See the 2021 NISSAN GT-R War- ranty Information Booklet for de- ta i l s inc lud ing app l i cab le exclusions.

TRANSMISSION OIL

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. Remove the cap that is attached with a gauge inside. The fluid level should be checked using the front side of the gauge marked HOT ( : HOT MIN., : HOT MAX.) at fluid temperatures of 122 to 176F (50 to 80C) or using the reverse side of the gauge marked COLD ( : COLD MIN., : COLD MAX.) at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86F (0 to 30C). If the fluid is below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN PSF II or equivalent. Remove the cap and fill through the opening.

NOTE: For maximum steering system perfor- mance, adjust the fluid level at the line

at the hot fluid temperature or at the cold fluid temperature. We recom- mend contacting a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer when precise fluid level adjustment is required.

NOTICE . Do not overfill. . Use Genuine NISSAN PSF II or

equivalent.

For further brake fluid information, see the following section. ( Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants page 10-2)

WARNING . Use only new fluid from a sealed

container. Old, inferior or con- taminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of impro- per fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicles stopping ability.

. Clean the filler cap before remov- ing.

. Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II is the factory fill brake fluid. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) unit and other related parts were specially designed for this brake fluid and NISSAN cannot ensure proper operation of the vehicle if

Do-it-yourself 8-11

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID

8-12 Do-it-yourself

other non-equivalent brake fluid is used.

NOTICE Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash the surface with water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid is below the MIN line or the brake warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II fluid (or equivalent) up to the MAX line . If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be checked. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN deal- er.

WARNING Antifreeze is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked con- tainers out of the reach of children.

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add window washer fluid when the low washer fluid warning ap- pears on the vehicle information display. ( Low washer fluid warning page 2- 44) To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir tank and pour the window washer fluid into the tank

WINDOW WASHER FLUID

opening. Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturers instructions for the mixture ratio. Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of window washer fluid.

NOTICE . Do not substitute engine anti-

freeze coolant for window washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.

. Do not fill the window washer reservoir tank with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the window washer reservoir tank.

NOTE: Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturers recom- mended levels before pouring the fluid into the window washer reservoir. Do

not use the window washer reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.

. Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water.

. Make certain the terminal connec- tions are clean and securely tightened.

. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the nega- tive () battery terminal cable to pre- vent discharging it.

NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery dis- charge and potential no-start condi- tions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/ or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.

Do-it-yourself 8-13

BATTERY

8-14 Do-it-yourself

PRECAUTIONS

NOTICE When the battery cable is removed from the battery terminal, do not close either of the front doors. The automatic window adjusting func- tion will not work, and the side roof panel may be damaged.

To disconnect the negative () battery terminal, perform the procedure in the following order. Otherwise, the window and the side roof panel may contact and be damaged. 1. Close the windows. 2. Open the hood. 3. Close and lock all the doors. 4. Disconnect the negative () battery

terminal. 5. Securely close the hood. To connect the negative () battery term- inal, perform the procedure in the follow- ing order. Otherwise, the window and the side roof panel may contact and be damaged. 1. Unlock and open the driver side door.

Do not close the door. 2. Open the hood.

3. Connect the negative () battery term- inal. Then close the hood.

4. Fully open the driver side door win- dow.

5. Close the driver side door and the window.

FLUID LEVEL CHECK

WARNING . Do not expose the battery to

flames or electrical sparks. Hy- drogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. After touching a battery or bat- tery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immedi- ately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

. Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in the battery is low. Low battery fluid can cause a higher load on the battery which can generate heat, reduce battery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion.

. When working on or near a bat- tery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jew- elry.

. Battery posts, terminals and re- lated accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

Check the fluid level in each cell (Remove the battery cover if it is necessary). It should be between the UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL lines. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level to the indicator in each filler opening. Do not overfill.

1. Remove the cell plugs . 2. Add distilled water up to the UPPER

LEVEL line. If the side of the battery is not clear, check the distilled water level by looking directly above the cell; the condition indicates OK and the conditions needs more to be added.

3. Tighten cell plugs . Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require fre- quent checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, see the following section. ( Jump starting page 6-5) If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself 8-15

8-16 Do-it-yourself

1. Power steering fluid pump 2. Alternator 3. Crankshaft pulley 4. Air conditioner compressor 5. Drive belt auto-tensioner

WARNING Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position before servi- cing drive belts. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect each belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, fraying or loosen-

ess. If the belt is in poor condition or loose, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

2. Have the belts checked regularly for condition and tension in accordance with the maintenance schedule shown in the 9. Maintenance and schedules section.

WARNING Be sure the engine and the ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.

NOTICE Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.

DRIVE BELTS SPARK PLUGS

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS If replacement is required, it is recom- mended you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for servicing.

Iridium-tipped spark plugs It is not necessary to replace the iridium- tipped spark plugs as frequently as the conventional type spark plugs since they will last much longer. Follow the main- tenance schedule shown in the "9. Main- tenance and schedules" section, but do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping. Always replace spark plugs with recom- mended or equivalent ones.

Remove the retainers as illustrated and pull out the filter element . The filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace it according to the maintenance intervals. See the "9. Main- tenance and schedules" section for main- tenance intervals. When replacing the

filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.

WARNING . Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops flame if the engine back- fires. If it isnt there, and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, and be careful when working on the engine with the air cleaner removed.

. Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner re- moved. Doing so could result in serious injury.

Do-it-yourself 8-17

AIR CLEANER

8-18 Do-it-yourself

CLEANING If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or wind- shield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blade with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.

REPLACING THE WIPER BLADES Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. 1. Pull the wiper arm. 2. Push the release tab , and then

move the wiper blade down the wiper arm while pushing the release tab to remove.

3. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until a click sounds.

4. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove.

NOTICE . After wiper blade replacement,

return the wiper arm to its origi- nal position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.

. Make sure the wiper blades con- tact the glass; otherwise the arm may be damaged from wind pressure.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Be careful not to clog the washer nozzle . This may cause improper windshield

washer operation. If the nozzle is clogged, remove any objects with a needle or small pin . Be careful not to damage the nozzle.

If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recom- mended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjust- ing brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING We strongly recommend seeing a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for a brake system check if the brake pedal height does not return to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING (models without NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package) The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it will make a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound will first occur only when the brake pedal is depressed. After more wear of the brake pad, the sound will always be heard even

if the brake pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear warning sound is heard. Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional infor- mation, see the maintenance schedule shown in the "9. Maintenance and sche- dules" section.

HIGH PERFORMANCE BRAKE SYS- TEM (models without NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package) This vehicle is equipped with high perfor- mance brake pads that provide appro- priate braking force in a broad range of driving environments. Due to the material used for the brake pads, the road wheels may become more easily covered by brake dust, however this does not indi- cate that there is a malfunction. The GT-R brake pads use material that contains a lot of iron to maintain steady braking performance even in high and low temperatures. However, if the brake

Do-it-yourself 8-19

BRAKES

8-20 Do-it-yourself

system is wet and the parking brake is applied for a long time, the iron in this material may get rusty and the brake pad and disc rotor may be fixed together. This may cause noise and vibration while driving. Before parking the vehicle, dry the brake by driving on a dry road, especially after washing the vehicle or driving in rain. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer if the noise and vibration continue. Frequent hard brakingmay cause scorch- ing of the brake pads. This will require the brake pads to be replaced, even if the wear limit has not been reached. Have the brake pads and disc rotors inspected at the regular vehicle inspections. For more details, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

REPLACING THE BRAKE PADS (models without NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) package) NISSAN generally recommends to replace all four sets of brake pads and disc rotors at the same time to maintain maximum brake performance. However, replacing only the brake pads may be allowed in some cases (four wheels or only front wheels depending on the conditions). A GT-R certified tech-

nician must inspect the vehicle and determine that only the brake pads need to be replaced. In this case, replacing all brake pads and disc rotors as a set is not necessary. Note that the replacement of brake pads and the disc rotors as a set on all four wheels should be performed when a GT-R certified technician determines that this is the correct repair. If the inside of the disc rotors are cold during the winter and the surface be- comes hot due to a heavy force being applied repeatedly to the brakes, cracks may occur near the coolant hole on the surface of the disc rotor. Cracks may also occur due to a heavy force being repeat- edly applied to the brakes during high performance driving. In these cases it may be necessary to replace the disc rotors or brake pads depending on the condition of the crack. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN deal- er for replacement.

NOTE: . In order to enjoy the high perfor-

mance braking sensation as well as the sporty driving and flexibility offered by the GT-R, NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) is available. In addition, NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) has excellent dur- ability during normal driving and its light weight allows the reduction of the unsprung weight to improve the road holding grip performance.

. After high performance driving or extreme use of the brake, the com- position of the brake disc rotor will change due to brake pad wear or high temperature friction heat. Even if the brake disc rotor looks normal, it may need to be replaced.

. NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) has the same full floating structure as the standard brake system in GT-R. Therefore, the joint of the full floating structure of the disc rotor may not rust depending on the status of use. In case of rust on the joint, have NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) and the re- lated parts inspected. It is recom- mended you have the vehicle inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN

NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) (if so equipped)

dealer. . The materials used for the brake

disc rotor and brake pads for NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) are different from those used for the standard brake system in GT-R. The rotor and pads will be protected from adhesion caused by rusting. However, never park your vehicle for a long time with the brake system wet. This helps maintain the brake disc rotor and brake pads for a long time and prevents an influence on the material composition of the carbon ceramic rotor and deteriora- tion in the joint of brake disc rotors full floating structure. Especially during winter, be sure to park your vehicle with the brake disc rotor and pads dry to prevent them from being frozen and damaged in below freezing temperature conditions. The carbon ceramic brake includes air bubbles in the rotor and pads. Note that leaving them in the wet condition tends to cause adhesion due to freezing.

WARNING After an impact to the underbody or when the brake disc rotor has chip- ping or cracks, have your vehicle inspected. It is recommended you have the vehicle inspected by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Other- wise, the brake disc rotor may be damaged, which may result in a serious accident.

NOTICE . Never use brake cleaner or any

chemical agent on the brake disc rotor. Using brake cleaner or any chemical agent on the brake disc rotor may cause a decrease in durability of the brake disc rotor.

. After driving on a gravel road, such as an evacuation route, have your vehicle checked for damage to the brake disc rotor. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for this service.

. Since the carbon ceramic brake disc rotor is very hard, do not

subject it to a strong impact. When removing the tires, be care- ful not to allow the tire to inter- fere with the brake disc rotor.

REPLACING BRAKE PADS AND BRAKE DISC ROTORS . When replacing brake pads and brake

disc rotors, NISSAN recommends re- placing two sets of them at the same time. However, the brake pads can be separately replaced only when a GT-R certified technician judges that the brake disc rotors are reusable, based on a measured weight and a check for scratches and cracks.

. It is recommended that maintenance and inspection on your vehicle should be performed at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer after engaging in high performance driving. Otherwise, the peripheral parts of the brake may be damaged due to the generation of special radiant heat because of the characteristics of the material in addi- tion to brake pad wear and the deterioration in durability of the brake disc rotor.

Do-it-yourself 8-21

8-22 Do-it-yourself

Brake pad When the brake warning light illuminates to indicate brake pad wear, have the brake system checked and brake pads replaced as soon as possible. It is recom- mended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION Never drive for a long period of time when the warning light is illumi- nated. Otherwise, the brake may not function properly due to brake pad wear.

Brake disc rotor Under the following conditions, the im- mediate replacement of the brake disc rotor may be necessary. Even if it looks normal, have your vehicle inspected im- mediately. It is recommended you con- tact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for this service. . Extremely decreased braking force . Chipping or cracks on the brake disc

rotor . After an impact to tires or the periph-

ery of the wheels . Parts around the brake may have

contacted with the brake disc rotor or brake caliper due to wear.

. The metal plate of a brake pad has contacted with the surface of a brake disc rotor because the brake pad replacement period was exceeded.

. Interference between the wheel and brake disc rotor during tire installation or removal.

WARNING When a GT-R certified technician judges that a brake disc rotor should be replaced, have the disc rotor replaced.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed

to the OFF or LOCK position and the

FUSES

headlights are turned off. 2. Open the engine hood and remove

the cover on the battery and the fuse/ fusible link holder.

3. Remove the fuse/fusible link holder cover.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller that is located in the engine compart- ment fuse box.

5. If the fuse is open , replace it with a new fuses . Spare fuses are stored in the passenger compartment fuse box.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and re- paired. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Fusible links If any electrical equipment does not operate and fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links. If any of these fusible links are melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 1. Be sure the ignition switch is pushed

to the OFF or LOCK position and the

Do-it-yourself 8-23

8-24 Do-it-yourself

headlights are turned off. 2. Open the fuse box lid.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller .

4. If the fuse is open, replace it with a new fuse.

5. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and re- paired. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Extended storage fuse switch (if so equipped) To reduce battery drain, the extended storage fuse switch comes from the factory switched off. Prior to delivery of your vehicle, the switch is pushed in

(switched on) and should always remain on. If any electrical equipment does not operate, remove the extended storage fuse switch and check for an open fuse.

NOTE: If the extended storage fuse switch malfunctions, or if the fuse is open, it is not necessary to replace the switch. In this case, remove the extended sto- rage fuse switch and replace it with a new fuse of the same rating.

How to remove the extended storage fuse switch: 1. To remove the extended storage fuse

switch, be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position.

2. Be sure the headlights are turned off. 3. Remove the fuse box cover. 4. Pinch the locking tabs found on

each side of the extended storage fuse switch.

5. Pull the extended storage fuse switch straight out from the fuse box .

WARNING Be careful that batteries and other removed components are not swal- lowed by children.

NOTICE There is the possibility that the key may be damaged when the battery is replaced. It is recommended that you have the battery replaced by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Recommended battery: Lithium battery CR2032 or an equivalent. 1. Disengage the lock on the reverse side

of the Intelligent Key while pulling out the mechanical key.

2. Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver wrapped with a cloth into the slit and twist it to separate the case into the upper and lower parts.

NOTICE Because there is the risk of scratch- ing the key, wrap a cloth or similar item around the screwdriver when separating the parts. If the screwdri- ver is inserted too far into the key, it may damage the internal circuit board.

Do-it-yourself 8-25

INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-26 Do-it-yourself

3. Remove the old battery and insert a new battery with the + side facing down.

NOTICE . Be sure that the + and sides of

the battery are facing in the correct directions when the bat- tery is inserted.

. Do not touch the internal circuits or electronic terminals. Doing so may damage them.

4. Reconnect the upper and lower parts of the Intelligent Key. See a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer if you need any assistance for replace- ment.

NOTE: After replacing the battery, be sure to check and check that all Intelligent Key system functions operate correctly. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference,

and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including inter- ference that may cause undesired op- eration. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. For Canada: This device complies with Industry Ca- nada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

1. Headlight (High beam) 2. Front parking light 3. Front turn signal light 4. Daytime running light 5. Headlight (Low beam) 6. Front side marker light

7. High-mounted stop light 8. License plate light 9. Rear combination light (rear turn signal/

tail/stop/back-up) 10. Rear side marker light : Except for NISMO models : NISMO models

HEADLIGHTS Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This does not indicate that there is a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certi- fied NISSAN dealer.

Replacing LED headlight: If replacement is necessary, it is recom- mended you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Do-it-yourself 8-27

LIGHTS

8-28 Do-it-yourself

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No. Headlight assembly

low-beam* LED

high-beam* LED

Front turn signal light* 28/8 7444NA Front parking light* LED Daytime running light* LED Front side marker light* 3.8 T10 Rear combination light*

back-up 16 W16W

turn signal 21 WY21W

stop/tail LED

Rear side marker light* LED License plate light* LED Map light 8 Vanity mirror light* 2 Step light* 2.7 Trunk light* 3.4 High-mounted stop light* LED

*: It is recommended you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for replacement.

It is recommended you always check with the Parts Department at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for the latest parts infor- mation.

Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens and/or cover.

Map light

If you have a flat tire, see the following section. ( Flat tire page 6-3)

CAUTION A GT-R certified NISSAN dealer should perform a tire change. It will be necessary to reset the tire pres- sure sensors. To change the tires, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Be sure to use the tires and wheels together as a set that are designated for use with this vehicle. When tire replacement is required, repla- cing the tires as a set of four with new tires is recommended. However, if a tire is punctured or damaged, it may be possi- ble to replace only the damaged tire. Determining whether one tire or a com- plete set of tires should be replaced is based on a number of factors including tire wear and condition. It is recom- mended you contact your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. They can recommend if an individual tire or a complete set should be replaced.

Do-it-yourself 8-29

WHEELS AND TIRES

8-30 Do-it-yourself

NOTICE Make sure the tire valve stem cap is installed and that the valve stem is tight. When installing the cap, make sure to tighten the cap by hand. If a tool is used to tighten the cap, the cap may be damaged.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The system also displays pressure of all tires on the touch screen display by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel. The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure. ( Low tire pressure warning light page 2-30) ( Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) page 5-4) ( Flat tire page 6-3)

Tire inflation pressure Check the tire pressure often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F. M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the Tire and Loading Information label (if so equipped) under the Cold Tire Pressure heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side door end. Tire pressures should be checked reg- ularly because: . Most tires naturally lose air over

time. . Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.

NOTE: . You can check the pressure of all

four tires on the touch screen dis- play. See the separate Multi Func- tion Display Owners Manual.

. The tires of this vehicle are filled with nitrogen gas. When the tire pressure is low, fill the tires with

nitrogen. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for information on filling the tires with nitrogen.

. If nitrogen is not available, com- pressed air may be safely used under normal driving conditions. However, NISSAN recommends re- filling with nitrogen for maximum tire performance.

The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle hand- ling.

WARNING . Improperly inflated tires can

fail suddenly and cause an accident.

. The Gross Vehicle Weight rating (GVWR) is located on

the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. cer- tification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading In- format ion labe l ( i f so equipped). Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating condi- tions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable hand- ling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

. Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pres- sure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.

. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Im- portant Tire Safety Informa-

tion (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Book- let.

NOTE: . Use only genuine GT-R tires and

road wheels. The GT-R uses specially designed run-flat tires and matching road wheels. Use of these specially devel- oped tires and wheels provides the greatest potential for maximum performance. Genuine GT-R tires and road

wheels help achieve maximum cornering and braking perfor- mance.

Genuine GT-R tires and road wheels help achieve maximum tire durability during acceleration.

Genuine GT-R tires and road wheels help achieve maximum handling capability during perfor- mance driving.

Genuine GT-R tires and road wheels help provide road holding in the event of decreasing tire pressure and punctures.

Genuine GT-R tires and road wheels help prevent the decrease of straight-running stability caused by uneven tire wear due to high rigidity wheels and wide tires.

. The GT-R uses specially designed run-flat tires which feature an ex- tremely rigid side wall. Special tech- niques and equipment are therefore required when replacing these tires. NISSAN recommends that tire repla- cement be performed at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. Specific tire changing equipment must be used to remove the GT-R tires from the wheel and to install the GT-R tires onto the wheel. It is only possible to reuse the tires when they have no cracks and/or defor- mations on the bead portion of the tire. If the incorrect equipment is used to remove the GT-R tires from the wheel and to install the GT-R tires onto the wheel, cracks and deformation may occur on the bead portion of the tires meaning that the tires cannot be reused. It is recom- mended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer if the tires need to be removed from the wheels.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

8-32 Do-it-yourself

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL

Seating capacity: The maxi- mum number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.

Vehicle load limit: See the fol- lowing section. ( Vehicle loading information page 10- 16) Original size: The size of the tires originally installed on the vehicle at the factory.

Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are consid- ered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufac- turer to provide the best bal- ance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicles GVWR. Tire size see the following section. ( Tire labeling page 8-35) Spare tire size or compact spare tire size (if so equipped)

CHECKING THE TIRE PRESSURE 1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire. 2. Press the pressure gauge

squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pres- sure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare it to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap. 7. Check the pressure of all other

tires. 8. Check the pressure when driv-

ing the vehicle at speeds of 100 MPH (160 km/h) or higher where it is legal to do so.

NOTE: . You can check the pressure of

all four tires on the touch screen display. See the sepa- rate Multi Function Display Owners Manual.

. The tires of this vehicle are filled with nitrogen gas. When

the tire pressure is low, fill the tires with nitrogen. It is recom- mended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for in- formation on filling the tires with nitrogen.

. If nitrogen is not available, compressed air may be safely used under normal driving conditions. However, NISSAN recommends refilling with ni- trogen for maximum tire per- formance.

WARNING . Driving at high speeds, 100

MPH (160 km/h) or higher sustained where it is legal to do so, can cause tires to have excessive heat build up, which may result in a tire failure causing loss of control, crash, injuries or even death. Some high- speed rated tires require in- flation pressure adjustment

Do-it-yourself 8-33

8-34 Do-it-yourself

for high-speed operation. When speed limits and road conditions allow vehicle driving at high speeds, make sure tires are rated to sup- port high speed operation, tires are in optimal condi- tions and pressure is ad- justed to correct cold inflation pressure for high speed operation.

. Tires require adjustment to the inflation pressure when driving the vehicle at speeds of 100 MPH (160 km/h) or higher where it is legal to do so. See recommended tire inflation chart for correct operating pressure.

. After vehicle high speed op- eration has ended, readjust the tire pressure to the re- commended cold inflation pressure. (See Checking the tire pressure page 8- 33.)

Summer tires:

Size Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Front Original Tire: 255/40ZRF20 (97Y)

30 psi, 210 kPa *1 32 psi, 220 kPa *2

Rear Original Tire: 285/35ZRF20 (100Y)

29 psi, 200 kPa

*1: Except for NISMO and Track edition engineered by nismo models *2: NISMO and Track edition engineered by nismo models All-season tires:

Size Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Front Original Tire: 255/40RF20 97W

32 psi, 220 kPa

Rear Original Tire: 285/35RF20 100W

30 psi, 210 kPa

Recommended tire inflation pressures at speeds of 100 MPH (160 km/h) or higher where it is legal to do so.

Summer tires:

Size Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Front Original Tire: 255/40ZRF20 (97Y)

33 psi, 230 kPa

Rear Original Tire: 285/35ZRF20 (100Y)

33 psi, 230 kPa

All-season tires:

Size Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Front Original Tire: 255/40RF20 97W

36 psi, 250 kPa

Rear Original Tire: 285/35RF20 100W

36 psi, 250 kPa

Example

TIRE LABELING Federal law requires tire manufac- turers to place standardized infor- mation on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and de- scribes the fundamental character- istics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

Example

Tire size (example: P215/60R16 94H) 1. P: The P indicates the tire is

designed for passenger vehicles. (Not all tires have this informa- tion.)

2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in milli- meters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect ratio, gives the tires ratio of height to width.

4. R: The R stands for radial. F: The F after R indicates Self- Supporting type run-flat tire.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tires load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

Do-it-yourself 8-35

8-36 Do-it-yourself

Example

TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX) 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the De-

partment of Transportation. The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturers identification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)

5. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing, then look on the other sidewall of the tire. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must in- dicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polye- ster, and others.

Maximum permissible inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.

Maximum load rating This number indicates the maxi- mum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has

the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

Term of tubeless or tube type Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube (tube type) or not (tubeless).

The word radial The word radial is shown, if the tire has radial structure.

Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or brand name is shown. Other tire-related terminology: In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this sec- tion, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING . When changing or replacing tires,

be sure all four tires are of the same type (Examples: Summer or All Season) and construction. A GT-R certified NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with informa- tion about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.

. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

. For additional information re- garding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Cana- da) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

All-season tires NISSAN specifies all-season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year around, including snowy and icy road conditions. All-season tires are

identified by ALL SEASON on the tire sidewall.

Summer tires The GT-R summer tires are made from a specially formulated rubber to maximize the vehicles performance capabilities. Performance of summer tires is substan- tially reduced when temperatures are less than 32F (0C) so you must drive care- fully. NISSAN recommends the use of winter or all-season tires on all four wheels if you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions when tem- peratures are less than 32F (0C).

WARNING Never use summer tires when the temperature is below 4F (20C) to prevent permanent tread deforma- tion which may cause tire damage or tire failure. This may cause a loss of vehicle control which can result in serious personal injury or death.

Run-flat tires Your vehicle is equipped with run-flat tires. You can continue driving to a safe location even if they are punctured. Al-

ways use run-flat tires of the specified size on all four wheels. Mixing tire sizes or construction may reduce vehicle handling stability. If necessary, contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for assistance. Frequently check the tire pressure infor- mation on the touch screen display and adjust pressure of each tire properly. See the separate Multi Function Display Own- ers Manual. It can be difficult to tell if a run-flat tire is under-inflated or flat. Check the tire pressures as described earlier in this section. If the tire becomes under-inflated while driving, the low tire pressure warn- ing light will come on. If the tire becomes flat while driving, the low tire pressure warning light and the run-flat tire warn- ing display will come on.

Low tire pressure: If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate and the low tire pressure warning will appear in the vehi- cle information display.

Flat tire: If the vehicle is being driven with one or more flat tires, the low tire pressure warning light will illuminate continuously and a chime will sound for 10 seconds. The run-flat tire warning also appears in

Do-it-yourself 8-37

8-38 Do-it-yourself

the vehicle information display. The chime will only sound at the first indication of a flat tire and the run-flat tire warning display will illuminate continu- ously. When the flat tire warning is activated, it is recommended you have the system reset and the tire checked and replaced if necessary by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Even if the tire is inflated to the specified COLD tire pres- sure, the warning light will continue to illuminate until the system is reset. If the low tire pressure and the run-flat tire warning appears on the vehicle information display: . Do not exceed 50 MPH (80 km/h). . Increase your following distance to

allow for increased stopping dis- tances.

. Avoid sudden maneuvers, hard cor- nering and hard braking.

WARNING . Although you can continue driv-

ing with a punctured run-flat tire, remember that vehicle handling stability is reduced, which could lead to an accident and personal injury. Also, driving a long dis- tance at high speeds may da-

mage the tire. . Do not drive at speeds above 50

MPH (80 km/h) and do not drive more than 50miles (80 km) with a punctured run-flat tire. The actual distance the vehicle can be driven on a flat tire depends on outside temperature, vehicle load, road conditions and other factors.

. Drive safely at reduced speeds. Avoid hard cornering or braking, which may cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

NOTICE . Never install tire chains on a

punctured run-flat tire, as this could damage your vehicle.

. Avoid driving over any projection or pothole, as the clearance be- tween the vehicle and the ground is smaller than normal.

. Do not enter an automated car wash with a punctured run-flat tire.

. It is recommended you have the punctured tire replaced by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer as soon

as possible, as the tires perfor- mance capability is reduced.

Tires for All-Wheel Drive (AWD) If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended that all four tires be re- placed with tires of the specified size, brand, construction and tread pattern. The tire pressure and wheel alignment should also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is recommended you con- tact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

TIRE CHAINS Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are of proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer instructions. Use only SAE class S chains. Class S chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class S chains are designed to meet the SAE standard minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspen- sion or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter trac- tion device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined

using the factory equipped tire size. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage to the fenders or undercarriage. If possi- ble, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely af- fected.

NOTE: Tire chains must be installed only on the rear wheels and not on the front wheels.

CAUTION Do not use tire chains on dry roads.

NOTICE Never install tire chains on a punctu- red run-flat tire, as this could da- mage your vehicle.

Do not drive with tire chains on paved roads that are clear of snow. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation Tires cannot be rotated because your vehicle is equipped with dif- ferent sized tires in the front and rear.

1. Wear indicator 2. Wear indicator location marks. The loca-

tions are shown by , TWI, etc. depending on tire types.

Tire wear and damage

WARNING . Tires should be periodically

inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should

Do-it-yourself 8-39

8-40 Do-it-yourself

be replaced. . The original tires have built-

in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.

. Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible perso- nal injury.

. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Im- portant Tire Safety Informa- tion (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Book- let.

Replacing wheels and tires When tire replacement is required, repla- cing tires as a set of four with new tires is

recommended. However, if a tire is punc- tured or damaged, it may be possible to replace only the damaged tire. Determin- ing whether one tire or a complete set of tires should be replaced is based on a number of factors including tire wear and condition. It is recommended you contact your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. They can recommend if an individual tire or a complete set should be replaced. When replacing a tire, use the specified size, speed rating and load carrying capac i ty as or ig ina l ly equipped . ( Wheels and tires page 10-10)

NOTICE . When you replace the GT-R tires,

it is recommended that you re- place all the tires at the same time.

. The GT-R uses specially designed run-flat tires which feature an extremely rigid side wall. Special techniques and equipment are therefore required when repla- cing these tires. NISSAN recom- mends that tire replacement be performed at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

. When tires are reinstalled after

being uninstalled from the wheels, use equipment such as a leverless automatic tire changer. It is only possible to reuse the tires when they have no cracks and/or deformations on the bead portion. However, if you use a lever-type tire changer, cracks and deformation may occur on the bead portion of the tires meaning that the tires cannot be reused.

. Make sure the tire valve stem cap is installed and that the valve stem is tight. When installing the cap, make sure to tighten the cap by hand. If a tool is used to tighten the cap, the cap may be damaged.

WARNING . The use of tires other than those

specified or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted, radial or run- flat), or tread patterns can ad- versely affect the ride, braking, VDC system, handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance,

tire chain clearance, speed- ometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to acci- dents and could result in serious personal injury.

. If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off- set dimension. Wheels of a differ- ent off-set could cause prema- ture tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or cause interference with the brake discs. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. ( Wheels and tires page 10- 10)

. When a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will not be indicated, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute and remain on after the 1 minute. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for tire replacement and/or system re- setting.

. Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.

. The TPMS sensor may be da- maged if it is not handled cor- rectly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor.

. When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID registration may be re- quired. Contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for ID registration.

. Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by NISSAN. The valve stem cap may become stuck.

. Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure.

. Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.

. Never use retread tires.

. For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Information (US) or Tire Safety Information (Cana- da) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

. Always use tires of the specified type, size, brand, construction (bias, bias-belted, radial or run- flat), and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference differ- ence between tires on the front and rear axles which will cause excessive tire wear and may da- mage the transmission, transfer case and differential gears.

Wheel balance Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required. Wheel balance service should be per- formed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the rear wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Informa- tion (US) or Tire Safety Information

Do-it-yourself 8-41

8-42 Do-it-yourself

(Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.

Care of wheels ( Cleaning exterior page 7-2)

JACKING VEHICLE AND REMOVING WHEELS

WARNING . Make sure the parking brake is

securely applied and the trans- mission is shifted into the position.

. Never change tires when the ve- hicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.

. Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assis- tance.

Blocking wheels Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally oppo- site the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.

WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the tools NOTE: A jack, jack lever and rod are not equipped as standard with this vehicle. These parts are dealer options. It is recommended you contact a GT-R cer- tified NISSAN dealer about acquiring a jack, jack lever and rod. You can store a jack, jack lever and rod in the floor in front of the passengers seat.

CAUTION After using the tools, put them back in their original places. An accident may occur if you leave them in the car unsecured.

Jacking up the vehicle and re- moving the tire

WARNING . Never get under the vehicle while

it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.

. Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.

. Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.

. Never use blocks on or under the jack.

. Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack, as it may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles

with limited slip differentials. . Do not allow passengers to stay

in the vehicle while it is on the jack.

Carefully read the caution label at- tached to the jack body and the follow- ing instructions.

Jack-up point 1. Place the jack directly under the jack-

up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The jack should be used on level firm ground.

Do-it-yourself 8-43

8-44 Do-it-yourself

2. Fit the jack head into the recess of the jack-up point by turning the jack- screw clockwise with your fingers.

3. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.

4. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands as shown above.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the wheel.

NOTE: When putting a wheel on the ground, put it down with the outer side of the wheel facing up to pre- vent scratching of the wheel surface.

6. Clean any mud or dirt from the sur- face between the brake disc rotor and wheel .

7. Tighten the wheel nuts by hand by turning them clockwise until the ta- pered part of each nut lightly contacts the seat part of the wheel hole. When replacing a front wheel, make sure the hole in the wheel is aligned with the pin on the brake disc rotor.

Do-it-yourself 8-45

8-46 Do-it-yourself

8. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence illustrated ( , , , , ) until they are tight.

9. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence as illustrated. Lower the vehicle comple- tely.

WARNING . Incorrect wheel nuts or impro-

perly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.

. Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.

. Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km).

WARNING If the road wheels are hot, allow them to cool sufficiently before tigh- tening the wheel nuts. Otherwise, the wheel nuts cannot be tightened to specification.

NOTE: . As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque:

Except for NISMO models, Track edition engineered by nismo models, T-spec version and NISMO Special Edition

97 ft-lb (132 Nm) NISMO models, Track edition en- gineered by nismo models, T- spec version and NISMO Special Edition

114 ft-lb (155 Nm)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to speci- fications at each lubrication inter- val.

. Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure. COLD pressure: After the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the drivers door opening.

10. Securely store the jacking equipment in the vehicle.

WHEEL LOCK NUTS (if so equipped) In order to prevent theft, the specially designed wheel lock nut is installed on each wheel. The wheel lock nut cannot be removed with commonly used tools. When removing tires, use the lock key provided with your vehicle.

Removing the wheel lock nut To remove the wheel lock nut, use the lock key stored under the passengers side floor. 1. Insert the lock key to the wheel lock

nut. 2. To remove the wheel lock nut, turn

the lock key counterclockwise using the wheel nut wrench.

CAUTION . Do not use a power tool to re-

move the wheel lock nuts. . Tighten the wheel lock nuts to the

same tightening torque as the normal wheel nuts. ( Jacking up the vehicle and removing the tire page 8-43)

NOTE: . The wheel lock nut has an individual

code. A lock key which does not match the individual code cannot remove the wheel lock nut. If you lose the wheel lock key, it is recom- mended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer immediately.

. Keep the key code card in a safe place. To purchase a lock key, con- tact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer with your original code on the key code card.

. When you ask for a service at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer, make sure to keep the lock key in the vehicle. Otherwise, tires cannot be removed and any service requiring the re- moval of the wheels cannot be performed.

Do-it-yourself 8-47

8-48 Do-it-yourself

MEMO

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirement .................................................... 9-2 Scheduled maintenance ................................................. 9-2 General maintenance ........................................................ 9-2 Where to go for service ................................................... 9-2

Determining the proper maintenance interval .... 9-3 General maintenance ............................................................... 9-3

Explanation of maintenance items ........................ 9-3 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items .... 9-6

Emission control system maintenance ............... 9-6

Chassis and body maintenance ............................. 9-7 Additional maintenance items ......................................... 9-8 Setting guide of wheel alignment depending on the customers driving ................................................. 9-21 Tire replacement record .................................................... 9-23 Transmission assembly/parts replacement record ............................................................... 9-26 Maintenance log and records ....................................... 9-28

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Some day-to-day and regular mainte- nance is essential to maintain your vehi- cle good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and engine performance. It is the owners responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is per- formed. As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives the proper maintenance care. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE For your convenience, both required and optional scheduled maintenance items are described and listed in this section. You must refer to that guide to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your vehicle at regular intervals.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these pro- cedures regularly as prescribed. Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE GT-R certified NISSAN dealers are re- quired to have additional training and equipment and are the only NISSAN deal- ers authorized to perform warranty work on key vehicle performance systems such as engine, transmission, suspension and brakes. If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, it is re- commended that you have the systems checked and serviced by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe- cialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information through tech- nical bulletins, service tips, and in-dealer information systems. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, it is recommended that you ask your NISSAN dealer where the nearest NISSAN Certified Collision Center is located, or go to http:// collision.nissanusa.com. You can be confident that a GT-R certified NISSAN dealers service department per-

forms the best job to meet the main- tenance requirements on your vehicle. To find a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer near you, call 1-866-668-1GTR in the US or 1-800-387-0122 in Canada, or go to www. gtrnissan.com/.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENT

Depending on your driving habits and local conditions, you should follow one of the two maintenance schedules listed below for scheduled maintenance. In addition to Schedule 1 maintenance, ad- ditional maintenance must be performed for optimum performance. Use these guidelines to determine which mainte- nance schedule to use: Schedule 1 (Every 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first) Schedule 1 features 6,000-mile (10,000 km) service intervals. Use Schedule 1 if you primarily operate your vehicle under any of these conditions: . Repeated short trips of less than 5

miles (8 km) in normal temperatures or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperatures

. Stop-and-go traffic in hot weather or lowspeed driving for long distances

. Driving in dusty conditions or on rough, muddy, or salt-spread roads

Schedule 2 (Every 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or 6 months, whichever comes first) Schedule 2 features 6,000-mile (10,000 km) service intervals; with Schedule 2 fewer maintenance items are regularly checked or replaced than with Schedule 1. Generally, Schedule 2 applies only to

highway driving in temperate conditions. Use Schedule 2 only if you primarily operate your vehicle under conditions other than those listed in Schedule 1.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as pre- scribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smell, be sure to check for the cause and have it checked promptly. In addition, it is re- commended you notify a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required. ( Maintenance precautions page 8-3)

EXPLANATION OF MAINTENANCE ITEMS Additional information on the following items with * is found later in the 8. Do- it-yourself section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified. Doors and engine hood: Check that all doors and the engine hood, operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released. When driving in areas using road salt or

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

DETERMINING THE PROPER MAINTENANCE INTERVAL GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

other corrosive materials, check lubrica- tion frequently. Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim. Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary. Tire rotation*: Tires cannot be rotated because your vehicle is equipped with different sized tires in the front and rear. Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

NOTE: . You can check the pressure of all

four tires on the touch screen dis- play. See the separate Multi Func- tion Display Owners Manual.

. The tires of this vehicle are filled with nitrogen gas. When the tire pressure is low, fill the tires with nitrogen. It is recommended you

contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for information on filling the tires with nitrogen.

. If nitrogen is not available, com- pressed air may be safely used under normal driving conditions. However, NISSAN recommends re- filling with nitrogen for maximum tire performance.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components: Replace grom- met seal of transmitter in TPMS, when replacing each tire by reaching the wear limit. Tire, wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed. For additional information regarding tires, refer to Important Tire Safety Informa- tion (US) or Tire Safety Information (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet. Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other

damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility. It is recommended that you have a damaged windshield repaired by a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer, or a NISSAN Certified Collision Center. To locate a collision center in your area, refer to http://collision.nissanusa.com. Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as when performing scheduled mainte- nance, cleaning the vehicle, etc. Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Transmission mechanism: On a fairly steep hill, check that your vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the position without applying any brakes. Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, it is recommended you see

a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer immedi- ately. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal. Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied. Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking brake needs to be adjusted, it is recommended you see a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, an- chors, adjuster and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage. Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure they operate smoothly and that all latches lock securely in every position. Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering conditions, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises. Warning lights and chimes: Make sure that all warning lights and chimes are operating properly. Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets prop-

erly and in sufficient quantity when oper- ating the heater or air conditioner. Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel). Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Vehicles operated in high tempera- tures or under severe condition require frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE: Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery dis- charge and potential no-start condi- tions such as: 1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/ or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health. Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir. Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold. Engine drive belts*: Make sure that no belt is frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the engine. Wait at least 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan before checking the oil. Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes in the engine compartment, it is recommended you immediately have the exhaust sys- tem inspected. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. ( Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) page 5-3) Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immedi- ately.

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc. Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections. Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances, otherwise rust will form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, being careful to clean those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate. ( Underbody page 7-3) Windshield washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance log indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service. In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle requires that some items be checked during normal day-to-day op- eration. Refer to General mainte- nance page 9-3. Maintenance items and intervals marked with * are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are not required to perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission war- ranty or manufacturer recall liability. When applicable, additional information can be found in the 8. Do-it-yourself section of this manual.

NOTE: NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-OEM approved aftermarket flush- ing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar- ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap- proved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by

NISSAN. For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to

Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants page 10-2 of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or cracking. Replace any damaged drive belts. Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driv- ing for prolonged periods in dusty condi- tions, check/replace the filter more frequently. Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equiva- lent with the proper mixture. (Refer to

Engine cooling system page 8-6 to determine the proper mixture for your area.)

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval of the coolant. Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. Check engine oil level every 1,800 miles (3,000 km) and add as needed. For recommended oil grade and viscosity refer to Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants page 10-2. Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if valve noise increases. Adjust valve clearance if necessary. Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. Fuel filter Maintenance-free item. Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connec- tions for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Throttle chamber deposits*: Visually inspect the throttle chamber for deposits and clean as necessary. Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs of the same type as originally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODYMAINTENANCE Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any deterio- rated or damaged parts immediately. Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or da- maged parts immediately. Replace all four sets of brake pads and disc rotors at the same time to maintain maximum brake performance. Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deteriora- tion, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary. In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified intervals. When driv- ing for prolonged periods in dusty condi-

tions, replace the filter more frequently. Measurement and adjustment of wheel alignment: Manage the wheel alignment by measur- ing and adjusting at specified intervals. Propeller shaft(s): Check for damage, looseness, and grease leakage. Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness, and leak- age of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, inspect more frequently. Tire rotation: Tires cannot be rotated as front tires are different size from rear tires. Transmission oil, differential oil: Replace fluid at specified intervals. Vi- sually inspect for signs of leakage at specified intervals. Transmission settings: To keep the best condition for transmis- sion, this inspection allows learning of the clutch touch point and the engaged gear position and neutral position for each gear.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

Additional maintenance items for perfor- mance driving - 2021 GT-R maintenance record list (Inspection before and after driving)

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-17

9-18 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-19

9-20 Maintenance and schedules

Except For NISMO and Track edition engineered by nismo models The wheel alignment can be adjusted. We recommend that you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for further details.

. Toe-out can cause uneven tire wear or damage to areas inside the tires due to high heat. Be sure to have the wheel alignment toe-in setting checked and adjusted. We recom- mend that you contact your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer for this service.

. The toe changes, depending on vehi- cle attitude changes or the perma- nent set of bushings. Accordingly, the state of the front wheels change to toe-out and the rear wheels, toe in.

. For the above reasons, be sure to adjust to toe-in when engaging in high performance driving on a race- track. (Toe-out is not covered by the warranty.)

Maintenance and schedules 9-21

SETTING GUIDE OF WHEEL ALIGNMENT DEPENDING ON THE CUSTOMERS DRIVING

9-22 Maintenance and schedules

For NISMO and Track edition engineered by nismo models . Toe-out can cause uneven tire wear or damage to areas inside the tires due to high heat. Be sure to have the wheel alignment toe-in setting checked and adjusted by your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer before any performance driving on closed circuit tracks. Obey all traffic laws when on public roads. Toe-in specification Front: 0.059 in (1.5 mm) Rear: 0.079 in (2.0 mm)

. The toe changes, depending on vehi- cle attitude changes or the perma- nent set of bushings. Accordingly, the state of the front wheels change to toe-out and the rear wheels, toe in.

. For the above reasons, be sure to adjust to toe-in when engaging in high performance driving on a race- track. (Toe-out is not covered by the warranty.)

The GT-R uses specially designed run-flat tires and matching road wheels. Use of these specially developed tires and wheels provides the greatest potential for maximum performance.

NOTICE . When you replace the GT-R tires,

it is recommended that you re- place all the tires at the same time.

. The GT-R uses specially designed run-flat tires which feature an extremely rigid side wall. Special techniques and equipment are therefore required when repla- cing these tires. NISSAN recom- mends that tire replacement be performed at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

Maintenance and schedules 9-23

TIRE REPLACEMENT RECORD

9-24 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-25

9-26 Maintenance and schedules

When replacing the transmission assembly, be sure to record the new serial number in the space provided. When replacing the transmission assembly

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY/PARTS REPLACEMENT RECORD

When replacing the transmission parts

Maintenance and schedules 9-27

9-28 Maintenance and schedules

The following Maintenance Log has been compiled by NISSAN to assist you in performing the recommended mainte- nance services and keeping appropriate records of services performed. The main- tenance log is composed of the log for GT-R special inspections and the log for scheduled maintenance. Along with the related repair invoices, receipts, and other such records, a properly documented maintenance history could enhance the value of your vehicle should you ever wish to sell it. The services listed represent the minimal NISSAN recommended require- ments for each time/ mileage interval, up to 96,000 miles (160,000 km) / 96 months. Abbreviations []: Performed based on the mileage only. <>: Performed based on the number of months only.

MAINTENANCE LOG AND RECORDS

Maintenance and schedules 9-29

9-30 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-31

9-32 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-33

9-34 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-35

9-36 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-37

9-38 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-39

9-40 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-41

9-42 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-43

9-44 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-45

9-46 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-47

9-48 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-49

9-50 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-51

9-52 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-53

9-54 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-55

9-56 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance and schedules 9-57

9-58 Maintenance and schedules

MEMO

10 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants ................................... 10-2

Fuel information ................................................................. 10-4 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ....... 10-6 Air conditioning system refrigerant and oil recommendations ...................................................... 10-7

Specifications ............................................................................... 10-9 Engine ......................................................................................... 10-9 Wheels and tires ............................................................. 10-10 Dimensions ......................................................................... 10-11

When traveling or registering in another country .................................................................... 10-12 Vehicle identification ......................................................... 10-12

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate .... 10-12 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) ............................................................ 10-12 Engine serial number .................................................. 10-13 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ............ 10-13 Emission control information label ................. 10-13 Tire and loading information label .................. 10-14 Air conditioner specification label .................... 10-14

Installing front license plate ........................................ 10-16 Vehicle loading information ........................................ 10-16

Terms .................................................................................... 10-16 Vehicle load capacity ............................................... 10-18 Loading tips ..................................................................... 10-18 Measurement of weights ...................................... 10-19

Towing a trailer ..................................................................... 10-19 Flat towing ................................................................................ 10-20 Uniform tire quality grading ....................................... 10-20

Treadwear ......................................................................... 10-20 Traction AA, A, B and C .......................................... 10-20 Temperature A, B and C ........................................ 10-20

Emission control system warranty ........................ 10-21 Reporting safety defects ............................................... 10-21 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test (US only) ........................................................................... 10-22 Event Data Recorders (EDR) ........................................ 10-23 Vehicle status data recorder (VSDR) .................... 10-24

Handling of data .......................................................... 10-24 Owners Manual/Service Manual order information ................................................................ 10-24

10-2 Technical and consumer information

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure instructed in the 8. Do-it-yourself section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/LubricantsMetric Measure

US Measure

Imperial Measure

Fuel 73.8 L 19-1/2 gal 16-1/4 gal ( Fuel information page 10-4) Engine oil* With oil filter change 5.0 L 5-1/4 qt 4-3/8 qt Mobil 1 (0W-40) or equivalent

Mobil 1 (0W-40) (100% synthetic) is the factory fill oil. The VR38 engine with its plasma-sprayed bores was developed using this oil. NISSAN cannot ensure proper engine opera- tion and durability if other 0W-40 non-equivalent synthetic oil is used. If Mobil 1 (0W-40) or equivalent is not available, Mobil 1 (10W-40) (100% synthetic) or equivalent may be used; however, some performance loss may be noticed. For additional information, see the following section. ( Engine oil and oil filter recommendation page 10- 6) The recommended oil capacity level is 0.39 in (10 mm) (0.5 L) below the H mark on the engine oil dipstick. For additional information, see the following section. ( Engine oil page 8-9)

Drain and refill *For additional infor- mation, see

Changing en- gine oil and filter page 8-10. Without oil filter

change 4.5 L 4-3/4 qt 4 qt

Engine coolant For NISMO models With reservoir 11.7 L 12-3/8 qt 10-1/4 qt Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent For additional information, see the following section. ( Engine cooling system page 8-6)

Reservoir 1.8 L 1-7/8 qt 1-5/8 qt Except for NISMO models With reservoir 11.3 L 12 qt 10 qt

Reservoir 1.4 L 1-1/2 qt 1-1/4 qt Transmission oil (Drain and refill) 9.4 L 10 qt 8-1/4 qt Genuine NISSAN Transmission Oil R35 Special or equivalent

The use of fluids and lubricants other than the specified may cause vehicle malfunctions and result in non-warranty vehicle repairs. All of the fluid cannot be removed when servicing the transmission. The actual refill amount may be less than shown.

Differential oil (Drain and refill)

Front 0.65 L 1-3/8 pt 1-1/8 pt Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil R35 COMPETITION type 2189E or equivalent The use of fluids and lubricants other than the specified may cause vehicle malfunctions and result in non-warranty vehicle repairs.

Rear 1.35 L 2-7/8 pt 2-3/8 pt

Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

Genuine NISSAN PSF II or equivalent DEXRONTM VI type ATF or equivalent may also be used.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/LUBRICANTS

Fluid type Capacity (approximate)

Recommended Fluids/LubricantsMetric Measure

US Measure

Imperial Measure

Brake fluid Refill to the proper oil level according to the instructions in the 8. Do-it-yourself section.

Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II or equivalent Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid R35 Special II is the factory fill brake fluid. The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) unit and other related parts were specially designed for this brake fluid and NISSAN cannot ensure the best performance and proper operation of the vehicle if other non-equivalent brake fluid is used.

Multi-purpose grease NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) Air conditioning system refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)

For additional information, see the following section. ( Air conditioner specification label page 10-14)

Air conditioning system oil NISSAN A/C System Oil VC100YF (PAG) or equivalent Window washer fluid Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3

10-4 Technical and consumer information

FUEL INFORMATION

VR38 engine Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 93 AKI (Anti- Knock Index) number (Research octane number 98) to maximize vehicle perfor- mance. If the premium gasoline specified above is not available, you may use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96), but you may notice a decrease in performance. Do not use gasoline with an octane rating lower than 91 AKI (Research octane num- ber 96).

NOTICE . Using a fuel other than that spe-

cified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect warranty cover- age.

. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.

. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in

your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control de- vices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

. Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopen- tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emis- sions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

. U.S. government regulations re- quire ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

. NISSAN recommends using fuels

that contain no alcohol. However, fuels containing up to 10% alco- hol may be used, if necessary. To avoid serious engine damage due to increased cylinder tempera- tures, do not use fuels that con- tain more alcohol than indicated in this section. Also, do not use fuel additives, fuel stabilizers or fuel deicers that contain alcohol.

Gasoline specifications NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is avail- able. Many of the automobile manufac- turers developed this specification to improve emission system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi- cations.

Reformulated gasoline Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts to- wards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when avail-

able.

Gasoline containing oxygenates Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- ing oxygenates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recom- mend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compat- ibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager. If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel sys- tem damage. . The fuel should be unleaded and

have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.

. If an oxygenate-blend, excepting a methanol blend, is used, it should contain no more than 10% oxyge- nate. (MTBE may, however, be added up to 15%.)

. E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxygenate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle and should not be used. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered under the NISSAN new vehicle limited war- ranty.

. If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol and wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop- erly formulated with the appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance malfunctions. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehi- cles.

If any undesirable driveability problems such as engine stalling or hard hot starting are experienced after using oxy- genate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

NOTICE Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxy- genates can cause paint damage.

E-15 fuel E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gaso- line. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. Do not use E- 15 in your vehicle. U.S. government reg- ulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percen- tage for that region.

E-85 fuel E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gaso- line. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbre- viation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga- nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle perfor- mance, including the emissions control

Technical and consumer information 10-5

10-6 Technical and consumer information

system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NOTICE NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (Example: fuel injector cleaner, in- take valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may con- tain active solvent or similar ingre- dients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended above can cause persistent, heavy spark knock. (Spark knock is a metallic rap- ping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persis- tent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level

roads, it is recommended you have a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condi- tion is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible. Incorrect ignition timing will result in knocking, after-run or overheating. This in turn may cause excessive fuel con- sumption or damage to the engine. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, it is recommended you have your vehicle checked at a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer or other competent service facility. However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is no cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RE- COMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality, and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. ( Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants page 10-2) Mobil 1 (0W-40) (100% synthetic) is the

factory fill oil. The VR38 engine with its plasma-sprayed bores was developed using this oil. NISSAN cannot ensure proper engine operation and durability if other 0W-40 non-equivalent synthetic oil is used. If Mobil 1 (0W-40) or equivalent is not available, Mobil 1 (10W-40) (100% synthetic) or equivalent may be used; however, some performance loss may be noticed.

NOTICE Using an engine oil other than that specified could adversely affect the engine. See the 2021 NISSAN GT-R Warranty Information Booklet for details and exclusions.

Oil additives NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are fol- lowed. Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important that the engine oil viscosity be selected based on the tem- peratures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious en- gine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter Your new vehicle is equipped with a high- quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. NISSAN recommends to use the genuine NISSAN oil filter for the reason described in change intervals.

Change intervals The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Oil and filter other than the specified quality, or oil and filter change intervals longer than recommended could reduce engine life. Damage to engines caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not cov- ered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranties. Your engine was filled with a high quality

engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle. Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes. . repeated short distance driving at

cold outside temperatures . driving in dusty conditions . extensive idling . stop and go rush hour traffic Refer to the "9. Maintenance and sche- dules" section of this manual for the maintenance schedule.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM RE- FRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMEN- DATIONS The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and NISSAN A/C System Oil VC100YF (PAG) or the exact equivalents.

CAUTION The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.

The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earths ozone layer. Although this refrig- erant does not affect the earths atmo- sphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air condi- tioner system service. Air conditioner system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians to ensure proper and safe operation (SAE J2845). Your GT-R certified NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant. Only new and SAEJ2842 certified evaporator(s) shall be used as replacement parts. A damaged or leaking air conditioning evaporator shall never be repaired or replaced with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle. To replace a da- maged or leaking evaporator, use only new and SAE J2842 certified evaporator

Technical and consumer information 10-7

10-8 Technical and consumer information

(s). It is recommended that you visit a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer when servi- cing your air conditioner system.

ENGINE

Model VR38

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-slanted at 60 Bore Stroke in (mm) 3.760 3.480 (95.5 88.4) Displacement cu in (cm3) 231.83 (3,799) Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6

Idle speed rpm No adjustment is necessary. Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) degree/rpm

Spark plug Standard DILKAR8A8

Spark plug gap (Normal) in (mm) 0.031 (0.8)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Technical and consumer information 10-9

SPECIFICATIONS

10-10 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire

Type Size Pressure PSI (kPa) [Cold]

Summer Front: 255/40ZRF20 (97Y)

30 (210)*1 32 (220)*2

Rear: 285/35ZRF20 (100Y) 29 (200)

All-season Front: 255/40RF20 97W 32 (220)

Rear: 285/35RF20 100W 30 (210)

*1: Except for NISMO and Track edition engineered by nismo models *2: NISMO and Track edition engineered by nismo models Make sure to use the tires for GT-R. See the 2021 Warranty Information Booklet for the applicable exclusions.

Road wheel

Type Size Offset in (mm)

Aluminum Front: 20 9-1/2J*1

20 10J*2 1.77 (45)*1 1.61 (41)*2

Rear: 20 10-1/2J 0.98 (25)

*1: Except for NISMO models, Track edition engineered by nismo models, T-spec version and NISMO Special Edition *2: NISMO models, Track edition engineered by nismo models, T-spec version and NISMO Special Edition Make sure to use the road wheels for GT-R. See the 2021 Warranty Information Booklet for the applicable exclusions.

DIMENSIONS in (mm)

Overall length 185.4 (4,710)*1 184.6 (4,690)*2

Overall width 74.6 (1,895)

Overall height 53.9 (1,370)

Front tread 62.6 (1,590)*3 63.0 (1,600)*4

Rear tread 63.0 (1,600)

Wheelbase 109.4 (2,780)

*1: Except for NISMO models *2: NISMO models *3: Except for NISMOmodels, Track edition engineered by nismo models, T-spec ver- sion and NISMO Special Edition *4: NISMO models, Track edition engi- neered by nismo models and, T-spec version and NISMO Special Edition

Technical and consumer information 10-11

10-12 Technical and consumer information

If you plan to travel in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicles engine. Using fuel with too low an octane rating may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations. The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety stan- dards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehi- cle specifications may differ. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or dis- trict and registered, its modifications, transportation, and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE The vehicle identification number plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number) The number is stamped as shown in the engine compartment.

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING IN ANOTHER COUNTRY VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICA- TION LABEL The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle informa- tion, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL INFORMA- TION LABEL The emission control information label is attached as shown.

Technical and consumer information 10-13

10-14 Technical and consumer information

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label affixed to the door end as illustrated.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL The air conditioner specification label is attached as shown.

Air conditioner specification label symbols: Symbol Name Reference Graphic Caution ISO 7000 0434

Air Conditioning System (MAC)

ISO 2575 D01

MAC System Lubricant Type (PAGPOE)

Requires Registered Techni- cian to Service MAC System

Flammable Refrigerant

Technical and consumer information 10-15

10-16 Technical and consumer information

Make sure that the two POP nuts as illustrated are enclosed in the plastic bag. They are used for front license plate installation. To install the front license plate to your vehicle, it is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer.

WARNING . It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside the vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be ser- iously injured or killed.

. Do not allow people to ride in any area of vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.

TERMS It is important to familiarize your- self with the following terms before loading your vehicle: . Curb Weight (actual weight of

your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard and optional equipment, fluids or emergency tools. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo. . GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) -

curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.

. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- ing) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trai- ler tongue load and any other optional equipment. This infor- mation is located on the F.M.V.S. S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

. GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

. Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - max- imum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Infor- mation label.

. Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the weight of total occupants weight sub- tracted from the load limit.

Technical and consumer information 10-17

10-18 Technical and consumer information

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as The combined weight of occupants and cargo on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as Seating Ca- pacity on the Tire and Loading Information label. To get the combined weight of occupants and cargo, add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the illustration.

Steps for determining correct load limit 1. Locate the statement The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicles placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For ex- ample, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehi- cle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) or 640 340 (5 x 70) = 300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter- mine how this reduces the avail- able cargo and luggage load

capacity of your vehicle. Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. ( Measurement of weights page 10-19) Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. See the Tire and Loading Information label.

LOADING TIPS . The GVWmust not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the F.M. V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la- bel.

. Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.

WARNING . Properly secure all cargo to

help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.

. Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.

. Overloading could not only shorten the life of your ve- hicle and the tires, but also could lead to hazardous ve- hicle handling and long braking distance. This may cause a premature tire mal- function, which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Repairs due to overloading the vehicle are not covered by the vehi- cles warranty. (See the 2021 NISSAN GT-R Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.)

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certifica- tion label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

Technical and consumer information 10-19

TOWING A TRAILER

10-20 Technical and consumer information

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recrea- tional vehicle, such as a motor home. DO NOT tow the GT-R with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts. Tow the GT-R with all four wheels off the ground. ( Towing your vehicle page 6-9)

DOT (Department Of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety require- ments in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where ap- plicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera- ture A

TREADWEAR The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart sig- nificantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

TRACTION AA, A, B AND C The traction grades, from highest to low- est, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor- mance.

WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brak- ing traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hy- droplaning, or peak traction charac- teristics.

TEMPERATURE A, B AND C The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under con- trolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-

FLAT TOWING UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

sponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- dard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Exces- sive speed, under-inflation, or exces- sive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build- up and possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN is covered by specific emis- sion warranties: For the United States, see the 2021 NISSAN GT-R Warranty Information Book- let. For Canada, see the Warranty and Road- side Assistance Information Booklet. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa- tion Booklet (Warranty and Roadside Assistance Information (Canada only)), or it has become lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to: . NISSAN Division

NISSAN North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003

. NISSAN Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

For USA If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the Na- tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad- ministration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN. If NHTSA receives similar com- plaints, it may open an investiga- tion, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual pro- blems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1- 888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153); go to http://www.safercar. gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

10-22 Technical and consumer information

You may notify NISSAN by contact- ing our Consumer Affairs Depart- ment, toll-free, at 1-866-668-1GTR (1-866-668-1487). For Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans- port Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN. If Transport Canada receives com- plaints, it may open an investiga- tion, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN con- duct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems be- tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN. You may contact Transport Cana- das Defect Investigations and Re- calls Division toll free at 1-800-333- 0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-

Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lan- g=eng (English speakers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec- Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx? lang=fra (French speakers). Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be ob- tained from Transport Canadas Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www. tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak- ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiterou- tiere (French speakers). To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Con- sumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

A vehicle equipped with All-Wheel Drive (AWD) should never be tested using a two wheel dynamometer (such as the dynam- ometers used by some states for emis- sions testing), or similar equipment. Make sure you inform test facility personnel that your vehicle is equipped with AWD before it is placed on a dynamometer. Using the wrong test equipment may result in transmission damage or unex- pected vehicle movement which could result in serious vehicle damage or per- sonal injury. Due to legal requirements in some states/ areas, your vehicle may be required to be in what is called the ready condition for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the emission control system. The vehicle is set to the ready condition when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle. If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a not ready condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicles inspection/mainte- nance test readiness condition. Push the ignition switch to the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST (US only)

Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 sec- onds, the I/M test condition is not ready. If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is ready. It is recommended you contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer to set ready condition or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obsta- cle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: . How various systems in your vehicle

were operating; . Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fas- tened;

. How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

. Sounds are not recorded. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perso- nal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash

location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely ac- quired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforce- ment, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as other- wise required or permitted by law.

Technical and consumer information 10-23

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

10-24 Technical and consumer information

The Vehicle Status Data Recorder (VSDR) is different from the Event Data Recorder described in Event Data Recorder in this section. The VSDR is not a crash-activated device, but it records and accumulates vehicle data while driving. Examples are: . Vehicle operating information such as

the wheel speeds of the front and rear wheels

. Engine control information such as the engine speed and boost pressure

The VSDR always records and stores vehicle operating data between periodic inspections, which can assist and be used for servicing, diagnosing and performing warranty repairs. The VSDR does not record sounds, con- versations or images. To read data recorded by the VSDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the VSDR is needed.

HANDLING OF DATA NISSAN and third parties affiliated with NISSAN can acquire and use the data recorded by the VSDR in order to confirm the part replacement history to improve the quality of NISSAN vehicles. With the exception of the following cases,

neither NISSAN nor third parties affiliated with NISSAN, shall disclose or offer the acquired data to other non-affiliated third parties. . With the agreement of the vehicle

owner . When legally required to, such as

when ordered by a court of law, etc. . When offering processed data so that

neither the vehicle owner nor the vehicle is identified, to research cen- ters for statistical analysis, etc.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair informa- tion for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer. Genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals can also be purchased. For USA: For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Service Manuals,

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuine NISSAN Owners Manuals, con- tact:

1-800-247-5321 For Canada: To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owners Manual for this model year and prior, please contact a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a GT-R certified NISSAN dealer in your area call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800- 387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN repre- sentative will assist you.

VEHICLE STATUS DATA RECORDER (VSDR) OWNERS MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

MEMO

Technical and consumer information 10-25

10-26 Technical and consumer information

MEMO

MEMO

Technical and consumer information 10-27

10-28 Technical and consumer information

MEMO

11 Index A

Active noise cancellation ...................................... 5-60 Active sound enhancement ............................... 5-60 Additional maintenance items ................... GTR-13

Maintenance record list ..................................... 9-8 Air cleaner ......................................................................... 8-17 Air conditioner ............................................................... 4-11

Air conditioner operation .............................. 4-10 Air conditioner specification label ...... 10-14 Air conditioning system refrigerant and oil recommendations ............................ 10-7

Air fresheners ..................................................................... 7-6 All-season tires ....................................................... GTR-11 All-Wheel Drive .............................................................. 5-43 All-Wheel Drive driving safety precautions ......................................................... 5-9 Anti-freeze ........................................................................ 5-57 Anti-lock Braking System ..................................... 5-53 Anti-lock Braking System warning ............... 2-40 Apple CarPlay .................................................................. 4-2 Audible reminders ...................................................... 2-34 Automatic

Automatic door lock system ......................... 3-5 Average fuel consumption and speed ...... 2-17 Avoiding body damage .................................... GTR-12 Avoiding collision and rollover ............................. 5-7 AWD clutch high temperature warning .... 2-40 AWD system characteristics ............................... 5-45 AWD system warning .............................................. 2-41 AWD warning light ..................................................... 5-43

B

Battery .................................................................. 5-57, 8-13 Intelligent Key battery discharge ............ 5-12 Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator ............................................ 2-48 Intelligent Key battery replacement ..... 8-25

Before starting the engine .................................. 5-13 Body repair ................................................................ GTR-12 Booster seats ................................................................. 1-30 Brake

Brake assist .............................................................. 5-53 Brake fluid ................................................ GTR-5, 8-11 Brake pad wear warning ............................... 8-19 Brake system .......................................................... 5-52 Brakes ........................................................................... 8-19 High performance brake system ............ 8-19 Low brake fluid warning ................................ 2-39 Parking brake .......................................................... 5-34 Parking brake break-in ................................... 5-52 Parking brake release warning ................. 2-39 Replacing the brake pads ............................. 8-20 Self-adjusting brakes ........................................ 8-19

Brake disc rotor ........................................................... 8-22 Brake dust .................................................................. GTR-28 Brake pad .................................................................... GTR-16 Brake pad and disc rotor .................................. GTR-6 Brake pad break-in procedure .................. GTR-16 Brake system information ............................. GTR-27 Brakes ...................................................... GTR-19, GTR-22 Braking precautions ................................................. 5-52

Break-in schedule .................................. GTR-10, 5-40

C

Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants ..................... 10-2 Car phone or CB radio ........................................... 4-15 Changing

Changing engine coolant ................................ 8-8 Changing engine oil and filter ................... 8-10 Changing wheels and tires .......................... 8-39

Checking Checking engine coolant level ..................... 8-8 Checking engine oil level .................................. 8-9 Checking lights ...................................................... 2-26 Checking the tire pressure .......................... 8-33

Child restraints ............................................................. 1-15 Child safety ...................................................................... 1-13 Chrome parts ..................................................................... 7-4 Cleaning ............................................................................. 8-18 Cleaning exterior ............................................................. 7-2 Cleaning interior .............................................................. 7-5 Closing the fuel-filler door ................................... 3-25 Closing the hood ........................................................ 3-19 Coat hooks ...................................................................... 2-66 Cockpit .................................................................................... 2-4 Cold weather driving ............................................... 5-57 Console box .................................................................... 2-66 Cool down .................................................................. GTR-14 Coolant

Changing engine coolant ................................ 8-8

11-2

Checking engine coolant level ..................... 8-8 Draining of coolant water ............................ 5-57 Engine coolant temperature gauge ........ 2-8

Coolant level and mixture ratio ................ GTR-15 Corrosion protection ................................................... 7-9 Cracks on brake pad ......................................... GTR-27 Cracks on the disc rotors .............................. GTR-27 Cruise control ................................................. 2-17, 5-35 Cruise control operations .................................... 5-37 Cruise control system warning ....................... 2-43 Cup holders ..................................................................... 2-63 Current fuel consumption ................................... 2-16

D

Determining the proper maintenance interval ................................................... 9-3 Differential oil .............................................................. GTR-5 Dimensions ................................................................... 10-11 Distance to empty ..................................................... 2-18 Door pocket .................................................................... 2-65 Door/trunk open warning ................................... 2-44 Doors ........................................................................................ 3-4 Draining of coolant water ................................... 5-57 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ................. 5-9 Drive belts ......................................................................... 8-16 Drive computer ............................................................. 2-16 Driving

All-Wheel Drive driving safety precautions ................................................. 5-9

Brake system (NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake)) ............................... GTR-28, 8-20 Cold weather driving ........................................ 5-57 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ......... 5-9 Driving on snow or ice .................................... 5-57 Driving the vehicle .............................................. 5-15 Driving tips ................................................................ 5-21 Precautions when starting and driving ................................................................... 5-3

Driving after replacing tires .......................... GTR-12 Dry carbon fiber parts ........ GTR-8, GTR-29, 7-5 Dual clutch transmission ................. GTR-29, 5-15

E

E-Call (SOS) Button .................................................... 2-61 Elapsed time and trip odometer .................... 2-18 Emergency engine shut off ..................... 5-12, 6-3 Emergency trunk lid release .............................. 3-22 Emission control information label ........... 10-13 Emission control system warranty ............ 10-21 Engine .................................................................................. 10-9

Before starting the engine ........................... 5-13 Changing engine coolant ................................ 8-8 Changing engine oil and filter ................... 8-10 Checking engine coolant level ..................... 8-8 Checking engine oil level .................................. 8-9 Emergency engine shut off ............. 5-12, 6-3 Engine block heater .......................................... 5-58 Engine compartment ....................................... 8-22

Engine compartment check locations ........................................................ 8-4 Engine coolant temperature gauge ........ 2-8 Engine cooling system ....................................... 8-6 Engine oil ..................................................... GTR-4, 8-9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ..................................... 10-6 Engine oil level display .................................... 2-13 Engine oil low pressure warning ............. 2-37 Engine serial number ................................... 10-13 Engine start operation indicator ............. 2-46 Engine system warning .................................. 2-37 Operating range for engine start ........... 5-10 Starting the engine ............................................ 5-14

Engine and powertrain .............. GTR-16, GTR-24 Engine oil maintenance ...................................... GTR-4 Engine output .......................................................... GTR-25 Engine output according to the coolant temperature .......................................... GTR-25 Engine speed is restricted ............................. GTR-25 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion ............................................................. 7-9 Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................ 10-23 Exhaust gas ......................................................................... 5-3 Exhaust muffler and trunk carpet ............. GTR-7 Exhaust sound control switch ......................... 2-59 Exhaust sound control system ........................ 5-59 Explanation of maintenance items .................. 9-3 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ....................................................... 9-6 Extended storage fuse switch ......................... 8-24

Exterior and interior lights .................................. 8-28

F

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..... 10-13 Features of each mode ......................................... 5-28 Flat tire .................................................................................... 6-3 Flat towing .................................................................... 10-20 Floor mats ............................................................................ 7-6 Fluid

Brake fluid ................................................ GTR-5, 8-11 Fluid level check ................................................... 8-14 Low brake fluid warning ................................ 2-39 Low washer fluid warning ............................ 2-44 Power steering fluid .......................................... 8-11 Window washer fluid ......................................... 8-12

Fluids ......................................................... GTR-14, GTR-19 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH ................................................................... 1-24 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts ................................................ 1-27 Freeing a frozen door lock ................................. 5-57 Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems ........................ 1-45 Front seats ........................................................................... 1-3 Front/rear tire size discrepancy warning ............................................... 2-41

Fuel ................................................................................... GTR-12 Average fuel consumption and speed .................................................................. 2-17 Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants .............. 10-2 Closing the fuel-filler door ............................ 3-25 Current fuel consumption ............................ 2-16 Fuel gauge ................................................................... 2-9 Fuel information ................................................... 10-4 Fuel-filler door ........................................................ 3-24 Increasing fuel economy ............................... 5-42 Low fuel warning ................................................. 2-43 Opening the fuel-filler door ......................... 3-25

Fuel Efficient Driving Tips ..................................... 5-41 Fuses ..................................................................................... 8-22

G

Garage door opener HomeLink Universal Transceiver .......... 2-71

Gasoline smell ......................................................... GTR-24 Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge ........ 2-8 Fuel gauge ................................................................... 2-9 Meters and gauges ............................................... 2-6

General maintenance ...................................... 9-2, 9-3 Glass .......................................................................................... 7-3 Glove box ........................................................................... 2-65 GT-R performance optimization services ............................................ GTR-8 GT-R special precautions .................................. GTR-5

GT-R special specification parts .................. GTR-4 GT-R specific information ................................. GTR-3 GT-R specific vehicle characteristics ..... GTR-24

H

Handling of data ....................................................... 10-24 Hazard warning flasher switch ............................ 6-2 Head restraints/headrests ...................................... 1-5 Headlight

Headlight and turn signal switch ........... 2-53 Headlight switch ................................................... 2-53 Headlights .................................................................. 8-27

Heated seats .................................................................. 2-58 Heater

Heater and air conditioner operation ...................................... 4-10

High altitude ............................................................. GTR-25 High performance brake system ................... 8-19 Hill Start Assist System .......................................... 5-39 HomeLink Universal Transceiver ................. 2-71 Hood ...................................................................................... 3-18 Horn ....................................................................................... 2-58 How to switch the modes ................................... 5-26 How to use R mode start function .............. 5-34

I

Idle speed is not steady .................................. GTR-24 If your vehicle overheats .......................................... 6-8 Ignition switch operation ..................................... 5-11 Ignition switch positions ....................................... 5-11

11-3

11-4

In-cabin microfilter .................................................... 4-13 Increasing fuel economy ...................................... 5-42 Indicators and display ............................................. 5-37 Infants .................................................................................. 1-13 Injured persons ................................................................. 1-9 Inside mirror ................................................................... 3-27 Inspection and adjustments after driving ............................................................... GTR-19 Inspection and adjustments before driving .......................................................... GTR-14 Installing front license plate ............................ 10-16 Installing top tether strap .................... 1-26, 1-30 Instrument brightness control ......................... 2-12 Instrument panel ............................................................ 2-5 Intelligent Key .................................................................... 3-2 Intelligent Key battery discharge ................... 5-12 Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator ................................................... 2-48 Intelligent Key battery replacement ............ 8-25 Intelligent Key functions ........................................... 3-9 Intelligent Key insertion indicator ................. 2-47 Intelligent Key removal indicator ................... 2-47 Intelligent Key system ................................................. 3-8 Interior light control switch ................................ 2-70 Interior lights .................................................................. 2-69

J

Jacking vehicle and removing wheels ....... 8-42 Jump starting ..................................................... 6-5, 8-15

K

Key Intelligent Key ............................................................ 3-2 Intelligent Key battery discharge ............ 5-12 Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator ............................................ 2-48 Intelligent Key battery replacement ..... 8-25 Intelligent Key functions ................................... 3-9 Intelligent Key insertion indicator .......... 2-47 Intelligent Key removal indicator ............ 2-47 Intelligent Key system ......................................... 3-8 Keys ................................................................................... 3-2 Locking with mechanical key ....................... 3-6 No key warning ..................................................... 2-45 Remote keyless entry system ................... 3-12

L

Larger children ............................................................. 1-14 Light

AWD warning light .............................................. 5-43 Exterior and interior lights ........................... 8-28 Headlight and turn signal switch ........... 2-53 Headlight switch ................................................... 2-53 Headlights .................................................................. 8-27 Interior light control switch ......................... 2-70 Interior lights ........................................................... 2-69 Lights ............................................................................. 8-27 Map lights .................................................................. 2-69 Supplemental air bag warning light ..... 1-48 Vanity mirror lights ............................................ 2-71

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders ............................................... 2-26 Warning/indicator lights (other) .............. 2-34 Warning/indicator lights (red) ................... 2-26 Warning/indicator lights (yellow) ............ 2-29

Limited Slip Differential .......................................... 5-45 Loading tips ................................................................. 10-18 Lock

Anti-lock Braking System .............................. 5-53 Anti-lock Braking System warning ........ 2-40 Automatic door lock system ......................... 3-5 Freeing a frozen door lock .......................... 5-57 Locking with inside lock knob ...................... 3-5 Locking with mechanical key ....................... 3-6 Locking with power door lock switch ..... 3-5 Steering lock release malfunction indicator ....................................... 2-47 Wheel lock nuts ..................................................... 8-47

Low brake fluid warning ....................................... 2-39 Low fuel warning ........................................................ 2-43 Low tire pressure warning .................................. 2-42 Low washer fluid warning ................................... 2-44 Lower anchors and tethers for children system ............................................................ 1-17

M

Maintenance Brake system (NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake)) ..................................................... 8-20 Explanation of maintenance items .......... 9-3

General maintenance ............................... 9-2, 9-3 Maintenance information ........................... GTR-3 Maintenance precautions ................................ 8-3 Maintenance requirement ............................... 9-2 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance test ................. 10-22 Scheduled maintenance ................................... 9-2 Seat belt maintenance .................................... 1-12

Maintenance log and records .......................... 9-28 Map lights ......................................................................... 2-69 Measurement of weights .................................. 10-19 Meters and gauges ....................................................... 2-6 Mirror

Inside mirror ............................................................ 3-27 Mirrors ........................................................................... 3-27 Outside mirrors ..................................................... 3-28 Vanity mirror ........................................................... 3-29 Vanity mirror lights ............................................ 2-71

Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion ............................................................. 7-9 Multi Function Display Owners Manual ....... 4-2

N

NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake) ........................................... GTR-6, 8-20

Replacing brake pads and brake disc rotors ................................................................. 8-21

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System ................ 1-40 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ............ 2-50 No key warning ............................................................ 2-45

Noises are heard while driving .................. GTR-25 Normal mode ................................................................. 5-25

O

Odometer/twin trip odometer ............................ 2-7 Off-road recovery ........................................................... 5-8 Oil

Changing engine oil and filter ................... 8-10 Checking engine oil level .................................. 8-9 Differential oil ....................................................... GTR-5 Engine oil ..................................................... GTR-4, 8-9 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation ..................................... 10-6 Engine oil level display .................................... 2-13 Engine oil low pressure warning ............. 2-37 Transmission oil .................................. GTR-4, 8-10 Transmission oil high temperature warning ....................................... 2-38

Opening and closing the trunk ....................... 3-22 Opening the doors ........................................................ 3-7 Opening the fuel-filler door ................................ 3-25 Opening the hood ...................................................... 3-18 Operating range for engine start .................. 5-10 Operation displays ..................................................... 2-45 Other modes for each switch .......................... 5-25 Outside air temperature ....................................... 2-19 Outside door handles .................................................. 7-4 Outside mirrors ............................................................ 3-28 Outside temperature display indicates higher temperature ............................................ GTR-24

Overheat If your vehicle overheats .................................. 6-8

Owners Manual/Service Manual order information .................................................... 10-24

P

Parking Parking brake .......................................................... 5-34 Parking brake break-in ................................... 5-52 Parking brake release warning ................. 2-39 Parking/parking on hills ................................. 5-46

Passenger compartment ..................................... 8-23 Power

Locking with power door lock switch ..... 3-5 Power outlets .......................................................... 2-60 Power steering ....................................................... 5-51 Power steering fluid .......................................... 8-11 Power windows ..................................................... 2-67 Trunk release power cancel switch ...... 3-21

Precautions ...................................................................... 8-14 All-Wheel Drive driving safety precautions ................................................. 5-9 Braking precautions .......................................... 5-52 Maintenance precautions ................................ 8-3 Precautions on child restraints ................ 1-16 Precautions on cruise control ................... 5-36 Precautions on seat belt usage .................. 1-6 Precautions on supplemental restraint system .................................................... 1-34

11-5

11-6

Precautions when starting and driving ................................................................... 5-3

Precautions before driving ............................ GTR-11 Precautions on performance driving ..... GTR-13 Pregnant women ............................................................ 1-9 Push starting ...................................................................... 6-7 PUSH warning ............................................................. 2-46 Push-button ignition switch .............................. 5-10

R

R mode ................................................................................ 5-25 R mode start function ............................................ 5-33 Rapid air pressure loss ............................................... 5-8 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance test ......................... 10-22 Rear window defroster switch ......................... 2-52 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH ................................................................... 1-20 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts .................................................. 1-21 RearView Monitor ........................................................... 4-2 Recommended fluids and maintenance interval ......................................... GTR-20 Reducing tight corner braking phenomenon ............................................. 5-44 Refueling precautions ....................................... GTR-14 Remote keyless entry system .......................... 3-12 Removing spots ............................................................... 7-3 Removing the cowl top cover .............................. 8-5 Repair and replacement procedure ............ 1-49

Replacement of brake pads and disc rotors ..................................................................... GTR-6 Replacement of brake pads and disc rotors (NCCB (NISSAN Carbon Ceramic Brake)) ......................................................... GTR-6 Replacing spark plugs ............................................ 8-17 Replacing the brake pads .................................... 8-20 Replacing the wiper blades ................................ 8-18 Reporting safety defects .................................. 10-21 Reverse warning .......................................................... 2-38 Roadside assistance program.............................. 6-2 Run-flat tire warning ................................................ 2-42 Run-flat tires ....................................................................... 6-4

S

Safety All-Wheel Drive driving safety precautions ................................................. 5-9 Child safety ............................................................... 1-13 Reporting safety defects .......................... 10-21

Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ........................... 1-1 Scheduled maintenance ........................................... 9-2 Seat

Booster seats .......................................................... 1-30 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts .............. 1-27

Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag systems ............................................................. 1-45 Front seats ................................................................... 1-3 Heated seats ........................................................... 2-58 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System ......... 1-40 Precautions on seat belt usage .................. 1-6 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts ........................................... 1-21 Seat belt extenders ............................................ 1-12 Seat belt maintenance .................................... 1-12 Seat belts ........................................................... 1-6, 7-8 Seat belts with pretensioners ................... 1-46 Seats ................................................................................. 1-2 Three-point type seat belt with retractor ............................................................. 1-9

Seat belt Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts .............. 1-27 Precautions on seat belt usage .................. 1-6 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts ........................................... 1-21 Seat belt extenders ............................................ 1-12 Seat belt maintenance .................................... 1-12 Seat belts ........................................................... 1-6, 7-8 Seat belts with pretensioners ................... 1-46 Three-point type seat belt with retractor ............................................................. 1-9

Security systems ......................................................... 2-48

Self-adjusting brakes ............................................... 8-19 Servicing air conditioner ....................................... 4-14 Setting (drive computer) ....................................... 2-20 Setting guide of wheel alignment depending on the customers driving ........ 9-21 Setting hazard indicator and horn mode ....................................................................... 3-14 Shift lever position warning ............................... 2-37 Shift P warning .......................................................... 2-46 Small children ................................................................ 1-14 Sonar system ................................................................. 5-48 Sonar system off switch ....................................... 2-59 Sonar system setting .............................................. 5-50 Spark plugs ...................................................................... 8-16 Special winter equipment .................................... 5-57 Specifications ................................................................. 10-9 Speedometer ...................................................................... 2-7 Starting

Before starting the engine ........................... 5-13 Jump starting ............................................. 6-5, 8-15 Precautions when starting and driving ................................................................... 5-3 Push starting .............................................................. 6-7 Starting the engine ............................................ 5-14

Steering Power steering ....................................................... 5-51 Power steering fluid .......................................... 8-11 Steering lock release malfunction indicator ....................................... 2-47 Steering wheel ....................................................... 3-26 Steering-wheel-mounted controls ........ 5-36

Tilt/telescopic steering column ............... 3-26 Storage ............................................................................... 2-63 Summer tires ............................................................ GTR-11 Sun visors .......................................................................... 3-27 Sunglasses holder ...................................................... 2-64 Supplemental air bag warning labels ........ 1-48 Supplemental air bag warning light ............ 1-48 Supplemental restraint system ....................... 1-34 Suspension and wheel alignment .............................. GTR-16, GTR-22 Switch

Hazard warning flasher switch .................... 6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch ........... 2-53 Headlight switch ................................................... 2-53 How to switch the modes ............................ 5-26 Ignition switch operation .............................. 5-11 Ignition switch positions ................................ 5-11 Interior light control switch ......................... 2-70 Locking with power door lock switch ..... 3-5 Push-button ignition switch ....................... 5-10 Rear window defroster switch .................. 2-52 Trunk lid release switch ................................. 3-20 Trunk open request switch ......................... 3-20 Trunk release power cancel switch ...... 3-21 VDC, transmission and suspension setup switches ....................................................... 5-25 Wiper and washer switch .............................. 2-51

T

Tachometer ......................................................................... 2-8 Temperature A, B and C .................................... 10-20 Terms ................................................................................ 10-16 Three-point type seat belt with retractor ..................................................................... 1-9 Three-way catalyst ........................................................ 5-3 Tight corner braking phenomenon ............. 5-44 Tilt/telescopic steering column ...................... 3-26 Tire

Changing wheels and tires .......................... 8-39 Checking the tire pressure .......................... 8-33 Flat tire ............................................................................ 6-3 Front/rear tire size discrepancy warning ........................................ 2-41 Low tire pressure warning ........................... 2-42 Run-flat tire warning ......................................... 2-42 Run-flat tires ............................................................... 6-4 Tire and loading information label ............................... 8-32, 10-14 Tire chains ................................................................. 8-38 Tire dressing ............................................................... 7-4 Tire equipment ...................................................... 5-57 Tire labeling .............................................................. 8-35 Tire pressure ............................................................ 8-30 Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..... 5-4, 6-3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System warning .................................................... 2-42 Tire replacement record ................................ 9-23 Tires ................................................................................ 5-44

11-7

11-8

Types of tires .......................................................... 8-37 Uniform tire quality grading ................... 10-20 Wheels and tires ................................ 8-29, 10-10

Tires and road wheels ......................................... GTR-5 Titanium muffler ....................................................... GTR-7

Change of surface color of titanium muffler ............................................. GTR-29 Sound heard around titanium muffler ............................................. GTR-29

To protect your vehicle from corrosion ....... 7-9 Towing

Flat towing ............................................................ 10-20 Towing a trailer ................................................. 10-19 Towing recommended by NISSAN ............ 6-9 Towing your vehicle ............................................. 6-9

Traction AA, A, B and C ....................................... 10-20 Transceiver

HomeLink Universal Transceiver .......... 2-71 Transmission

Dual clutch transmission ............................... 5-15 Transmission clutch high temperature warning ....................................... 2-39 Transmission oil .................................. GTR-4, 8-10 Transmission oil high temperature warning ....................................... 2-38 Transmission position indicator .............. 2-10 Transmission system check display ..... 2-15 Transmission system warning .................. 2-38 VDC, transmission and suspension setup switches ....................................................... 5-25

Transmission assembly/parts replacement record .................................................. 9-26 Transmission operation characteristics ............................... GTR-31 Transmission settings .......................................... GTR-9 Treadwear ..................................................................... 10-20 Troubleshooting guide ........................................... 3-17 Trunk .................................................................................... 3-20 Trunk lid release switch ........................................ 3-20 Trunk open request switch ................................ 3-20 Trunk release power cancel switch ............. 3-21 Turbocharger system .............................................. 5-32 Turning off the heaters ......................................... 2-58 Turning on the heaters ......................................... 2-58 Types of tires ................................................................. 8-37

U

Underbody ............................................................................ 7-3 Uneven wear of tires ......................................... GTR-25 Uniform tire quality grading ........................... 10-20 Upshift indicator .......................................................... 2-10 Using the washer ........................................................ 2-52 Using the wipers ......................................................... 2-51

V

Vanity mirror .................................................................. 3-29 Vanity mirror lights ................................................... 2-71 VDC, transmission and suspension setup switches .............................................................. 5-25

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF mode ................................................................... GTR-11 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light .................................................................. 2-34 Vehicle Dynamic Control system ................... 5-54 Vehicle Dynamic Control system warning ........................................................... 2-40 Vehicle identification ............................................. 10-12

Vehicle identification number ............... 10-12 Vehicle Identification Number plate ...................................................... 10-12

Vehicle information display ................................ 2-13 Vehicle load capacity ............................................ 10-18 Vehicle loading information ............................ 10-16 Vehicle recovery .............................................................. 6-9 Vehicle security system ......................................... 2-48 Vehicle speed ................................................................. 2-17 Vehicle status data recorder .......................... 10-24 Ventilators ............................................................................ 4-9

W

Warning Anti-lock Braking System warning ........ 2-40 AWD clutch high temperature warning ....................................... 2-40 AWD system warning ....................................... 2-41 AWD warning light .............................................. 5-43 Brake pad wear warning ............................... 8-19 Cruise control system warning ................ 2-43 Door/trunk open warning ............................ 2-44

Engine oil low pressure warning ............. 2-37 Engine system warning .................................. 2-37 Front/rear tire size discrepancy warning ........................................ 2-41 Hazard warning flasher switch .................... 6-2 Low brake fluid warning ................................ 2-39 Low fuel warning ................................................. 2-43 Low tire pressure warning ........................... 2-42 Low washer fluid warning ............................ 2-44 No key warning ..................................................... 2-45 Parking brake release warning ................. 2-39 PUSH warning ...................................................... 2-46 Reverse warning ................................................... 2-38 Run-flat tire warning ......................................... 2-42 Shift lever position warning ........................ 2-37 Shift P warning ................................................... 2-46 Supplemental air bag warning labels ........................................................ 1-48 Supplemental air bag warning light ..... 1-48 Tire Pressure Monitoring System warning .................................................... 2-42 Transmission clutch high temperature warning ....................................... 2-39 Transmission oil high temperature warning ....................................... 2-38 Transmission system warning .................. 2-38 Vehicle Dynamic Control system warning .................................................... 2-40 Warning (drive computer) ............................. 2-24 Warning display ..................................................... 2-36

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders ............................................... 2-26 Warning signals ..................................................... 3-16 Warning/indicator lights (red) ................... 2-26

Warning/indicator lights (other) ..................... 2-34 Warning/indicator lights (yellow) ................... 2-29 Warranty information ........................................... GTR-3 Washing .................................................................................. 7-2 Waxing ..................................................................................... 7-3 Wheel alignment ..................................... GTR-10, 5-40 Wheel alignment inspection and adjustment (if necessary) (including tire pressure adjustment) ........................................... GTR-9 Wheel lock nuts ............................................................ 8-47 Wheels ...................................................................................... 7-4 Wheels and tires ........................... GTR-17, GTR-22, 8-29, 10-10 When traveling or registering in another country ........................................................ 10-12 Where to go for service ............................................. 9-2 Window washer fluid ................................................ 8-12 Windows ............................................................................. 2-67 Windshield wiper blades ....................................... 8-18 Wiper

Replacing the wiper blades ......................... 8-18 Using the wipers .................................................. 2-51 Windshield wiper blades ................................ 8-18 Wiper and washer switch .............................. 2-51

Wiper and washer switch ..................................... 2-51

11-9

11-10

MEMO

FUEL INFORMATION

VR38 engine Use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 93 AKI (Anti- Knock Index) number (Research octane number 98) to maximize vehicle perfor- mance. If the premium gasoline specified above is not available, you may use unleaded premium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91 AKI number (Research octane number 96), but you may notice a decrease in performance. Do not use gasoline with a lower octane rating than 91 AKI (Research octane number 96).

NOTICE . Using a fuel other than that spe-

cified could adversely affect the emission control systems, and may also affect warranty cover- age.

. Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, since this will damage the three way catalyst.

. Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can adversely affect the emission control de- vices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.

. U.S. government regulations re- quire ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.

. NISSAN recommends using fuels that contain no alcohol. However, fuels containing up to 10% alco- hol may be used, if necessary. To avoid serious engine damage due to increased cylinder tempera- ture, do not use fuels that contain more alcohol than indicated in

Gasoline containing oxyge- nates page 10-5. Also, do not use fuel additives, fuel stabilizers or fuel deicers that contain alcohol.

For additional information, see the follow- ing section. ( Capacities and recom- mended fluids/lubricants page 10-2)

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION Mobil 1 (0W-40) (100% synthetic) is the factory fill oil. The VR38 engine with its plasma-sprayed bores was developed using this oil. NISSAN cannot ensure proper engine operation and durability if other 0W-40 non-equivalent synthetic oil is used. If Mobil 1 (0W-40) or equivalent is not available, Mobil 1 (10W-40) (100% synthetic) or equivalent may be used; however, some performance loss may be noticed. See the following section for engine oil and o i l f i l t e r r ecommendat i on . ( Capacities and recommended fluids/lubricants page 10-2)

COLD TIRE PRESSURES The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the drivers door. ( Wheels and tires page 8-29)

GAS STATION INFORMATION

NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCE- DURES RECOMMENDATION Follow these recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the recommendations outl ined in this Owner s Manual . ( Break-in schedule page 5-40)

20 21 N

ISSA N

G T-R

R 35-D

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicleR35-D

Printing : September 2021 Publica

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the GT-R Nissan works, you can view and download the Nissan GT-R v17 Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Nissan GT-R as well as other Nissan manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Nissan GT-R. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Nissan GT-R v17 Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Nissan GT-R v17 Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Nissan GT-R v17 Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Nissan GT-R v17 Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Nissan GT-R v17 Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.